Land Rover LR3 Owners Handbook

R
OWNERS HANDBOOK
Publication Part No. LRL 18 02 53 502
Land Rover 2004
Introduction
This handbook covers all current versions of the LR3 models and, together with the other books in
your literature pack, provides all the information that you need to derive maximum pleasure from
owning and driving your new vehicle.
For your convenience, the handbook is divided into sections, each dealing with a different aspect of
the vehicle. These are listed on the Contents page and you will find it worthwhile to take a little time
to read each one, and get to know your LR3 as soon as you possibly can. The more you understand
before you drive, the greater the satisfaction once you are seated behind the steering wheel.
The specification of each vehicle will vary according to territorial requirements and also from model
to model within the vehicle range. Some of the information published in this handbook, therefore,
may not apply to your particular vehicle.
To include changes made after the handbook is printed, it is sometimes necessary to issue one or
more handbook supplements. When reading this handbook, check the literature pack for possible
supplements.
Any further updates will be posted on the Land Rover internet site and can be accessed at
www.landrover.com in the Owner Information area.
* An asterisk appearing within the handbook text identifies features or items of equipment that
are either optional, or are only fitted to some vehicles in the model range.
Land Rover operates a policy of constant product improvement and therefore reserves the right to
change specifications without notice at any time. Whilst every effort is made to ensure complete
accuracy of the information in this handbook, no liabilities for inaccuracies or the consequences
thereof can be accepted by the manufacturer or the retailer, except in respect of personal injury
caused by the negligence of the manufacturer or the retailer.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted, in any form, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or other means without
prior written permission from the Service Division of Land Rover.
As part of Land Rovers environmental policy, this publication is printed on paper made
from chlorine-free pulp.
Handbook Contents
Quick Overview
Driving & Operating
Quick Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Gas Station Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Starting & Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Distance Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Stability & Traction Control . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terrain Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Eyes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Carrying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Lighting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Controls & Instruments

Keys & Handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Locks & Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Airbag SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Door Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Facia Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Settings Option* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Message Center* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Trip Computer* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Warning Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Audible Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Lamps & Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Wipers & Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Electric Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Heating & Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Interior Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Loadspace Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Audio System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
In-Car Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Land Rover Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
171
175
176
180
182
187
190
192
198
200
203
209
216
224
227
229
230
On-road Driving
On-road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Off-road Driving
Off-road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Off-road Driving Techniques . . . . . . . . . . 243
Maintenance
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Under-hood Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning & Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts & Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
254
255
256
258
259
261
262
263
265
267
270
284
287
288
Handbook Contents
Roadside Emergency
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
304
306
315
Technical Data
Lubricants & Fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels & Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
333
334
335
336
337
340
341
342
Quick Overview
Quick Overview
THE REMOTE HANDSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
EMERGENCY UNLOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
FACIA CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
WARNING LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR . . . . . . . . .11
LAMPS MASTER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
WIPERS & WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
CONFIGURABLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . .14
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
INTERLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
PARKBRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
AUTOMATIC MIRROR DIPPING . . . . . . . . .17
REMOVING THE BOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
OCCUPANT DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
VOICE RECOGNITION* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
ACCESS TO 3RD ROW SEATS . . . . . . . . . .19
Gas Station Information

FUEL FILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
OPENING THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
TIRE PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Quick Overview
Quick Overview
Quick Overview
THE REMOTE HANDSET
4. Land Rover button. The handset can be

programmed to initiate one of 3 features;
Panic alarm, Headlamp courtesy delay or
Air suspension control. For a full
description of how to programme this
button see LAND ROVER BUTTON, 36.
Partial arming
If the drivers door is not fully closed when the
handset lock button is pressed the vehicle horn
will activate. Until the door is fully closed the
vehicle will remain unlocked and unprotected
by the alarm system.
2
3
4
H5350G
1. Key release button. Press to release the

folded key.
2. Lock button. Locks all doors and activates
perimetric alarm, but not interior space
protection and tilt sensor options if fitted.
Pressing the button twice within 3 seconds
superlocks all doors and activates
perimetric alarm, interior space protection
and tilt sensor options if fitted. See
Superlocking, 39, Perimetric alarm, 40,
Interior space protection*, 40 and Tilt
Sensor*, 41.
WARNING
When the doors have been superlocked, they
cannot be opened from inside the vehicle.
Therefore doors should not be superlocked if
anyone is to remain inside the vehicle.
3. Unlock button. Press once to disarm all
alarm features and unlock drivers door
only. Press twice to open all doors.
Quick Overview
EMERGENCY UNLOCKING
H5801G
If the handset should fail there is an emergency

access feature on the left-hand front door lock.
With the key inserted into the slot beneath the
handle cap, the cap can be pulled outwards
slightly and then moved backwards to unhook
it. The key can now be used to unlock the
vehicle. For a full description of this feature see
Emergency locking/unlocking, 44
Quick Overview
FACIA CONTROLS
1
4 5
FM1
2 KSAN FM
10
14 : 54
7
6
H5353N
For a full description of facia controls and their

functions, see FACIA CONTROLS, 89.
1. Headlamps and direction indicator controls

2. Wiper and washer control
3. Audio/display controls
4. Hazard warning light switch
5. Heater/air conditioning controls
6. Display screen*
7. Electric parkbrake switch
8. Starter switch
9. Cruise control switches*
10. Lamps master switch
Note: The precise specification and location of
the controls may vary according to territorial
requirements and from vehicle to vehicle.
Quick Overview
WARNING LIGHTS
3 4
5 6 7 8 9
10
EXT 23 C
11
H5356N
If one of these red warning lights illuminates, a

serious fault is indicated. Stop the vehicle and
refer to the main section of this handbook.
1. Battery charging (RED).

2. Low oil pressure (RED).
3. Safety belts (RED).
For a full description of warning lights and their

functions, see Warning Indicators, 108.
4. Airbag SRS (RED).

5. Door open (RED).
For a full description of the message centre and

its functions see Message Center*, 95.
6. Brakes (RED).
7. Transmission (RED).
8. Transmission temperature (RED).
9. Tire pressure monitoring (RED).
10. Parkbrake (RED).
11. Message Centre*.
10
Quick Overview
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR
LAMPS MASTER SWITCH
AUTO
H5804G
3
4
AUTO
To view the next service date, turn the starter

key to position l and then, within 5 seconds,
press the System Check control button
(arrowed). The next service date is displayed
(dd.mm.yy) for 5 seconds.
For a full description of this feature, see
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR, 105
H5357L
1. Off.
2. Side lamps.
3. Low beam headlamps.
4. Auto lamps*
For a full description of these functions, see
EXTERIOR LAMPS, 115.
11
Quick Overview
WIPERS & WASHERS
3
AUTO
2
1
H5359G
The detent positions from fully pushed in are:
H5360G
1. Off
1. Intermittent wipe
2. Front fog lamps*
2. Normal speed wipe.
3. Rear fog lamps
3. Fast speed wipe.
If front fog lamps are not fitted, the rear fog

lamps come on at the first pull of the switch.
For a single wipe, pull the lever down and

release immediately.
Headlamp delay feature

When you leave the vehicle in a darkened
situation you can set the headlamps to remain
on for a while.
Intermittent variable delay
With the master switch in positions 2, 3 or 4,

turn the starter switch off and remove the key.
Turn the master switch to the off position. The
headlamps will remain on for up to 240
seconds. For a full description of this feature
and how to set the time delay, see Headlamp
courtesy delay, 116.
H5361G
With the lever in position 1, rotate the switch to

vary the delay between wipes.
12
Quick Overview
Windshield washer control
H5362G
Rear window wash/wipe
H5363G
For more detailed information on the wash/wipe

system, see WINDSHIELD WIPERS, 119
13
Quick Overview
CONFIGURABLE FEATURES
Settings options (trip computer)
A number of features can be configured via the settings menu that can be displayed on the main
message centre. See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 93.
SETTINGS
TRIP DISTANCE UNITS (odometer)
FUEL USAGE UNITS
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE
OVERSPEED WARNING
HEADLAMP OFF DELAY

AUTO DOOR LOCK (speed related locking)
REVERSE MIRROR DIP
LAZY ENTRY
RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS
CHOICE
MILES/KM
MPG
l/100km
Km/l
oC or oF
Off
20 - 250 km/h or 15 to 140 mph in 5-unit steps
(Units set as trip distance)
30/60/120/240 seconds
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
YES/NO
Remote handset
The following features can be configured by, or
for use with, the remote handset :
Single point entry, allowing only the drivers

door to be opened remotely. See,
Single-point entry, 41.
Panic alarm, for personal protection. See,

LAND ROVER BUTTON, 36.
Headlamp courtesy delay, providing

lighting for personal safety. See,LAND
ROVER BUTTON, 36.
Starter key reminder

Provides an audible warning indicating that the
key is in the starter switch when the drivers
door is open. See,Starter key reminder, 114.
Daytime running lamps
Unless prevented by legislation, it is possible to
automatically switch on the exterior lamps
whenever the engine is running. See,Daytime
running lamps*, 117.
Speed dependant wiper mode
The wiper speed in all modes can be
automatically varied according to vehicle
speed. See,Speed-dependant mode, 120.
Air suspension control, allows remote

operation of the air suspension. See,LAND
ROVER BUTTON, 36.
14
Quick Overview
INTERLOCKS
PARKBRAKE
The parkbrake is electrically operated.
Automatic transmission can only be started

when the gear selector lever is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position.
To move the lever from P to R, R to P or N
to R, the selector release button (see inset)
must be pressed.
H5806L
To apply the parkbrake, lift the lever and release

it. A RED indicator light in the instrument pack
will illuminate continuously.
To release the parkbrake the starter key must be
switched on and pressure must be applied to
the foot brake.
The parkbrake will release automatically if the
accelerator pedal is pressed. To delay this
release, hold the parkbrake lever in the raised
position until you are ready to move, then
release it.
For more detailed information on the parkbrake,
see PARKBRAKE, 195.
H5589L
To move from P or N into a drive gear

position, the foot brake must be applied.
For more detailed information on the automatic
gearbox, see USING AN AUTOMATIC
GEARBOX, 182.
15
Quick Overview
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
CONTROLS
12
12
11
10
9
H5513N
1. Auto mode:
Press for fully automatic operation.
2. Blower control
3. Temperature controls:
Rotate anticlockwise for maximum cooling.
4. Air distribution controls
5. Air recirculation control - manual
6. Off
7. Economy mode
8. Rear environment
9. Heated rear windshield
10. Heated windshield.*
11. Defrost mode
Press to defrost or demist the windshield.
12. Front seat heaters*
For more detailed information on the climate
control system, see TEMPERATURE
CONTROLS, 129.
16
Quick Overview
AUTOMATIC MIRROR DIPPING
OCCUPANT DETECTION
If your vehicle is fitted with the drivers seat

memory option, the door mirrors may dip when
reverse gear is selected. This gives the driver a
view of the curbside to aid vehicle positioning
when reversing.
The front passenger seat is equipped with an

occupancy sensor which measures the weight
on the cushion and changes the passenger
airbag status.
The occupancy sensor operates as follows:
The feature is optional and can be adjusted by

the user.
Seat
occupancy
status
Completely
empty
Low weight
occupant/
object
Heavy
occupant/
object
For more detailed information on automatic

mirror dipping, see Automatic mirror
dipping*, 88.
REMOVING THE BOOM

If a resonance/booming sound occurs with only
the rear windows open, lowering a front
window about 25 mm (1 inch) will eliminate the
condition. This will change the frequency of the
air volume moving in/out of the vehicle and
thus lessen or remove the booming sound.
Passenger
airbag status
Indicator
active
Deactivated
No
Deactivated
Yes
Activated
No
It
is possible to receive an intermittent

indicator with an empty seat condition. This is
part of the systems adaptive behaviour, and
does not affect the status of the passenger
airbag. However, if the indicator becomes
permanently illuminated when the seat is
definitely empty, then contact your Land Rover
Retailer immediately.
WARNING
Do not use a child restraint on a seat
protected by an operational air bag in front of
it.
There is a risk of death or serious injury when
the airbag deploys.
The safest place for children is properly
restrained in the rear seats.
For more details on occupancy detection, see
Occupant detection, 82
17
Quick Overview
VOICE RECOGNITION*
To activate voice control:
Voice control provides a safe and convenient

way of operating the audio system without the
need to operate the controls manually. This
enables you to concentrate fully on driving the
vehicle, and removes the need to divert your
attention from the road ahead in order to
change settings, or receive feedback from the
system.
Briefly pull the control paddle (your Audio

will mute at this point). A brief acoustic
signal will be heard, and LISTENING will
be displayed on the main message centre
to indicate that the system is now waiting
for a voice command.
Note: It is only necessary to use the steering

wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of
each voice session.
A number of voice commands are available, and

with a little experience you will find them easy
and convenient to use. Whenever you issue one
of the defined commands with the system
active, the voice control system converts your
command into a control signal for the audio
system. Your inputs take the form of dialogues
or commands. You are guided through these
dialogues by announcements or questions.
Defined voice commands

The voice control system understands
predominate commands which need to be
quoted word for word.
An audio feedback of voice commands is
available. To activate the feedback, pull the
voice control paddle briefly and give one of the
following commands:
Activating the system
General commands
Voice help To list all commands.
Notepad Help To list Notepad commands.
Audio commands
Radio help To list Radio commands.
CD help To list CD commands.

Please refer to the Audio System Handbook
for full operating instructions.
Navigation & Telephone commands
Phone help To list telephone commands.
Navigation help To list Navigation

commands.
Please refer to the Navigation, TV &
Telephone Handbook for full operating
instructions.
For further information see VOICE

RECOGNITION*, 162.
H5786R
18
Quick Overview
ACCESS TO 3RD ROW SEATS
H5803G
Lower the headrest on the seat ahead of the 3rd

row seat.
Pull the release lever (upper inset) and fold the
seat into the table fold position. Now pull up the
access lever on the side of the folded seat and
tilt the seat forward into the access position.
Once access to the 3rd row seat is gained,
return the folded seat to the upright position.
For more detailed information on seat folding,
see SECOND-ROW SEATS - 5-SEAT VEHICLE,
57 , SECOND-ROW SEATS - 7-SEAT VEHICLE,
59 and THIRD-ROW SEATS, 64
19

FUEL FILLER
The fuel filler is located in the rear right-hand
wing. Press the fuel filler flap to open.
The fuel filler flap springs out, revealing the
filler cap.
Unscrew the filler cap and place it on the
projection on top of the hinge of the fuel filler
flap.
Insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck,
pushing aside the spring-loaded cover.
H5367G
When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle

and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise
until you hear it click three times.
Fuel type
V6 and V8 engines
Premium unleaded gasoline with a CLC or AKI octane rating of 90

or higher. See TYPE OF FUEL, 178
Note: Mid or regular grade gasoline with a CLC or AKI octane rating
of not lower than 87 may also be used, but performance and fuel
economy will be reduced.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside hood release

2. Hood safety catch
2
1
H5368G
Engine oil top-up

V8 vehicles
Use a 5W/30 oil to specification ACEA:A1/A3 (API SI/EC GF-3)
V6 vehicles
Use a 5W/30 oil to specification ACEA:A1/B1 (API SI/EC GF-3)
Cooling system top-up
All vehicles to -36C (-33F) 50% mix of water and an approved antifreeze
Note: For more detailed information, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 331
20

TIRE PRESSURES
Air pressure naturally increases in warm tires
(after the vehicle has been driven for a while). If
you have to check warm tires, you should
expect the pressures to have increased by
between 30 and 40 kPa (0.3 to 0.4 bar) (4 to 6
lbf/in2). In this circumstance, NEVER let air out
of the tires in order to match the recommended
pressures.
kPa
bar
lbf/in2
Front
230
2.3
33
Rear
250
2.5
36
Front
230
2.3
33
Rear
290
2.9
42
420
4.2
60
Loading condition
Normal operating conditions
Vehicle loaded to maximum gross vehicle weight
Compact spare tire (All operating conditions)
21
22
General Information
General Information
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . .25
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
HANDLING CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . .26
SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
WARNINGS IN THIS HANDBOOK . . . . . . . .26
WARNING LABELS ATTACHED
TO THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
PASSPORT TO SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
TIRE PRESSURE LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
TOW BAR LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
SUN VISOR LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
BRAKE PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
IN AN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
ANTI-THEFT PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . .29
BREAKING-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
ON-BOARD EVENT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
23
24
General Information
General Information
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash, or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Land Rover North America Inc.
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents and
certain vehicle components contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
components wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

open an investigation and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your Retailer
or Land Rover North America Inc.
Auto safety hotline
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety HOTLINE toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or
202-366-0123 in the Washington, DC. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from the HOTLINE.
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
25
General Information
HANDLING CHARACTERISTICS
WARNINGS IN THIS HANDBOOK
WARNING
WARNING
Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance

and hence, a higher center of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars, to enable the
vehicle to perform in a wide variety of off-road
applications. An advantage of the higher
ground clearance is a better view of the road
allowing you to anticipate problems.
Safety warnings are included in this

handbook. These indicate either a procedure
which must be followed precisely, or
information that should be considered with
great care in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury.
The vehicle is not designed for cornering at

the same speed as conventional passenger
cars any more than a low-slung sports car is
designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid
sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvers. As with
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
the vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or vehicle rollover. For important
safety information, be sure to read the
On-Road and Off-Road driving guidelines
given later in this handbook.
Caution: Cautions are included in this

handbook. These indicate either a procedure
which must be followed precisely, or
information that should be considered with
great care in order to avoid the possibility of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING LABELS ATTACHED

TO THE VEHICLE
Warning labels attached to your vehicle
bearing this symbol mean: DO NOT
touch or adjust components until you
have read the relevant instructions in
the handbook.
SYMBOLS
Warning labels showing this symbol

indicate that the ignition system utilises
very high voltages. DO NOT touch any
ignition components while the starter
switch is turned on!
The following symbols used within the

handbook call your attention to specific types of
information.
This recycling symbol identifies those
items that must be disposed of safely in
order to prevent unnecessary damage to the
environment.
This symbol identifies those features that
can be adjusted or disabled/enabled by a
Land Rover Retailer.
26
General Information
PASSPORT TO SERVICE
Information on tire pressures for differing tires

and vehicle loadings is given on a label attached
to the B post on the drivers side.
The Passport to Service book included in your

literature pack contains important vehicle
identification information, details of your
entitlement under the terms of the Land Rover
Warranty, as well as useful consumer advice.
For further information on tire pressures, see

TIRE PRESSURES, 338, TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM*, 282 , WHEELS &
TIRES, 337.
Most important of all, however, is the section

on maintenance. This outlines the servicing
requirements for your vehicle and also includes
the service record slips, which the Retailer
should sign and stamp to certify that the routine
services have been carried out at the
recommended intervals.
TOW BAR LABEL
TIRE PRESSURE LABELS

MFD BY LANDROVER IN THE UK
DATE : MM/YY GVWR: 3230KG (7121LB)

GAWR FRONT: 1450KG (3197LB)
235/70R17 TIRES, 7.0JX17 RIMS, AT 230KPA (33PSI) COLD
T175/80R19 TIRES, 5.5JX19 RIM, AT 420KPA (60PSI) COLD
GAWR REAR: 1870KG (4123LB)
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE
U.S.FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE
TESTMARK1234567890
TYPE : MULTI - PURPOSE PASSENGER VEHICLE
H5371G
A label, located on the inside face of the rear

bumper access hatch, shows the attachment
and removal procedure for the tow bar system.
For information on removing and fitting the
detachable tow bar, see Towing, 216.
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

SEATING CAPACITY
TOTAL 7
FRONT 2
REAR 3 + 2
ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE
COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

230kpa, 33PSI
FRONT
290kpa, 42PSI
REAR
COMPACT SPARE TIRE COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
T175/80R90
420kpa, 60PSI
255/55R19
SEE OWNER'S
MANUAL FOR
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
RTC500490
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 668kg or 1473lbs
H5768N
27
General Information
SUN VISOR LABELS
BRAKE PADS
Brake pads require a period of bedding in. For
the first 800 km (500 miles), you should avoid
situations where heavy braking is required.
Remember! Regular servicing is vital to ensure
that the brake pads are examined for wear and
changed periodically to ensure long term safety
and optimum performance.
IN AN EMERGENCY
Remember the breakdown safety code
front
ta
H5789N
Always take careful note of warning information

about the airbag SRS affixed to the drivers and
passengers sun visor.
An additional label, located on the B post,
warns against the use of rear-facing child seats
in the front passenger seat.
For further information concerning the airbag
SRS and the use of child restraints, consult the
relevant sections of this handbook.
28
Wherever possible, consistent with road

safety and traffic conditions, the vehicle
should be moved off the main
thoroughfare, preferably into an
emergency lane. If a breakdown occurs on
a motorway, pull well over to the inside of
the hard shoulder.
Switch on hazard lights.
If possible, position a warning triangle or a

flashing amber light at an appropriate
distance from the vehicle to warn other
traffic of the breakdown, (note the legal
requirements of some countries).
Consider evacuating passengers through

nearside doors onto the verge as a
precaution in case your vehicle is
accidentally struck by other traffic.
General Information
ANTI-THEFT PRECAUTIONS
BREAKING-IN
While it may be difficult to deter the

professional car thief, the majority of thefts are
carried out by unskilled opportunists.
Therefore, take vehicle security very seriously
and ALWAYS adopt this simple four point drill
whenever you leave your vehicle - even for just
a few minutes:
Proper breaking-in will have a direct bearing on

the reliability and smooth running of your
vehicle throughout its life.
In particular, the engine, gearbox, brakes and
tires need time to bed-in and adjust to the
demands of everyday motoring. During the first
500 miles (800 km), it is essential to drive with
consideration for the running-in process and
heed the following advice:
1. Fully close all the windows (and the

sunroof).
2. Remove your valuable belongings (or hide
them out of sight).
LIMIT maximum road speed to 70 mph

(110 km/h) or 3,000 rev/min. Initially, drive
the vehicle on a light throttle and only
increase engine speeds gradually once the
breaking-in distance has been completed.
DO NOT operate at full throttle or allow the

engine to labour in any gear.
AVOID fast acceleration and heavy braking

except in emergencies.
3. Remove the starter key.

4. Superlock the vehicle using the remote
handset.
Thieves are attracted by vulnerable vehicles.
Even if you have followed the four point drill,
there is still much you can do to make your
vehicle a less inviting target.
BE SAFE - NOT SORRY!
Park where your vehicle can be easily seen

by householders and passers-by.
At night, park in well lit areas and avoid

deserted or dimly-lit side streets.
NEVER leave the keys in the vehicle.
Do not keep important documents (or

spare keys) in the vehicle - these are a real
bonus for the thief.
29
General Information
ON-BOARD EVENT DATA
To access this information special equipment

must be connected directly to the recording
modules. Land Rover do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or third parties acting
with lawful authority.
Service data recording

Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or
status of various systems and modules in the
vehicle such as engine, throttle, steering or
brakes.
Other parties may seek to access the

information independently of Land Rover.
In order to properly diagnose and service your

vehicle, Land Rover and service and repair
facilities may access vehicle diagnostic
information through a direct connection to your
vehicle.
Event data recording
Other modules in your vehicle - event data
recorders - are capable of collecting and storing
data during a crash or near-crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the
investigation of such an event. The modules
may record information about both the vehicle
and the occupants, potentially including
information such as:
How various systems in your vehicle were

operating.
Whether or not the driver and passenger

seat belts were buckled.
How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or the brake pedal.
How fast the vehicle was travelling.
Where the driver was positioning the

steering wheel.
30

Keys & Handsets
KEYS AND HANDSETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
LAND ROVER BUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Locks & Alarms

ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
LOCKING/UNLOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
ENGINE IMMOBILISATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Seats
FRONT SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
MANUAL FRONT SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
POWER AND MANUAL FRONT
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
POWER OPERATED FRONT SEATS . . . . . . .52
HEATED SEATS* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
DRIVERS SEAT MEMORY
FACILITY* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
SECOND-ROW SEATS 5-SEAT VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
SECOND-ROW SEATS 7-SEAT VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
THIRD-ROW SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Seat Belts
SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
PREGNANT WOMEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
SEAT BELT SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
FRONT SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
SECOND AND THIRD ROW SEAT
BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
REAR SEATS - 7-SEAT VEHICLES . . . . . . . .69
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS . . . . . . . . . . .70
CARING FOR SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
31

Child Restraints
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
LED DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
SPEEDOMETER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
CHILD SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
LATCH CHILD RESTRAINTS
(Second-row seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
CHILD RESTRAINT CHECK LISTS . . . . . . . 76
Audible Warnings
AUDIBLE WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Airbag SRS
AIRBAG SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOW THE AIRBAG SRS WORKS . . . . . . . .
AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps & Indicators
77
81
83
84
EXTERIOR LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

HAZARD WARNING LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . 118
DIRECTION INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Wipers & Washers
Steering Column
Facia Controls
OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WINDSHIELD WIPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRONT WINDSHIELD WASHER . . . . . . . .
HEADLAMP POWER WASH . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR WINDOW WIPER
AND WASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FACIA CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
FACIA CONTROLS KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Horn
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . 85
Door Mirrors
EXTERIOR MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
119
119
121
121
122
HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Instruments
Electric Windows
INSTRUMENT PACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
ELECTRIC WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Settings Option*
Sunroof
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION . . . . . . . . . 93
SUNROOF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Message Center*
MAIN MESSAGE CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
MESSAGE CENTER
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR . . . . . . . 105
GEAR SELECTOR DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ODOMETER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Heating & Ventilation
Trip Computer*
Interior Equipment
TRIP COMPUTER* FUNCTION SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
INTERIOR LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMOKERS EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS . . . . . . . . .
CUP HOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR STORAGE BINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUBBY BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COOL BOX* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION OF CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . .
SEAT HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR PASSENGER CONTROLS* . . . . . . .
VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Indicators
INDICATOR GROUPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
TACHOMETER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
FUEL/TEMPERATURE GAUGE
32
129
129
133
134
135
139
142
144
145
146
149
150
151

SUN VISOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
TICKET HOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
REAR-VIEW MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
GLOVEBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS . . . . . . . . . . .155
REAR LOADSPACE ACCESS
HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Loadspace Cover
LOADSPACE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Audio System
RADIO ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLS* . . . . . . . . . .159
PASSENGER CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
In-Car Telephones
IN-CAR TELEPHONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Voice Recognition
VOICE RECOGNITION* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Land Rover Homelink

HOMELINK TRANSMITTER . . . . . . . . . .164
33
34
Keys & Handsets

KEYS AND HANDSETS
The keys supplied with your vehicle are

programmed to your security system - the
engine cannot be started without a key
programmed to your vehicle.
Caution: Keep the spare handset key in a safe
place - NOT IN THE VEHICLE!
The other two keys that you have received are
for locking the main glovebox.
Note: Should a key transmitter be lost or
damaged a replacement can only be obtained
from your Land Rover retailer, where it will be
programmed to your vehicle. The dealer will
require proof of ownership, and keep a log of all
enquiries for replacement key transmitters.
H5750G
You have been supplied with two remote

handsets with integral keys which operate all of
the vehicles locks.
It is advisable to notify your retailer as soon as

possible if a key transmitter is lost or stolen,
and have the remaining transmitters
reprogrammed. This will prevent access to the
vehicle using the lost/stolen transmitter.
The operation of all transmitter buttons on all

handsets will be inhibited whilst a key is in the
starter switch.
Note: The key transmitter may not operate
correctly in areas that are subject to
interference from other radio equipment
operating on a similar frequency. Areas where,
for example, equipment such as amateur radio,
medical devices, telecommunications
equipment, or other remotely operated alarms
are in use may cause difficulty. If such
difficulties are experienced, try to operate the
transmitter as close as possible to the vehicle,
or use the key in the door lock.
35
Keys & Handsets

LAND ROVER BUTTON
Compliance
The handset complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions:
This device may not cause harmful

interference.
This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Customer programmable button

The fourth button - marked with the Land Rover
logo - on the remote handset can be
programmed to give remote operation of one of
the following functions:
Any changes or modifications to the handset

not expressly approved by the manufacturer or
Land Rover North America could void the
users authority to operate the equipment.
A gradual deterioration in range and

performance will be noticed.
air suspension control
Be aware that the previously programmed

feature will be activated when the button is
initially pressed to start the programming
sequence.
Remote handset battery

The battery is rechargeable. The fact that the
battery needs recharging will be apparent from
the following:
headlamp courtesy delay
WARNING
Receiver FCC ID: LQN5752
KEY BATTERY LOW will be displayed in

the main message center.
panic alarm
Note: Programming and subsequent use of the

Land Rover button will not occur if the key is
in the starter switch.
Transmitter FCC ID: NT8-15K6014CFFTXA
Insert the key into the starter switch and start

the engine. This will start to recharge the
handset battery.
Caution: The handset contains delicate
electronic circuits and must be protected from
impact and water damage, high temperatures
and humidity, direct sunlight and the effects
of solvents, waxes and abrasive cleaners.
Battery disposal
Used batteries should be recycled.
However, batteries are hazardous - you
should seek advice about disposal from
a Land Rover Retailer or your local authority.
36
Keys & Handsets

Panic alarm
This facility is programmed by pressing the
Land Rover button and, keeping it pressed,
pressing the hazard warning lamps button on
the instrument panel. A chime from the
instrument panel buzzer will confirm successful
programming of the remotes button.
Headlamp courtesy delay

flashing the headlamps. A chime from the
instrument panel buzzer will confirm successful
programming of the remotes button.
A short press of the button will now cause the
vehicles headlamps to illuminate for the length
of time specified in Settings, see SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 93.
A short press of the button will now cause the

vehicles alarm to be sounded and the hazard
warning lamps to flash.
The alarm is turned off by inserting the key in
the starter, or pressing the lock or unlock
buttons on the remote handset.
A second press of the button after three

seconds will deactivate the lamps. A further
press, within three seconds, will activate the
reverse lamps. A further press will deactivate
the headlamps and reverse lamps.
H5382G
H5381G
37
Keys & Handsets

Air Suspension Control
pressing the suspension control switch.
A chime from the instrument panel buzzer will
now confirm successful programming of the
remotes button.
Programming of this function must be done
within one minute of switching off the engine.
Pressing and holding the button while pressing
the lock button on the remote will now cause
the air suspension to rise, provided that the
hazard warning lamps have been switched on.
Pressing and holding the button while pressing
the unlock button on the remote will cause the
air suspension to lower, provided that the
hazard warning lamps have been switched on.
If any button is released during the raising or
lowering of the suspension, all movement of
the suspension will stop. It will restart once the
buttons are pressed again.
For further information see AIR SUSPENSION,
203.
H5383L
38
Keys & Handsets

If the alarm sounds
If the alarm is triggered, the alarm will sound
and the hazard warning lamps will flash for 30
seconds, before resetting to the same
protection status that existed prior to the alarm
being triggered.
Anti-theft alarm indicator
To silence the alarm, press the lock or unlock

button on the remote handset or insert the key
into the starter switch. Pressing the lock button
will keep the alarm armed.
1
When the vehicle is disarmed, the hazard

warning lamps will quickly flash eight times if
the alarm has sounded since the vehicle was
last armed.
Superlocking
H5378G
WARNING
For safety, NEVER use Superlocking if
passengers are to remain inside the vehicle in an emergency they would not be able to
escape, or be released by emergency
services. Also, any movement from within the
vehicle would activate the interior space
protection alarm*.
The indicator provides information about the

status of the alarm and immobiliser systems, as
follows:
When the alarm is armed with interior space
protection*:
The indicator will triple flash for 10 seconds
then continue to single flash until the vehicle is
disarmed and immobilised.
Superlocking is activated by one press of the

Lock button on the handset.
When the alarm is armed without interior

space protection:
When the vehicle is superlocked the doors can

only be opened from inside or outside of the
vehicle with the correct key, or key transmitter.
The indicator will double flash for 10 seconds,

then continue to single flash until the vehicle is
disarmed and immobilised.
Superlocking immobilises the interior door

handles, thereby preventing an intruder from
gaining entry by smashing a window and
reaching inside the vehicle to operate the door
handles.
When the alarm is disarmed but the vehicle is

immobilised (key out of starter switch):
The indicator will single flash until the alarm is
armed or the vehicle is mobilised.
When the alarm is disarmed and the vehicle
is mobilised (key in starter switch):
The indicator gives a one-second flash on
remobilisation.
39
Keys & Handsets

Perimetric alarm
This feature is activated automatically
whenever the vehicle is locked using either the
handset or key and protects the doors, hood
and tailgate.
If any of these apertures are opened, or a key
that has not been programmed to the vehicle is
inserted into the ignition switch while the
feature is activated, the alarm will be triggered.
When the perimetric alarm is activated the
direction indicators will flash three times, and
the security system status indicator will flash.
Interior space protection*
Interior space protection is activated whenever
the vehicle is superlocked.
Note: Never activate interior space protection if
windows or sunroof are to be left open, or if
passengers or animals are to be left inside the
vehicle - any movement will activate the alarm.
H5380G
Interior space protection is designed to protect

the interior of the vehicle from intrusion (entry
by a thief through a smashed window, for
example). Four roof-mounted sensors monitor
the interior space and activate the alarm if air
movement is detected in the passenger
compartment.
Note: Interior space protection cannot be
activated if a door is open.
Disabling interior space protection
If there is a requirement to disable interior
space protection (if a window or sunroof is to
be left open, for example), press the lock button
on the remote handset twice within three
seconds.
40
Locks & Alarms

Tilt Sensor*
Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor which
activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted fore
and aft, or side to side, after it has been
superlocked.
ALARM SYSTEM
The alarm will sound if theft is attempted by

hoisting onto another vehicle or if a side is lifted
to attempt wheel removal.
If you wish to have the doors locked but the tilt
sensor disabled (e.g. when aboard a ferry or
having the vehicle transported on a recovery
truck) press the Lock button twice within three
seconds.
Single-point entry
This is a personal security feature, which
enables only the driver's door to be unlocked,
leaving the other doors in a locked state.
H5376G
Your vehicle is fitted with a sophisticated

electronic anti-theft alarm and engine
immobilisation system. There are also a
number of additional security features, some of
which are selectable options and some are
standard features of the vehicle.
Single-point entry can be disabled on individual

handset keys by pressing and holding the lock
and unlock buttons together for three seconds.
Repeating the procedure will re-enable the
feature.
Each time single-point entry is turned on or off,
the vehicle will lock then unlock into the
selected mode (all doors unlocked or just
drivers door unlocked).
In order to ensure maximum security and

operating convenience, you are strongly
advised to gain a full understanding of the
features and alternatives available, by
thoroughly reading this section of the
handbook.
Locks & Alarms
WARNING
FOR MAXIMUM SECURITY ALWAYS
SUPERLOCK THE VEHICLE. If passengers or
animals are to be left in the vehicle, windows
and/or sunroof are left open, or the vehicle is
on a moving platform, e.g. a ferry, lock the
vehicle by pressing the lock button once. This
disables the superlocking, tilt sensing* and
interior space protection*.
41
Locks & Alarms

LOCKING/UNLOCKING
While it is not necessary to point the handset at
the vehicle, the handset must be within range of
the vehicle when a button is pressed.
Note: If the handset fails to work even when
close to the vehicle, it could be that it is not
synchronised with the system, see Emergency
locking/unlocking, 44. Putting the key in the
starter switch and running the engine for six
minutes will restore full operation.
The operating range may vary depending upon
handset battery condition and may sometimes
be limited by physical and geographical factors
beyond your control.
Note: If a key is in the starter switch, the vehicle
will not respond to remote handset commands.
2
3
4
H5377G
Locking with the remote handset

Remove the key from the starter switch and
shut all doors, the bonnet and the tailgate.
The four buttons on the handset are used as
follows:
1. Key release button.
42
Locks & Alarms

2. Lock button: Press to superlock all doors
and to activate the perimetric alarm and
interior space protection* and activate the
tilt sensor* (see Superlocking, 39, Tilt
Sensor*, 41).
Partial arming
If the drivers door is not fully closed when the
handset lock button is pressed, the doors will
remain unlocked and the alarm will remain
disarmed. A brief sound from the vehicle horn
will confirm that the door is not fully closed.
Press twice within three seconds to lock all

doors and activate the perimetric alarm,
but NOT activate interior space protection*
or tilt sensor*.
If a passenger door or other aperture is not fully

closed when the handset lock button is
pressed, the partial arming attributes of the
security system will enable as much of the
system to be armed as possible (all fully closed
door, bonnet or tailgate apertures will be
protected, but an open one will not).
The direction indicator lamps will flash

three times.
3. Unlock button: Press once to disarm the
alarm and unlock the drivers door and to
activate the Lazy seats* feature, (see
DRIVERS SEAT MEMORY FACILITY*,
55). Press again to unlock the remaining
doors (see Single-point entry, 41).
A brief sound from the vehicles horns will

confirm that an aperture is not fully closed.
Press once to activate the memory seat and

mirrors settings (see DRIVERS SEAT
MEMORY FACILITY*, 55)
As soon as the open aperture is closed, the

system will automatically arm, signalled by
three flashes of the hazard warning lamps, with
interior space protection* activating 30
seconds after all apertures are closed.
In either case, the interior lamps illuminate

and the direction indicators flash once.
Note: The vehicle will not superlock if an

aperture (other than the bonnet) is open.
The hazard warning lamps will quickly flash

eight times when the vehicle is disarmed if
the alarm has sounded since the vehicle
was last armed.
4. Customer Configuration - Land Rover
button: This button can be configured to
operate panic alarm, headlamp courtesy
delay or suspension control (see LAND
ROVER BUTTON, 36).
43
Locks & Alarms

Emergency locking/unlocking
2. The cap can now be removed at the forward

edge and unhooked from the rear edge.
3. Remove the key from the slot and use it in
the emergency lock.
Refitting the cap
H5775G
1. Insert the key fully into the slot in the

handle cap.
H5379G
2. Hook the cap onto the lock barrel at the rear

edge.
Under a removable cap on the left-hand front

door outer handle, there is an emergency-use
door lock. In the very unlikely event that the
remote handset has failed, this lock can be
used.
3. Push the front edge of the cap onto the

panel.
4. Remove the key from the slot.
Removing the cap

1. Insert the key fully into the slot under the
handle cap.
44
Locks & Alarms

Speed-related locking
This security feature locks all the doors
automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds 8
km/h (5 mph).
Locking:
Turn the key clockwise to lock only the local
door. To lock all of the doors press the master
lock switch, then exit the vehicle through the
front left door. Lock the left front door by
turning the key clockwise (this will not arm the
alarm system).
Note: The speed at which speed-related locking

occurs is not selectable by the driver, and
operation of the door locks by any other means
(interior locking switch on the instrument
panel, for example) will unlock the doors.
Unlocking:
Turn the key in the front left door lock
anticlockwise to unlock only the local door.
Speed-related locking can be selected

or deselected by a Land Rover
Dealer/Authorised Repairer or by the
driver.
If the alarm system is not armed, turn the key

anticlockwise to unlock the left front door. To
unlock the rest of the doors press the master
unlock switch.
See SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 93.

Automatic re-lock
If the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
handset and one minute elapses before a door,
the tailgate or the bonnet is opened, or the key
is inserted into the starter switch, the vehicle
will re-lock and the alarm will re-arm.
Master lock and unlock switches
Emergency unlocking
If the vehicle is involved in a collision forceful
enough to cause a restraints device to deploy,
provided that the doors have not been locked
using the door key or remote handset, all door
locks will become unlocked and the hazard
warning lamps will start to flash. If the vehicle
is stationary, the interior lamps will also
illuminate.
Tailgate emergency unlock
Simultaneously pressing both the master lock
and unlock switches for three seconds will
cause the upper tailgate to release. This is an
emergency release function in case the tailgate
exterior release switch becomes inoperative.
H5385L
1. Pressing the master unlock button will

unlock all of the doors.
2. Pressing the master lock button will lock all
of the doors.
Note: If the locks have already been
superlocked using the key, the switch will not
release the locks.
45
Locks & Alarms

Interior door handles and door locking buttons
Note:
The engine will be re-mobilised automatically
whenever the genuine handset key is inserted
into the starter switch. When this happens, the
anti-theft alarm indicator will illuminate for one
second and then extinguish.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
H5387L
From inside the vehicle, each door can be

individually locked by depressing the
appropriate door button (arrowed). Doors can
be unlocked by pulling the door handle
(inboard). A second pull opens the door.
When the master lock or unlock button is
activated, all door locking buttons will move
automatically.
PRE0489
These locking buttons will only operate if the

doors have not been secured using the remote
handset or door key.
Child safety locks are fitted to the rear doors.

Open a rear door and insert the ignition key into
the child safety keyhole. Turn the key one
quarter of a turn so that the top of the key
moves towards the vehicle. Repeat for the other
door.
ENGINE IMMOBILISATION
Engine immobilisation is an important aspect of
the security system. It is designed to safeguard
the vehicle from theft, should the driver forget
to lock the doors. The system prevents the
engine from being started unless the GENUINE
handset key or emergency key is inserted into
the starter switch.
With the child safety locks engaged, the rear

doors cannot be opened from inside the
vehicle. This prevents a door from being
opened accidentally with the vehicle in motion.
Inserting the key and turning it in the opposite
direction disengages the lock.
Engine immobilisation is automatic five

seconds after the key is removed from the
starter switch.
46
Locks & Alarms

Opening the lower tailgate
WARNING
TO AVOID INJURY OR DEATH, NEVER LEAVE
CHILDREN UNSUPERVISED IN THE VEHICLE.
TAILGATE
Opening the upper tailgate
H5391G
With the upper tailgate open, press the touch

pad on the lower tailgate waist moulding.
Note:
If the lower tailgate is locked/unlocked 10 times
within a short period, the latch is disabled for
approximately one minute. This feature is
designed to protect the battery and lock the
mechanism.
H5390G
With all doors unlocked, press the touch pad on

the underside of the exterior handle and pull to
open.
If the upper tailgate fails to open, an emergency
procedure is available, see Tailgate emergency
unlock, 45.
47
Seats
Seats
FRONT SEATS
max.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of loss of control and
personal injury, DO NOT adjust the driver's
seat while the vehicle is in motion.
Sitting correctly
The seats, head restraints, seat belts and
airbags all contribute to the protection of the
occupants. Optimal use of these components
will give you more protection. Therefore,
observe the following points:
Sit in the most upright position with the

base of your spine as far back as possible
and the backrest not reclined more than 30
degrees.
Do not move the front seat too close to the

instrument panel. The driver should hold
the steering wheel with slightly bent arms.
The legs should also be slightly bent so that
the pedals can be pressed to the floor.
The seat belt should rest in the center of the

shoulder. The lap part should fit tightly
across the hips and not on the stomach.
H5392L
Make sure your driving position is comfortable

and enables you to maintain full control of the
vehicle. A properly adjusted seat helps reduce
the risk of injury from sitting too close to an
inflating airbag.
48
30 o
Seats
MANUAL FRONT SEATS
Seat back adjustment
Forward/backward adjustment
H5398L
The position of the seat is adjusted by lifting the

bar at the front of the seat and sliding the seat
to the desired position.
On reaching the desired position the seat
should be moved slightly forwards and
backwards to ensure that the bar has latched
into position and the vehicle is safe to drive.
H5396L
The angle of the seat backrest is adjusted by

turning the rotary wheel.
See Sitting correctly, 48.
WARNING
DO NOT travel with the seat backs reclined
steeply rearwards. Sit in the most upright
position with the base of your spine as far
back as possible and the seat back not
reclined more than 30 degrees from the
vertical.
Failure to maintain the correct seat back
angle will reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belts and increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a crash.
49
Seats
Height adjustment
H5394L
Seat height adjustment, the height is controlled

by pumping the handle.
Pumping the lever upwards raises the seat;
downwards lowers the seat.
50
Seats
Folding armrest*
POWER AND MANUAL FRONT

SEATS
Lumbar support adjustment*
H5402L
H5400L
Some vehicles are fitted with adjustable front

seat armrests. These are used in the horizontal
position or can be stowed vertically alongside
the seat backrest.
A handwheel in the side of the seat provides for

adjustment of lumbar support.
To adjust the amount of lumbar support, twist
the knob clockwise to stiffen the seat or
anticlockwise to reduce the support.
The horizontal position can be adjusted for

height by turning the knob set into the end of
the armrest. Turning the knob clockwise raises
the armrest; anticlockwise lowers it.
51
Seats
POWER OPERATED FRONT SEATS
Forward/backward adjustment
The seat adjustment controls are situated on

the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Note: In order to change the position of any
part of the power-operated seats, the starter
key must be in positions I or II. Power
operated Memory Drivers seat also has a
10-minute active period initiated when:
The drivers door is opened/closed

The starter key is turned to the Off position
WARNING
DO NOT adjust any part of a seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
Vehicle movement may cause the seat to
suddenly shift, potentially causing injury.
H5406L
Push and hold the switch to move the seat to

the desired position.
52
Seats
Seat cushion height adjustment
Seat back adjustment
H5408L
H5410L
Push the switch up or down to raise or lower

the cushion.
Twist the switch until the desired seat back

angle is achieved.
WARNING
DO NOT travel with the seat backs reclined
steeply rearwards. Optimum benefit is
obtained from the seat belt with the seat back
angle set to no more than 30 degrees from the
upright (vertical).
Failure to maintain the correct seat back
angle will reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belts and increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a crash.
53
Seats
Seat cushion edge adjustment*
H5412L
Push the switch up or down to raise or lower

the front edge of the cushion.
HEATED SEATS*
For information on operating the front and rear
seat heaters, refer to SEAT HEATERS, 133.
54
Seats
DRIVERS SEAT MEMORY
FACILITY*
1
H5414L
Setting the memory presets

Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired position.
WARNING
Before activating the seat memory, ensure
that the area immediately surrounding the
seat is clear of obstructions and that all
occupants are clear of moving parts.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn it to position

I or ll.
2. Press the memory store button (1) to
activate the memory function.
1. Memory store button

2. Memory pre-set buttons
3. Within five seconds, press the desired

preset button (2).
3. Seat adjustment controls (see POWER

OPERATED FRONT SEATS, 52 for further
information).
4. Memory Stored will be displayed on the

message center (if fitted) to confirm the
storing action. A single chime will sound
from the instrument panel to confirm
storing.
Note: For information on adjusting the mirrors,

see EXTERIOR MIRRORS, 86.
Your vehicle can memorise up to three different
driver seating positions for each of three
possible ignition keys. This enables three
separate drivers to achieve optimum comfort at
the touch of a button.
55
Seats
Recalling a stored seat position
Providing the power operated memory seat is
active (see POWER OPERATED FRONT SEATS,
52), then press the preset button associated
with the desired driving position. The seat and
mirror will move to the position stored on that
preset.
Note: To stop seat movement at any time when
recalling a memory setting, press any seat
adjustment control.
Easy entry*
When the easy entry option is selected and the
vehicle is unlocked using the handset, the
vehicle adjusts the drivers seat and the exterior
mirrors to the position associated with that
particular handset.
Easy entry and associated options can be
selected or deselected by a Land Rover Retailer
or by selecting Settings, (see SELECTING
SETTINGS OPTION, 93).
56
Seats
SECOND-ROW SEATS 5-SEAT VEHICLE
Note: Some 5-seat vehicles can be fitted with
second-row seats that are normally used in
7-seat vehicles, for their operation, see
SECOND-ROW SEATS - 7-SEAT VEHICLE, 59.
WARNING
Vehicle movement may cause the seat to
suddenly shift, potentially causing injury.
Folding down the seats
One or both parts of the unequally split
second-row seat can be fully folded to further
increase the rear loadspace.
Remove any items from the second-row seats
and from the rear footwell before attempting to
fold down the seats.
If the front seats are in their rearmost position,
move them forward. They can be returned to
their original position after the second-row seat
backs have been folded down.
H5417G
Ensure that the head restraints are fully

lowered. Press the collar at the base of the
headrest support, and push down on the
headrest.
Using the strap at the rear of each cushion, pull
the required cushions forwards as far as they
will travel .
To fold a backrest forwards, pull the seat
backrest release lever(s). While pulling the
lever(s) located on the top edges of the
backrests, tip the seat backrest(s) forwards as
far as possible.
H5418G
Note: Only Land Rover-approved seat covers

and accessories should be used on these seats.
57
Seats
Pull the strap vertically on the back of the seat
to unlock the seat. Continue to pull to raise the
backrest(s) until they click into position. Push
the seat cushion(s) firmly back into position.
WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in the cargo
area. In a collision, anyone riding in this area
is more likely to be injured or killed. Do not
allow anyone to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure that everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt
properly.
Visually check that the lever is fully in place. If

it has not returned to its locked position, red
flags will be visible around the lever sides.
To raise the headrest, pull up until the headrest
is in the correct position.
WARNING
Returning the seats to the upright position
After the seat is returned to the upright

position, the latching mechanism should be
checked and physically tested to ensure that
both the seat base and backrest are secure
before driving.
Ensure that the headrest is adjusted correctly
for each passenger (the top of the headrest
should be above the centre line of the head).
H5790G
58
Seats
SECOND-ROW SEATS 7-SEAT VEHICLE
In vehicles with three rows of seats, the seats
forming the second row can be used in a variety
of configurations:
as a standard row of three seats,
each seat-back can be folded forwards to

form a table,
each seat can be folded fully flat to extend

the loadspace area.
each outer seat can be fully tilted forwards

to provide access to the third row of seats,
If the front seats are in their rearmost position,

move them forward prior to folding down the
second-row seats. They can be returned to their
original position after the second-row seat
backs have been folded down.
Table-fold position
Remove any items from the second-row seats
and from the rear footwell before attempting to
fold down the seats.
Push the head restraint on the seat(s) to be
folded into its lowest position.
H5421G
To return the seat-back to its upright position,

push the release lever forwards and pull up on
the seat-back and push it back into position
until the seat-back latching mechanism clicks
into place.
Pull the seat-back release lever and pull the

seat-back forwards into the table-fold position.
Note: Only Land Rover-approved seat covers
and accessories should be used on these seats.

flags will be visible around the lever side.
WARNING
before driving.
59
Seats
Loadspace position
If the center seat is one of those to be folded
flat, it should be the first one to be folded.
First fold the seat(s) into the table-fold position.
Then pull the strap at the front of the seat and
press down on the seat.
H5423G
Note: To stow the loadspace cover, position it

between the folded seat rows, see LOADSPACE
COVER, 156.
To return the folded seat from the loadspace
position to the table-fold position, pull up on the
strap and return the seat to the table-fold
position.
WARNING
Do not attempt to raise the second-row seats
from the loadspace position while the
loadspace cover unit is stowed behind them
as damage to the unit or seats will result.
H5422G
To return the seat-back to its upright position,

push the release lever forward and pull up on
the seat-back and push it back into position
until the seat-back latching mechanism clicks
into place.
flags will be visible around the lever side.
60
Seats
Note: If a combination of seat-backs, including
the center seat-back, is to be returned to the
upright position, then the center part should be
raised last.
WARNING
before driving.
WARNING
Vehicle movement may cause the unlatched
seat to suddenly shift, potentially causing
injury.
61
Seats
Access position
To enter the third-row seats, first ensure that
the head restraint on the second-row seat is
fully lowered and then fold the relevant outer
seat into the table-fold position.
H5425G
Pull up the access lever on the edge of the seat

base to unlock the seat and tilt it forward into
the access position.
Once access has been achieved, return the
second-row seat to its fully upright position.
Note: If access is required to the third-row
seats while the relevant second-row outer seat
is in the loadspace position, return the
second-row seat to the table-fold position
before attempting to move it to the access
position.
H5424G
WARNING
The second-row outer seat(s) must not be left
in the access (tilted forward) position while
the vehicle is being driven. Motion of the
vehicle could cause the seat to drop back into
its table-fold position.
62
Seats
Returning the seats to the table-fold position
Pull the seat down into the table-fold position.
WARNING
When lowering the tilted seats to their locked
position, ensure that nothing is trapped by the
returning seat.
At this point the access lever will click into
place. To ensure that this has done so, check
around the lever. If it is not properly in place, a
red flag will be visible behind the lever.
WARNING
before driving.
The head restraint must always be deployed
when using the seat.
Exiting the vehicle from the third-row seats
To exit the vehicle from the third-row seats, the
relevant second-row seat must be placed in the
access position.
Push the seat-back release lever forward and
tilt the seat-back forward until the seat is in the
table-fold position.
H5764G
Pull the strap (inset) and tilt the seat forward as

far as possible into the access position.
WARNING
When lowering the tilted seats to their locked
position, ensure that nothing is trapped by the
returning seat.
63
Seats
THIRD-ROW SEATS
2. Pull up the release strap at the rear corner

of the cushion; this lifts under spring
pressure. Fold the cushion fully 180O
forwards until it latches into position.
Third row seats can be folded flat.
WARNING
Beware of potential finger traps when
operating the seats.
3. Pull up the seat-back release lever and fold

the seat-back fully forwards until it latches
into position and forms part of the
loadspace floor.
Ensure that nothing has been left under the

seat or in the footwell when folding down the
seat as this could cause permanent
deformation of the seat.
Do not return seats to the upright position with

the loadspace cover in its floor-level stowage
position.
Use only Land Rover-approved covers on the
third row seats.
L7MTA
BAC500420
H5738G
To fold the seat

1. Press the head restraint release button and
fold the head restraint fully downwards.
H5428G
64
Seats
To return the seat to its upright position
1. Pull up on the seat-back release lever and

lift the seat-back into its upright position,
ensuring that it is fully latched into place.
2. Release the cushion catch and pull up on
the cushion. Rotate the cushion into place,
ensuring that the cushion is latched to the
seat-back.
3. Raise the head restraint until it latches into
position.
WARNING
The head restraint must always be deployed

when using the third-row seat.
Do not sit on the seat until the head restraint
is fully deployed.
Note: When not in use the headrests should be
folded to improve rear vision.
H5429G
65
Seat Belts
Seat Belts
SEAT BELTS
PREGNANT WOMEN
The use of front and rear seat belts is

mandatory in most states. Using seat belts
saves lives. They should be worn by all
occupants whenever the vehicle is in use, for
maximum protection.
WARNING
Pregnant women must wear a correctly
positioned seat belt; it is safer for mother and
unborn child.
Lap/shoulder inertia reel seat belts are provided

for both front seat occupants and all rear seat
positions.
During pregnancy, women should wear the lap

belt across the hips below the baby, with the
diagonal belt passing across the shoulder,
between the breasts and to one side of the baby
- if in doubt, consult a doctor.
The inertia reel operating mechanism of the

seat belts allows the wearers to move their
upper bodies to reach various controls. The
seat belt locks automatically with accelerated
body movement or in the event of emergency
braking.
The front seat belt assemblies are fitted with
pretensioners. The pretensioners operate with
the airbags as part of the Airbag Supplementary
Restraint System (SRS), see AIRBAG SRS, 77.
Seat belt warning indicator
Driver Beltminder commences
when the starter switch is turned
to position ll and the driver belt is
unbuckled.
H5430G
WARNING
Never place anything between you and the
seat belt in an attempt to cushion the impact
in the event of an accident. It can be
dangerous and reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt in preventing injury.
The seat belt reminder feature also applies to

the passenger seat and will be activated if the
seat is occupied and the occupant is
unbuckled.The visual and audible warning signals given
may change depending on whether the vehicle
is stationary or when the vehicle speed exceeds
a predetermined threshold (see AUDIBLE
WARNINGS, 114)
Note: Objects placed on the passenger seat
may activate the seat belt warning system.
66
Seat Belts
SEAT BELT SAFETY
WARNING
WARNING
Ensure that all seat belts are worn correctly an improperly worn seat belt increases the
risk of death or serious injury in the event of a
collision.
Seat belts are life saving equipment. In a

collision, occupants not wearing a seat belt
can be thrown around inside, or possibly
thrown out of the vehicle. This is likely to
result in more serious injuries than would
have been the case had a seat belt been
properly worn. It may even result in loss of
life.
Belts should not be worn with the straps

twisted.
Each belt assembly must only be used by one
occupant. It is dangerous to put a belt around
a child being carried on the occupants lap.
Make sure ALL occupants are securely

strapped in at all times - even for the shortest
journeys.
Where possible, use the seat belts to secure

large items of luggage that are to be carried
on the seats. In the event of an accident,
unsecured items become flying missiles,
capable of causing serious injury.
The airbag supplemental restraint system

(SRS) is designed to add to the overall
effectiveness of the seat belts. It does not
replace them. SEAT BELTS MUST ALWAYS BE
WORN.
It is essential to replace the entire assembly

after it has been worn in a severe impact even
if damage to the assembly is not obvious.
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony

structure of the body and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis, or the pelvis,
chest and shoulders, as applicable. Wearing
the lap section of the belt across the
abdominal area must be avoided.
No modifications or additions should be made

by the user which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted to remove
slack.
DO NOT wear seat belts over hard, sharp or

fragile items in clothing, such as pens, keys,
spectacles, etc.
Should the seat belt not retract and remain at

its static length, consult your Land Rover
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as

possible, consistent with comfort, to provide
the protection for which they are designed. A
slack belt will greatly reduce the protection
afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid contamination

of the webbing with polishes, oils and
chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild
soap and water. The belt should be replaced
if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or
damaged.
DO NOT allow front seat occupants to travel

with the seat backs reclined steeply
rearwards. Optimum benefit is obtained from
the seat belt with the seatback angle set to no
more than 30o from the upright.
67
Seat Belts
FRONT SEAT BELTS
Upper anchorage adjustment
Fastening the seat belts
H5432G
The height of the seat belt upper anchorage can

be adjusted for comfort AND safety on both
front seats. Press down (solid arrow) to release
the catch, then lift or push down to adjust the
height of the anchorage. For safety, the seat belt
should always be worn with the webbing
crossing the shoulder MIDWAY BETWEEN THE
NECK AND THE EDGE OF THE SHOULDER.
H5431G
Pull the belt over the shoulder and across the

chest and, ensuring that the webbing is not
twisted, insert the metal tongue plate into the
buckle nearest the wearer - a CLICK indicates
that the belt is securely locked.
Ensure the anchorage has clicked into one of

the locked positions before driving.
Releasing the belt

Press the RED button on the seat belt buckle.
Where possible, rear seat passengers should

adjust their position on the seat to enable the
seat belt webbing to cross the shoulder without
pressing on the neck.
WARNING
Never wear just the lap strap of a lap/shoulder
diagonal seat belt and never sit on the lap
strap using just the shoulder strap. Both of
these actions are extremely dangerous and
may increase your risk of serious injury.
WARNING
Maladjustment of the seat belt could reduce
its effectiveness in a crash. Always ensure
that the anchorage is correctly located and
properly locked in one of the height positions
before driving and DO NOT adjust the height
once the vehicle is in motion.
68
Seat Belts
SECOND AND THIRD ROW SEAT
BELTS
REAR SEATS - 7-SEAT VEHICLES

In order to prevent damage to the seat belt
buckles on the rear seats of 7-seat vehicles
when the seats are folded flat, the buckles are
spring-loaded to stow within the seat cushion.
The second and third row seat belts have a

special locking mechanism which aids the
retention of child seats. The procedure to install
a child seat is as follows:
In order to fasten the belt, pull the buckle up

from the seat before inserting the tongue plate.
1. Place the child seat in the vehicle, attach

the seat belt and secure the buckle in
accordance with the manufacturers fitting
instructions.
A CLICK indicates that the belt is securely

locked.
2. Pull on the shoulder section of the belt to

unreel all of the remaining webbing to the
limit of its travel. This will engage the
automatic locking feature, which then acts
as a ratchet, allowing the webbing ONLY to
retract.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract onto the child
seat (a clicking sound will confirm that the
ratchet has engaged), while firmly pushing
the child seat into the vehicle seat.
4. Ensure that there is no slack in the seat belt
by pulling upwards on the shoulder belt
immediately above the child restraint. This
seat belt should now be locked and the
child seat held firmly in position.
When the child seat is removed and all of the
seat belt webbing is allowed to retract, the seat
belt locking mechanism reverts to normal
operation.
WARNING
Where possible, use the seat belt automatic
locking mechanism to secure large items of
luggage that are to be carried on the seats. In
the event of an accident, insecure items
become missiles capable of causing serious
injury.
69
Seat Belts
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS
The seat belt pretensioners activate in
conjunction with the airbag SRS and provide
additional protection in the event of a severe
frontal impact on the vehicle (see HOW THE
AIRBAG SRS WORKS, 81). The pretensioners
automatically retract the seat belts fitted to the
front seats. This reduces any slack in both the
lap and diagonal portions of the belts, thereby
reducing forward movement of the belt wearer
in the event of a severe frontal collision.
The airbag SRS warning indicator on the
instrument pack will alert you to any
malfunction of the seat belt pretensioners.
If the pretensioners have been activated, the
seat belts will still function as restraints, and
must be worn in the event that the vehicle
remains in a driveable condition.
Note: The seat belt pretensioners will be
activated in major side and frontal impacts and
in rollovers.
WARNING
The seat belt pretensioners will only be
activated once and then MUST BE REPLACED
by a Land Rover Retailer. Failure to replace
the pretensioners will reduce the efficiency of
the vehicle's front restraint systems.
After any impact, always have the seat belts
and pretensioners checked and, if necessary,
replaced by a Land Rover Retailer.
In the interests of safety, it is recommended
that removal or replacement of the front seats
and seat belts should only be carried out by a
70
Seat Belts
CARING FOR SEAT BELTS
Service information
Regularly inspect the belt webbing for signs of

fraying, cuts and wear; also pay particular
attention to the condition of the fixing points
and adjusters.
WARNING
DO NOT attempt to service, repair, replace,
modify or tamper with any part of the
pretensioner and airbag SRS, or wiring in the
vicinity of a pretensioner or airbag SRS
component; this could cause the system to
activate, resulting in personal injury.
DO NOT bleach or dye the webbing and avoid

contaminating the webbing with polish, oil or
chemicals (see Seat belts, 286).
Testing inertia reel belts
In addition, ALWAYS contact your Land Rover

Retailer if:
With the seat belt fastened, give the

webbing near the buckle a quick upward
pull. The buckle must remain securely
locked.
With the seat belt unfastened, unreel the

webbing to the limit of its travel. Check that
unreeling is free from snatches and snags
and then allow the belt to FULLY retract.
Partially unreel the webbing, then hold the

tongue plate and give it a quick forward
pull. The mechanism must lock
automatically and prevent any further
unreeling.
If a seat belt should fail any of these tests,

contact your Land Rover Retailer immediately.
WARNING
Always replace a seat belt that shows signs of
webbing damage or has withstood the strain
of a severe vehicle impact.
Note: If the vehicle is parked on ground that is
not level, the seat belt mechanism may lock.
This is not a fault; gently ease the belt from its
attachment to unlock it.
71
an airbag inflates.
a pretensioner activates.
the front or side of the vehicle is damaged,

even if the pretensioner has not activated.
Child Restraints
Child Restraints
CHILD SEATS
WARNING
The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are

designed for adults and larger children. For
their safety, it is very important that all infants
and children under 12 years are restrained in a
suitable child safety seat appropriate to their
age and size.
Do not use a forward-facing seat until a child

is above the minimum weight of 9 kg (20 lb.)
and able to sit up unaided. Up to the age of
two, a childs spine and neck are not
sufficiently developed to avoid injury in a
frontal impact.
Only fit a child seat that has been approved for

use in your vehicle, and ensure that the
manufacturer's fitting instructions are followed
exactly.
The second and third row seat belts have a

special locking mechanism which aids the
retention of child seats, see SECOND AND
THIRD ROW SEAT BELTS, 69.
For optimum safety, children should travel in

the rear of the vehicle at all times, front
passenger seat travel is NOT recommended.
Note: Crash statistics show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear (2nd
row) seating positions, than they are in the
front.
However, if it is essential that a child travel in
the front, set the seat fully rearward and seat
the child in a FORWARD FACING child seat.
The above symbol affixed to the passenger side

B post of your vehicle, warns against the use
of a REAR-FACING child seat in the front
passenger seat, when a passenger airbag is
fitted and operational.
WARNING
EXTREME HAZARD. Do not use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected by an
airbag in front of it. There is a risk of serious
injury or death when the airbag deploys.
72
Child Restraints
LATCH CHILD RESTRAINTS
(Second-row seats)
Child restraints for small children and babies

Child seats and restraint systems designed for
your vehicle will be one of two types:
Those secured in vehicle seats by the seat

belts.
LATCH type child restraints employing

anchor bars built into the rear seat frame.
Both outer, second row, seating positions in

your vehicle are equipped to accept LATCH
restraints.
This symbol on the label sewn into
the seats indicates the location of
the LATCH lower anchorages.
All new and most older type child restraint

systems incorporate a tether strap which can
be attached to an anchorage point on the
vehicle. See Tether anchorages, 75.
Child restraints for larger children
In a situation where a child is too large to fit into
a child safety seat, but is still too small to safely
fit the 3 point seat belt properly, a booster seat
is recommended for maximum safety. Follow
the manufacturers fitting instructions exactly,
then adjust the seat belt to suit.
WARNING
DO NOT allow a baby or infant to be carried on
the lap. The force of a crash can increase
effective body weight by as much as 30 times,
making it impossible to hold on to the child.
Children typically require the use of a booster
seat appropriate to their age and size, thereby
enabling the seat belts to be properly fitted,
reducing the risk of injury in a crash.
Children could be endangered in a crash if
their child restraints are not properly secured
in the vehicle.
H5433G
DO NOT use a child seat that hooks over the

seat back. This type of seat cannot be
satisfactorily secured, and is unlikely to be
safe for your child.
5-seat vehicles
Never leave a child unattended in your

vehicle.
73
Child Restraints
WARNING
DO NOT attempt to fit LATCH restraints to the
center seating position - the anchor bars are
not designed to hold a LATCH restraint in this
position.
Fitting LATCH child restraints
LATCH child restraints should only be fitted in
the two outer seating positions of the
second-row seats. Anchor bars built into the
rear seat frame, enable the LATCH restraints to
be securely attached to the vehicle seat only in
these positions.
In addition, two tether anchor bars are fitted to
back of the rear seats, to secure child restraint
anchor straps.
When fitting LATCH child restraints, always
follow the instructions supplied by the
manufacturer of the restraint.
Once the LATCH restraint is installed, you are
recommended to test the security of the
installation before seating the child. Attempt to
twist the restraint from side to side and to pull
the restraint away from the vehicle seat; then
check that the anchors are still securely in
place.
H5895G
7-seat vehicles
WARNING
If the restraint is not correctly anchored, there
is a significant risk of injury to the child in the
event of a collision or emergency braking.
74
Child Restraints
Tether anchorages
One upper tether anchorage is provided at each
seating position equipped to accept LATCH
child restraints.
Attaching tether straps

1. Install the child restraint securely in one of
the second row seating positions.
2. Pass the tether strap over the back of the
vehicle seat and beneath the underside of
the head restraint.
3. Attach the clip on the head of the tether
strap to the tether anchor on the back of the
vehicle seat.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturers instructions to remove any
slack in the webbing.
WARNING
Always follow the child seat or restraint
system manufacturers instructions when
fitting tether straps.
H5435G
When fitting a child seat or restraint system,

always pass the tether strap over the top of
the seat back and beneath the underside of
the head restraint.
Note: Always ensure that, if an upper tether is

provided, it is secured and tightened properly
as this provides the maximum protection for a
child.
If a child seat or restraint system is to be fitted

to the center seating position, the center
armrest must be in the stowed position
(folded into the seat).
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only loads imposed by correctly
fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
75
Child Restraints
CHILD RESTRAINT CHECK LISTS
LATCH child restraints

Follow the check list every time a child travels
in the vehicle:
Non-LATCH child restraints

Follow the check list every time a child travels
in the vehicle:
Always attach the top tether when

installing the LATCH seat.
Carefully follow the instructions supplied

with the child seat.
Always give the LATCH seat a final pull to

ensure that the lower anchors are secure.
Always use the appropriate child restraints

and adjust the harnesses for every child,
every trip.
Regularly check the fit of a child seat and

replace seats or harnesses that show signs
of wear.
Make sure that a child falls into the correct

weight range for the seat.
Ensure that you have removed all slack

from the adult seat belt.
Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing and

do not place any objects between the child
and the restraint system.
No child seat is completely child-proof.

Encourage a child not to play with the
buckle or harness.
Regularly check the fit of a child seat and

replace seats and harnesses that show
signs of wear.
No child seat is completely child-proof.

Encourage children not to play with the
buckle or harness.
Never leave a child unsupervised in the

vehicle.
Activate the rear door child safety locks,

see CHILD SAFETY LOCKS, 46.
Ensure that a child does not exit the vehicle

from the side where there is traffic.
Set children a good example - always wear

your seat belt.
Carefully follow the instructions provided

by the manufacturer of the restraint
system.
Always use the appropriate child restraints

and adjust harnesses for every child, every
trip.
Avoid dressing a child in bulky clothing and

do not place any objects between the child
and the restraint system.
Never leave a child unsupervised in the

vehicle.
Activate the rear door child safety locks,

see CHILD SAFETY LOCKS, 46.
Ensure that a child does not exit the vehicle

from the side where there is traffic.
Set children a good example - always wear

your seat belt.
76
Airbag SRS
Airbag SRS
H5437L
AIRBAG SRS
Provided occupants are correctly seated, with

seat belts properly worn, the airbags will
provide additional protection to the chest and
facial areas of the front seat occupants in the
event of the vehicle receiving a severe frontal
impact, and also to the side of the body facing
the impact, if a severe side collision occurs.
The airbag supplementary restraint system

(SRS) incorporates front, side thorax and side
head airbags for the driver and front passenger
and side head airbags for the second row
outboard and third row seat passengers (see
illustration for airbag locations). These are
indicated by the word AIRBAG on the trim.
Side head impact protection will afford

additional protection to the side of the head
facing the impact for the front seat and outer
rear seat occupants, in the event of a side
collision or a rollover.
WARNING
Always remember; the SRS/airbags are a
supplemental restraint system providing
ADDITIONAL protection in certain types of
collision only - they DO NOT replace the need
to wear a seat belt. To reduce the risk of
severe injury or death in the event of a crash,
all occupants in all seating positions,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belt, whether or not an airbag is present
at that seating position.
Note: Inflation and deflation of the side thorax

and front airbags takes place very quickly and
will not protect against the effects of secondary
impacts that may occur. Side head airbags
deflate at a slower rate and therefore offer
additional protection in the event of a
secondary impact or rollover.
Occupants with disabilities that may require the
vehicle to be modified must contact a Land
Rover Retailer before any modifications are
made.
Unauthorised modification of the vehicle or
parts may invalidate the vehicles warranty.
77
Airbag SRS
Airbag warning labels
Airbag SRS warning indicator

A warning indicator mounted in
the instrument pack will alert you
to any malfunction of the airbag
SRS, see Warning Indicators, 108. The airbag
SRS should always be checked by a Land Rover
Retailer if any of the following symptoms
occurs:
front
ta
H5789N
Airbag warning information is printed on the

drivers and front passengers sun visor.
78
The warning indicator fails to illuminate

when the starter switch is turned to
position ll.
The warning indicator fails to extinguish

within approximately four seconds after the
starter switch is turned to position ll.
The warning indicator illuminates after the

engine is started, or while the vehicle is
being driven.
Airbag SRS
Obstruction of air bags
Feet, knees or any other part of the

anatomy in contact with, or in close
proximity to, an airbag cover.
Head, arms or any part of the anatomy in

contact with, or in close proximity to, a side
thorax airbag.
Items of clothing hanging from the grab

handle attached to the roof.
Items of clothing or cushions draped over

the part of the front seat containing the
airbag.
Non-approved seat covers/accessory seat

covers over a front seat; in particular, seat
covers that have not been designed for use
with side airbag. If in doubt, consult your
WARNING
Do not allow passengers to obstruct the
operation of the airbags by placing feet,
knees or any other part of the person, or any
other objects in contact with, or in close
proximity to, an airbag module.
DO NOT attach or position items on, or close
to the roof lining, A , B and C post
finishers, front seat backs or to an airbag
cover, which could interfere with the inflation
of the airbag or, if the airbag inflates, be
propelled inside the vehicle causing injury to
the occupants.
WARNING
Following inflation, some SRS/airbag
components are hot - DO NOT touch until they
have cooled.
Even with SRS/airbag equipment fitted, seat
belts must ALWAYS be worn because:
An airbag will only provide additional

protection in certain types of frontal
collisions. NO protection is afforded
against the effects of rear impacts, or
minor frontal impacts.
Inflation and deflation take place

instantaneously and will not provide
protection against the effects of
secondary impacts that can occur during
multiple vehicle collisions.
H5440L
To ensure correct deployment of the airbags, it

is essential that obstructions are not allowed to
intervene between an airbag and the occupant.
The following are examples of the type of
obstructions that could either, impede correct
operation of the airbags, or jeopardise personal
safety in the event of an airbag deployment:
Accessories attached to or obscuring an

airbag cover, including; the roof lining, A,
B and C post finishers and the seat backs
of the front seats.
Items of hand luggage, or other objects

placed on an airbag cover.
79
Airbag SRS
Seating positions
WARNING
The airbag module inflates with considerable
speed and force. For your safety:
WARNING
To minimise the risk of accidental injury from
inflating airbags, seat belts should be
correctly worn at all times. In addition, both
driver and front seat passenger should adjust
their seat to provide the maximum practical
distance from the front airbags. Front seat
and outer rear seat occupants should also
ensure that a gap is maintained between the
upper torso and head, and the side of the
vehicle, to enable unobstructed inflation of
the side thorax for the front seat occupants
and side head airbags for both front and rear
passengers.
An inflating airbag can cause facial abrasions

and other injuries. The injurious effects of
airbag inflation can be reduced, by ensuring
driver and passenger are seated correctly,
with the seat moved back as far as is
practical, and the seat belts worn correctly.
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends a
minimum distance of 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupants chest and the drivers
air bag module.
NEVER attach accessory items to an airbag
module cover.
In order to provide optimum protection in the

event of a severe impact, it is necessary for the
airbags to deploy with considerable speed.
When an airbag inflates, a fine powder is

released. This is not an indication of a
malfunction. However, the powder may cause
irritation to the skin and should be thoroughly
flushed from the eyes and any cuts or
abrasions of the skin.

and other injuries if the occupant is too close to
the airbag at the time of its deployment.
Both front seating positions are equipped with

knee bolsters to provide knee protection in
the event of an impact. DO NOT modify the
bolsters, or mount after market equipment on
or behind them.
80
Airbag SRS
HOW THE AIRBAG SRS WORKS
When an airbag inflates, a fine powder is

released. This is not an indication of a
malfunction. However, the powder may cause
irritation to the skin and should be thoroughly
flushed from the eyes and any cuts or abrasions
of the skin. After inflation, front and side thorax
airbags deflate immediately (side head
protection airbags deflate slowly). This
provides a gradual cushioning effect for the
occupant and also ensures that the driver's
forward vision is not obscured.
In the event of a collision, the airbag control

unit monitors the rate of deceleration induced
by the collision, to determine whether the
airbags should be deployed.
Operation of the airbag SRS is dependent on
the rate at which the vehicle's passenger
compartment changes speed as a result of a
collision. The circumstances affecting different
collisions (vehicle speed, angle of impact, type
and size of object hit, for example), vary
considerably and will affect the rate of
deceleration accordingly.
WARNING
After inflation, some airbag components are
hot - DO NOT touch until they have cooled.
Note: The airbag SRS is not designed to

operate as a result of rear collisions, minor
frontal or side impacts; nor will it operate as a
result of heavy braking or driving over bumps
and potholes.
Caution: If a non-approved phone system is to

be fitted, ensure that the installer is aware of
the SRS system.
It follows, therefore, that significant superficial

damage can occur without the airbags
deploying or, conversely, that a relatively small
amount of structural damage may cause the
airbags to be deployed.
Dual stage deployment
The front airbags deploy in two stages,
depending on the severity of the frontal
collision. The unit monitors the rate of
deceleration during the impact.
In a moderately severe frontal impact, the
airbags inflate sufficiently to protect the front
seat passengers and reduce the risk of injury.
In a severe frontal impact, the airbags will fully
inflate thereby providing maximum protection.
Airbag inflation is virtually instantaneous and
occurs with considerable force, accompanied
by a loud noise. The inflated bag, together with
the seat belt restraint system, limit the
movement of an occupant, thereby reducing
the risk of injury to the head and upper torso.
81
Airbag SRS
Occupant detection
The front passenger seat is equipped with an
occupancy sensor which measures the weight
on the cushion and changes the passenger
airbag status.
The occupancy sensor operates as follows:
Seat
occupancy
status
Completely
empty
Low weight
occupant/
object
Heavy
occupant/
object
Passenger
airbag status
Indicator
active
Deactivated
No
Deactivated
Yes
Activated
No
It is possible to receive an intermittent

indicator with an empty seat condition. This is
part of the systems adaptive behaviour, and
does not affect the status of the passenger
airbag. However, if the indicator becomes
permanently illuminated when the seat is
definitely empty, then contact your Land Rover
The airbag indicator is located on the
passengers side of the instrument panel.
WARNING
Do not use a child restraint on a seat
protected by an operational air bag in front of
it.
There is a risk of death or serious injury when
the airbag deploys.
The safest place for children is properly
restrained in the rear seats.
82
Airbag SRS
AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT
Side head impact protection
Frontal and side thorax airbags
H5442L
Note: Airbags will only deploy when they are

required to supplement the restraining force of
the front seat belts.
In the case of a severe frontal collision, both
front airbags will be deployed. In the case of a
severe side collision, only the side thorax
airbags and side head impact protection airbag
on the impacted side of the vehicle will inflate.
However, there may also be impact conditions
whereby one set of side and both front airbags
deploy at the same time, or where front and
side airbags respond separately as a result of a
secondary impact occurring after the initial
collision has taken place.
H5444L
Note: For the side head impact airbags to

deploy correctly, the roof lining and A post
trim must be undamaged and fitted correctly.
Any damage or suspect fitting should be
referred to a Land Rover Retailer for
examination.
Side head impact airbags are designed to
protect the head in the event of a severe side
impact or rollover event. They will NOT inflate
as a result of frontal or rear impacts alone.
WARNING
The side head impact protection modules are

located behind the roof lining and pillar finisher,
above the doors. In the event of a severe side
collision, the airbag pushes out from behind the
roof lining and pillar finisher as it inflates. The
side head impact airbag remains inflated for
longer than the other airbags, to provide
additional head protection in the event of a
secondary impact/vehicle rollover.

and other injuries. Minimise the risk of injury
by ensuring that front seat occupants are
wearing their seat belts and are seated
correctly, with the seat as far back as is
practical.
Ensure that a gap is maintained between the
upper torso and the side of the vehicle, to
enable unobstructed inflation of the side
thorax airbags.
DO NOT lean out of the window.
83
Airbag SRS
SERVICE INFORMATION
WARNING
The components that make up the airbag SRS
are sensitive to electrical or physical
interference, either of which could easily
damage the system and cause inadvertent
operation or a malfunction of the airbag.
WARNING
DO NOT attempt to service, repair, replace,
modify or tamper with any part of the airbag
SRS, or wiring in the vicinity of an airbag SRS
component; this could cause the system to
activate, resulting in personal injury.
For your safety it is recommended that you

seek the assistance of a Land Rover Retailer
to carry out any of the following:
In addition, ALWAYS contact your Land Rover

Retailer if:
an airbag inflates.
the front or side of the vehicle is damaged,

even if the airbag has not inflated.
any part of an airbag module cover shows

signs of cracking or damage.
any trim containing airbags - front seat

back, headlining or pillar trims - becomes
damaged.
Removal or repair of any wiring or

component in the vicinity of any of the
SRS components, including the steering
wheel, steering column, door trim, roof
lining, instrument pack and instrument
panel.
Installation of electronic equipment such

as a mobile phone, two-way radio or
in-car entertainment system.
Modification to the front or side of the

vehicle, including the bumper and
chassis.
Attachment of accessories to the front or

side of the vehicle.
Disposing of vehicles
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to inform the
new owner that the vehicle has an airbag SRS.
If your vehicle is to be scrapped; airbags that
have not been deployed are potentially very
dangerous and must be safely deployed in a
controlled environment by qualified personnel,
before a vehicle is scrapped.
84
Steering Column
Steering Column
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

WARNING
DO NOT adjust the steering wheel position
while the vehicle is in motion. This is
extremely dangerous!
The steering wheel position can be adjusted in
two directions.
Move the lever located under the steering wheel
fully downwards (see inset).
Adjust the steering wheel up or down, in or out.
Move the lever fully up to lock.
WARNING
Ensure that the lever is fully up. Inadvertent
movement of the wheel might occur if the
lever is not fully tightened.
H5454L
85
Door Mirrors
Door Mirrors
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Note: Objects viewed in exterior mirrors may
appear further away than they actually are.
Mirror adjustment
H5458L
With the starter switch turned to position l or

II, push the knob in the appropriate direction
to tilt the mirror glass up/down/left or right.
The door mirrors have integral heating
elements which disperse ice or mist from the
glass. These will operate automatically with the
starter switch in position II and are controlled
according to the external temperature and
wiper status.
H5456L
Rotate the knob to select either the left- or

right-hand mirror.
Note: On vehicles fitted with the drivers seat

memory facility, up to three exterior mirror
positions for each of three possible starter keys
can be stored, see DRIVERS SEAT MEMORY
FACILITY*, 55 .
86
Door Mirrors
Folding the mirror body
The door mirrors are designed to fold forwards
or rearwards on impact. They can also be folded
in towards the side windows into a park
position.
H5460L
Manual operation: On some vehicles this

operation can be carried out manually, by
physically pushing the mirror bodies towards
the side windows.
H5462L
Electric operation:* With the rotary knob in

the central position, push the knob downwards
to fold the mirrors. Push the knob downwards
again to unfold the mirrors.
If the mirrors are accidentally knocked out of
position (i.e. with one mirror folded and the
other in the normal position), an additional
operation of the switch will re-synchronise
them.
87
Door Mirrors
Automatic mirror dipping*
Vehicles with drivers seat memory have a
pre-stored function, which causes the door
mirrors to dip whenever reverse gear is
selected, giving the driver a view of the
curbside.
When this feature is first turned on, see
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 93, the
mirrors will dip to a preset amount. The degree
of dipping can be programmed using the
following sequence:
1. Insert the ignition key and turn it to position
ll.
2. Adjust the seat and the exterior mirrors to
the correct position and perform a
memory-store routine.
3. Select reverse gear - the mirrors will dip to
a preset level.
4. Adjust the mirrors to the required dipped
position.
5. Perform a memory-store sequence.
6. Mirror Dip Stored will appear on the
message center (if fitted).
7. A single chime will sound from the
instrument pack.
This feature can be enabled or disabled
by a Land Rover Retailer or by the
driver. See SELECTING SETTINGS
OPTION, 93.
88
H5375N
25
AUTO
89
24
22
23
21
20
19
10
PTY
FM1
2 KSAN FM
11 12
14 : 54
13
17
16
15
14
18
Facia Controls
Facia Controls
FACIA CONTROLS
Facia Controls
FACIA CONTROLS KEY
1. Headlamps and direction indicator controls
2. Cruise control switches
3. Tachometer
4. Temperature gauge
5. Horn buttons
6. Fuel gauge
7. Speedometer
8. Audio remote controls
9. Wash/wipe controls
10. Audio display/controls
11. Heater/air conditioning controls
12. Hazard warning lamp switch
13. Door lock/unlock switch
14. Gear selector
15. Terrain ResponseTM control switch*
16. Transfer gearbox switch
17. Hill Descent Control switch
18. Display screen
19. Electric parkbrake switch
20. Air suspension switch
21. Starter switch
22. Steering column adjustment
23. Manual headlamp levelling
24. Dimmer control
25. Lamps master switch
Note:
The precise specification and location of the
controls may vary according to territorial
requirements and from vehicle to vehicle.
90
Instruments
Instruments
INSTRUMENT PACK
1
EXT 72 F
10
9
H5466N
1. Tachometer
Indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute (x 1000). In normal driving conditions
the engine is most fuel efficient between 2000
and 3000 rev/min.
If the pointer moves above the mid point, the

engine coolant is becoming too hot. Should the
pointer move INTO the RED segment and the
RED warning indicator within the gauge
illuminates, severe engine damage could occur
(under these circumstances, the air
conditioning may switch off and engine
performance may reduce in order to minimise
engine load).
2. Temperature gauge
At normal operating temperature, the pointer
will be positioned midway between the RED and
BLUE segments of the gauge (the precise
position will vary according to climatic
conditions).
91
Instruments
The small arrow visible alongside the fuel pump
symbol on the gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle on which the fuel filler is located - a
useful reminder to help you position the vehicle
on the correct side of the forecourt pumps
before refuelling.
Caution: NEVER allow vehicles to run out of
fuel as the resultant misfire may damage the
catalytic converter.
4. Speedometer
Indicates road speed.
H5467G
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and

switch off the engine and allow to cool down. If
the problem persists, seek qualified assistance
before continuing.
5. Total distance (odometer) and trip recorder

Indicates the total distance travelled, and also
shows the most recent individual journey
distance, see ODOMETER DISPLAY, 106.
3. Fuel gauge
When the starter switch is turned to position II,
the pointer quickly rises to show the level of fuel
in the tank.
6. Trip recorder reset switch

With the starter switch in position ll, pressing
this button resets the trip recorder to zero.
When the remaining fuel reaches a minimum of

12 litres (3 gallons), the AMBER low fuel
warning indicator in the fuel gauge illuminates.
7. Gear selector position display

The current gear selector position is displayed.
See GEAR SELECTOR DISPLAY, 106, for
further information.
8. Main message center*
Displays all warning and information
messages. For further information concerning
messages and their meanings, refer to MAIN
MESSAGE CENTER, 95.
9. Warning indicators panel
For warning indicator information, see
INDICATOR GROUPING, 108.
10. Tachometer indicators panel
Displays four system status indicators.
H5468G
The remaining fuel should give a range of 80 km

(50 miles).
92
Settings Option*
Settings Option
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION

Various vehicle functions can be selected to
suit personal requirements. These can be set by
the driver.
MODE
SETTINGS
ENTER
EXIT
1
2
TRIP DISTANCE
UNITS
KM
NEXT
BACK
EXIT
H5475G
With the starter key in any position, but with the

vehicle stationary and a blank screen displayed,
a short press (less than two seconds) on the i
button on the end of the direction indicator stalk
brings up the SETTINGS display.
H5476G
Move through the Settings menu by pressing

buttons 1 or 2, and make choices by pressing
buttons 3 or 4.
Once this screen is displayed, pressing button

1 gives access to the menu of options that can
be personalised.
When you have finished making adjustments, a

short press (less than two seconds) on the i
button will return you to the trip computer
display.
93
Settings Option*
SETTINGS
TRIP DISTANCE UNITS
FUEL USAGE UNITS
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE
OVERSPEED WARNING
HEADLAMP OFF DELAY

AUTO DOOR LOCK
REVERSE MIRROR DIP
EASY ENTRY
RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS
CHOICE
MILES/KM
MPG
L/100 km
Km/l
TEMP DISPLAY UNITS (C or F)
Off
20 - 250 km/h or 15 to 140 mph in 5-unit steps
(Units set as trip distance)
30/60/120/240 seconds
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
YES/NO
Confirming choices
After making any changes to the Settings
options, press the i button again to save
settings and exit.
Key memory
All of the choices made during Settings are
stored within the vehicles memory. The choices
are referenced to the remote handset that was
used during the process.
Note: If the vehicle is moved while any changes

are being made to the Settings options, the
system will prevent any further input until the
vehicle is stationary again.
These choices are recalled when the vehicle is

next unlocked using that remote handset.
94
Message Center*
Message Center
MAIN MESSAGE CENTER
Warnings and information messages

Warning messages are non-critical, but must
be treated with some urgency. They will also be
accompanied by an audible warning each time
the message is displayed.
DO NOT ignore these messages - TAKE
CORRECTIVE ACTION AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
EXT 23 C
Warning messages are displayed for

approximately 20 seconds. If other warning
messages are pending, the display time will be
reduced to approximately 2 seconds.
Information messages will be displayed as and
when applicable, and also when the starter
switch is turned on or off. Where the message
requires action by the driver - TAKE
CORRECTIVE ACTION AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
LOW WASHER FLUID
Messages are displayed in order of importance

with critical warnings taking priority.
H5477G
Driver warning and information messages are

displayed in the main message center.
They are displayed when a fault is detected and
also when the starter switch is turned off. It is
possible, by pressing the system check control
switch, to view messages for up to 3 minutes
after the key has been removed from the starter
switch.
Messages have different priority levels and are
grouped into the following categories.
Critical warning messages
Critical warning messages are accompanied by
an audible warning and the warning may have
the handbook symbol next to it. DO NOT ignore
these messages - TAKE CORRECTIVE ACTION
IMMEDIATELY! These messages are displayed
continuously while the starter switch is turned
on, and remain displayed while the fault
persists.
95
Message Center*
MESSAGE CENTER
MESSAGES
The following table is a comprehensive list of all
messages that could appear in the Message
Center. Market criteria mean that some
messages will not apply to your vehicle and will
therefore not appear.
Message
AAA.A M BBB.B M
C.C Mph D.D mpg
AIRBAG FAULT
AUTOMATIC
MODE
Average Cons.
Reset mpg l/100km
Average Speed
Reset Miles km
CANNOT EDIT
ON THE MOVE
CAUTION
PARKBRAKE
APPLIED
CAUTION!
RISK OF
GROUNDING WITH
SUSPENSION AT
NORMAL HEIGHT
CHECK ALL
TIRE PRESSURES
CHECK
BRAKE FLUID
CHECK
BRAKE PADS
Meaning
Trip computer information.
What to do?
No action required.
Fault in supplementary
restraint system.
Information
Seek assistance immediately.

No action required.
No action required.
No action required.
Driver has attempted to access

the Customer Personalisation
menu when the vehicle is
moving.
Parkbrake has been applied
while the vehicle is moving.
Stop the vehicle before entering

Customer Personalisation menu.
Displayed when the Terrain

Response system would
normally have provided
off-road height but the driver
has manually lowered the
vehicle (or the system cannot
raise the vehicle).
Advisory message, pressure in
a running tire decreased to first
warning threshold.
Brake fluid in reservoir below
recommended level.
Brake pads worn beyond the
service limit.
96
Only use this function in an

emergency.
Raise suspension manually to
off-road height if possible and
appropriate.
Check tire pressures.

Message Center*
Message
CHECK
SPARE TIRE
PRESSURE
COOLING SYSTEM
FAULT
MONITOR GAUGE
CRUISE CONTROL
CANCELLED
CRUISE CONTROL
DRIVER OVERRIDE
CRUISE CONTROL
NOT AVAILABLE
CRUISE CONTROL
NOT PERMITTED
CRUISE CONTROL
SET SPEED xxx km/h
DOOR MIRROR DIP
STORED
DRIVER OVERSPEED
SET CLEAR
DRIVERS
DOOR OPEN
DSC
SWITCHED OFF
ENGINE SYSTEM FAULT
ENGINE SYSTEM
SERVICE REQUIRED
FASTEN
SEATBELTS
FRONT LEFT
TIRE PRESSURE
NOT MONITORED
Meaning
Pressure in spare tire
decreased to warning
threshold.
Stop the vehicle and check
coolant level.
What to do?
Top up with engine coolant. If the
problem persists, consult your
Retailer.
If below lower mark, seek
qualified assistance.
Driver has switched off Cruise

Control.
Information
No action required.
No action required.
System fault or vehicle

operating parameters outside
threshold for operation of
Cruise Control.
Information
No action required unless

message appears within
operating parameters. In which
case seek qualified assistance.
No action required.
Information
No action required.
Memory system - confirmation

that memory has stored driver
information.
No action required.
Drivers door open or not fully

closed.
System not available - switched
off by driver.
Engine management system
registers a serious fault reduced performance may be
experienced.
The relevant service interval
has elapsed and your vehicle
requires servicing.
Seat occupied and safety belt
not fastened.
Possible loss of RF
transmission or defective
sensor battery.
Close drivers door.
97
No action required.
To reselect, press DSC switch.

Avoid high speeds and consult
your Land Rover Retailer.
Arrange as soon as possible.
Fasten safety belt.

Message Center*
Message
FRONT LEFT
TIRE PRESSURE
TOO HIGH
FRONT LEFT
TIRE PRESSURE
VERY LOW
FUEL TANK CAP
LOOSE OR MISSING
GRASS GRAVEL
SNOW
GRASS GRAVEL
SNOW
PROGRAM SELECTED
HDC FAULT
SYSTEM
NOT AVAILABLE
HDC
NOT AVAILABLE
IN THIS GEAR
HDC
NOT AVAILABLE
SPEED TOO HIGH
HDC
SWITCHED OFF
HDC TEMPORARILY
NOT AVAILABLE
SYSTEM COOLING
HIGH ENGINE SPEED
FOR COOLING
HIGH/LOW RANGE
SELECTED
Meaning
Pressure in a running tire too
high, threshold reached.
What to do?
Adjust to correct pressure as
soon as possible.
Pressure in a running tire

decreased to warning
threshold.
Information

soon as possible.
Correct the situation.
Advisory message. Terrain

No action required.
Response Grass/Gravel/Snow
special program has been
selected and is currently active.
Advisory message. Terrain
No action required.
Response Grass/Gravel/Snow
special program has been
selected and is currently active.
System fault.
Drive with care and do not
attempt to descend steep slopes.
HDC not operative because of Select correct gear if HDC is
incorrect gear selection. HDC is required. In LOW range, HDC
fully functional in 1, R and D in operates in all gears.
HIGH range. It operates in all
gears in LOW range.
HDC unavailable, speed
Reduce vehicle speed.
threshold exceeded. Max HDC
operating speed is 50 km/h,
max speed for HDC selection is
80 km/h.
HDC switched off by driver,
No action required.
Terrain Response system or
speed threshold exceeded.
HDC switched off while brake
Wait until message disappears
system is cooling.
before attempting to descend
steep slopes.
Engine idle speed increasing to No action required.
improve cooling and/or air
conditioning performance.
Advises driver that transfer box No action required.
has engaged HIGH/LOW range.
98
Message Center*
Message
INTERIOR LIGHTS
AUTOMATIC
INTERIOR LIGHTS OFF
KEY BATTERY
LOW PLACE
KEY IN IGNITION
TO CHARGE
LOW
COOLANT LEVEL
LOW WASHER FLUID

MEMORY 1/2/3
STORED/SELECTED
PARKBRAKE
BEDDING CYCLE
ACTIVE
PARKBRAKE FAULT
PARKBRAKE FAULT
AUTO RELEASE
NOT FUNCTIONAL
PARKBRAKE FAULT
SYSTEM
NOT FUNCTIONAL
PARKBRAKE FAULT
TO HOLD VEHICLE
REMOVE KEY THEN
APPLY PARKBRAKE
PARKBRAKE OFF
LIFT SWITCH
TO APPLY
Meaning
All automatic operation of
courtesy lamps has been
enabled.
All automatic operation of
courtesy lamps has been
deactivated.
Handset battery charge low.
Coolant level in header tank

below recommended level.
Washer fluid quantity below

1 litre.
Memory system - confirmation
that memory has been
stored/selected.
A garage technician has
requested a bedding cycle.
What to do?
No action required.
No action required.
Insert key in starter switch and

start engine.
Top up with correct mixture of

antifreeze and water at the
earliest opportunity. If the
problem persists, consult your
Top up washer fluid.
No action required.
If not required, an ignition reset

will cancel the function.
Supports the amber warning

Seek qualified assistance.
indicator - electric parkbrake
functions may not be available.
Drive-away release function is Use manual release.
not available.
Supports the red warning
indicator - electric parkbrake
functions are not available.
Electric parkbrake has lost
vehicle speed information.
Seek qualified assistance

immediately.
An emergency release
operation is detected.
Once original faults have been

corrected, apply the switch to
reinstate electric park brake.
99
Follow the instructions to park

the vehicle.
Message Center*
Message
PARK LOCK
FAILURE
APPLY HANDBRAKE
PRESS FOOTBRAKE
AND PARKBRAKE
SWITCH
TO RELEASE
PROGRAM CHANGE
IN PROGRESS
Range
Miles km
RECOMMEND
LOW RANGE
IS SELECTED
FOR MUD-RUTS
PROGRAM
RECOMMEND RAISING
SUSPENSION TO
OFF ROAD HEIGHT
IN DEEP MUD-RUTS
RECOMMEND STARTING
IN
2ND/3RD GEAR
FOR SLIPPERY
CONDITIONS
REDUCED
ENGINE
PERFORMANCE
Meaning
Transmission park lock
function ineffective due to
transfer box being out of HIGH
or LOW range.
A switch release has been
detected without brake pedal
contact.
Conditions prevail which make
it temporarily impossible to
select a new program. This can
be due to ABS or DSC activity
or the overheating of the
electronic differentials.
What to do?
Follow the instructions to achieve

a manual release.
Be patient. If conditions change

within 60 seconds, the chosen
program will be activated.
If the message is prompted by
electronic differential overheat,
then it will take longer but there
will be separate advice about this.
Once the differentials have cooled
and this advice is no longer
present, try to reselect the
required special program.
No action required.
LOW range is usually better for

Mud-Ruts special program.
Select LOW range if required.
In deep ruts it is beneficial to

raise the vehicle to off-road
height. This is done
automatically in LOW range but
has to be done manually if
mud/ruts program is used in
HIGH range.
For slippery conditions it can
be beneficial to start off in a
higher gear than usual.
Raise suspension manually to

off-road height.
Information
No action required.
100
Select second/third gear.
Message Center*
Message
RESET SUSPENSION
HEIGHT IF CLEAR
OF OBSTACLE
REVERSE
GEAR SELECTED
SAND
Meaning
Suspension still in extended
mode.
Information
If you leave the rotary knob in

this position then you will
activate the Terrain Response
sand program.
SAND PROGRAM
The rotary knob has been left in
SELECTED
one position for longer than
two seconds and Sand special
program has been activated.
SELECT LOW RANGE
Vehicle is not in LOW range, so
TO ACTIVATE
Rock Crawl cannot be
ROCK CRAWL
activated.
Alerts driver that range change
SELECT NEUTRAL
FOR RANGE
will not occur until neutral is
selected on the transmission.
CHANGE
SLOW DOWN OR VEHICLE Vehicle will automatically
WILL LOWER/RAISE
lower/raise if vehicle speed
increases.
SPECIAL
You have deselected a Terrain
PROGRAMS OFF
Response special program and
the general program has now
been activated.
SPEED TOO HIGH
Driver has requested range
FOR RANGE
change when vehicle speed is
CHANGE
too high.
SUSPENSION
Access height selected.
ACCESS HEIGHT
SELECTED
SUSPENSION
Air suspension height change
CLOSE DOOR
is prevented because a door is
TO CHANGE HEIGHT
open.
SUSPENSION FAULT
A fault has been detected in the
air suspension system. System
may still operate normally.
101
What to do?
Check if vehicle is clear of
obstacle. If clear, select required
suspension.
No action required.
No action required.
No action required.
Select LOW range if Rock Crawl is

required.
Select neutral.
Choose to slow down or accept

height change.
No action required.
Reduce speed to 40 km/h.
No action required.
Close all doors.
Message Center*
Message
SUSPENSION FAULT
MAX SPEED 50 km/h
(MAX SPEED 30 mph)
SUSPENSION FAULT
NORMAL HEIGHT ONLY
SUSPENSION FAULT
STOP SAFELY
STOP ENGINE
SUSPENSION
IN EXTENDED
MODE
SUSPENSION
LOCKED AT
ACCESS HEIGHT
SUSPENSION
NORMAL HEIGHT
SELECTED
SUSPENSION
SPEED TOO HIGH
TO CHANGE HEIGHT
SUSPENSION
START ENGINE
TO RAISE VEHICLE
SUSPENSION
VEHICLE RAISING
SLOWLY
SUSPENSION
WILL RAISE WHEN
SYSTEM COOLED
SYSTEM CHECK
IN PROGRESS
SYSTEM FAULT
SOME PROGRAMS
NOT AVAILABLE
Meaning
A major fault has been detected
in the air suspension system.
Height cannot be controlled.
A fault has been detected in the
air suspension system. Only
normal height is available.
Major component failure.
What to do?
Drive slowly until fault can be
rectified.
No action required.
Stop vehicle immediately and

seek assistance.
Vehicle body has become

trapped on an obstacle and will
raise automatically.
Crawl mode selected and
suspension locked.
No action required.
Normal height selected.
No action required.
No action required.
A height change has been

Reduce vehicle speed.
requested but is prevented
because speed is too high.
Vehicle height can only be
Start the engine.
raised with the engine running.
Vehicle is raising slowly
because reservoir is empty.
(Only displayed if lift time
exceeds 12 seconds. This is
NOT a system fault).
Air suspension compressor is
cooling. Lifting will resume
when compressor has cooled.
Instrument cluster internal
diagnostic routine.
Some Terrain Response special
programs are not available
because of a system fault.
102
No action required.
Wait for suspension to carry out

lifting sequence.
No action required.
Be careful going off-road as
Terrain Response may not
function in the program required.
Get the vehicle checked and
rectified.
Message Center*
Message
SYSTEM FAULT
SPECIAL PROGRAMS
NOT AVAILABLE
Meaning
There is a fault on the vehicle
which makes the Terrain
Response special programs
unavailable.
TERRAIN RESPONSE
If you leave the Terrain
SPECIAL PROGRAMS OFF Response rotary knob in this
position, you will activate the
general program and any active
Terrain Response special
program will be deselected.
TERRAIN RESPONSE
Selected Terrain Response
program unable to be selected
TIME OUT
as vehicle is outside of required
SPECIAL PROGRAM
NO LONGER SELECTED parameters, or selected
program has been switched
due to vehicle moving outside
of required parameters.
TRAILER CONNECTED
Advisory message that vehicle
OFF ROAD HEIGHT
has not achieved off-road
NOT SELECTED
height as trailer socket is being
AUTOMATICALLY
used.
TRANSMISSION
COMMANDSHIFT
SELECTED
TRANSMISSION
FAULT
TRANSMISSION
FAULT LIMITED
GEARS AVAILABLE
TRANSMISSION
FAULT
STOP SAFELY
Information
Advises driver that

transmission has a fault.
Advises driver that
transmission has a fault and
performance may be affected.
Information
103
What to do?
Be careful going off-road as
Terrain Response cannot
function in any of its special
programs.
Get the vehicle checked and
rectified.
No action required.
No action required.
If a trailer is connected, do
nothing, as it may not be safe to
raise the vehicle to off-road
height.
If no trailer is connected
electrically but something else,
such as a bike rack, is, then the
vehicle can be raised to off-road
height manually.
If nothing is connected, then the
socket needs checking for faults.
No action required.

Follow the instructions and seek

assistance immediately.
Message Center*
Message
TRANSMISSION
FAULT
TRACTION REDUCED
TRANSMISSION
OVERHEAT
SLOW DOWN
TRANSMISSION
RANGE CHANGE
NOT AVAILABLE
TRANSMISSION
TRACTION
REDUCED
Trip Dist Range
Ave Sp. Ave Cons.
Trip Distance
Reset Miles km
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING
SET FOR
HEAVY LOAD
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING
SYSTEM FAULT
TIRE PRESSURES
TOO HIGH
TIRE PRESSURES
VERY LOW
Meaning
Information
What to do?
No action required.
Rear differential temperature

has reached or is approaching
the overheat threshold.
Information
Reduce speed.
No action required.
Transfer box control module

fault.
No action required.
No action required.
TPM system set by driver for

heavy load operation.
No action required.
TPM system fault has

occurred.
Information

soon as possible.
soon as possible.
Information
104
Message Center*
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR
H5478G
H5479G
When the starter switch is turned to position I,

a distance countdown to the next service
appears in the display. In the left-hand sector,
the type of service required is shown. A minus
sign preceding the distance indicates that the
service interval point has been exceeded by that
distance.
If the System Check Control Button, is pressed

before the five seconds have elapsed, a clock
symbol appears and the next service date is
displayed (dd.mm.yy) in place of the
countdown feature. This displays for a further
five seconds.
If the service/inspection date is passed before
the countdown feature has reached zero, the
clock symbol will be displayed for five seconds
at the start of every starter sequence to make
the driver aware of the need to check the
vehicles service requirements.
After approximately five seconds, the display

reverts to show the total distance travelled.
The distance countdown is controlled by the
engine management system and is
automatically adjusted to allow for driving style
and conditions.
Note: After the completion of each service, the
Land Rover Retailer will reset the distance
display for the countdown to the next service.
105
Message Center*
GEAR SELECTOR DISPLAY
ODOMETER DISPLAY
H5480G
This shows the current gear lever position and

indicates when LOW range has been selected.
The LOW range indicator (in the top right
corner of the display) flashes whilst the transfer
gearbox changes ranges and then illuminates
constantly when LOW range has engaged. A
range change will also be confirmed in the main
message center.
H5481G
With the starter switch turned to position II,

the display indicates the total distance travelled
by the vehicle, and also shows the most recent
individual journey distance. See Settings
Option*, 93.
106
Trip Computer*
Trip Computer
TRIP COMPUTER* FUNCTION SELECTION
A series of short presses of the button (less

than two seconds) will scroll through the
following:
EXT 73 F
TRIP
134.5 MILES
RANGE
AV.
FUEL
AV.
SPEED
246 MILES
17.4 MPG
45 MPH
OVERSPEED WARNING
65 MPH
H5471N
The trip computer function can be set to give a

wide range of information, with the units used
by the displays being chosen by the driver.
EXT 72 F
At engine start-up, the screen shows SYSTEM

CHECK IN PROGRESS. When this check is
completed, any warning messages will be
shown in order of priority.
TRIP
134.5 MILES
H5474N
The trip computer statistics can be viewed by

pressing the i button on the end of the
direction indicator stalk.
A long press of the button (over two seconds)
will zero the trip distance recorder which will
then start to record distance from that point.
107
Available range (with current fuel tank

contents)
Average consumption
Average speed
The option to activate/deactivate the

overspeed warning function (A long press
of the button turns the function on or off)
A review of active warning messages
A blank trip computer window (screen

shows outside temperature)
A display of trip distance
Warning Indicators
Warning Indicators
INDICATOR GROUPING
H5484N
BACKGROUND
Caution: RED warning indicators are of

particular importance; their illumination
indicates that a fault exists. If a RED warning
indicator illuminates, stop the vehicle safely
and review the specific instructions given in
this section.
Direction indicators - GREEN

An indicator flashes in time with
the corresponding left or right
direction indicator lamps
whenever they are operated. If the warning
indicator fails to flash, or flashes very rapidly,
this may indicate a bulb failure in one of the
direction indicator lamps.
The location and specification of the warning

indicators may vary according to model and
market requirements.
For ease of identification, the warning indicator
descriptions have been grouped into the five
locations on the instrument pack.
If the hazard switch is pressed, both warning

indicators will flash in conjunction with the
direction indicator lamps.
These are:
background
tachometer
fuel/temperature gauge
message center
speedometer
Trailer - GREEN
The indicator illuminates as a bulb
check when the starter switch is
turned to position II and
extinguishes when the engine is started.
If a trailer is attached to the vehicle and the
direction indicators are used, this indicator will
flash in synchronisation with the direction
indicator lamps. If it does not flash, this
indicates that a trailer bulb is defective.
108
Warning Indicators
TACHOMETER DISPLAY
Seat belt - RED

Illuminates when the starter
switch is turned to position II and
extinguishes after approximately 6
seconds, even if the driver's seat belt remains
unfastened. In some markets illumination of the
indicator will be accompanied by a warning
chime (see AUDIBLE WARNINGS, 114).
Battery charging - RED

Illuminates as a bulb check when
the starter switch is turned to
position II and extinguishes once
the engine is running. If it remains on, or
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the
battery charging system is indicated. Seek
qualified assistance urgently.
Note: In certain markets, the indicator will

illuminate until the drivers seat belt is fastened
correctly.
Low oil pressure - RED

position II and extinguishes
when the engine is started. If the indicator
remains on, flashes on and off, or illuminates
whilst driving, stop the vehicle as soon as
safety permits and SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE
IMMEDIATELY. Seek qualified assistance
before driving. Always check the oil level when
this indicator illuminates.
Airbag SRS - RED

The indicator illuminates when the
starter switch is turned to position
II and extinguishes after about 4
seconds. If the indicator illuminates at any
other time, there is a fault with the system seek qualified assistance urgently.
Suspension- AMBER/RED
Illuminates amber when a
suspension fault occurs which still
allows the vehicle to be driven
normally. If the symbol flashes red, the vehicle
should be driven slowly until qualified
assistance can be obtained.
Check engine - AMBER

Illuminates as a bulb and system
turned on and extinguishes as
soon as the engine is started. Illumination at
any other time indicates an engine fault. If the
indicator illuminates continuously while
driving, the emission performance of the
engine management system is impaired - seek
qualified assistance.
The first illumination of the indicator will be

accompanied by a warning chime.
LOW gear- GREEN
Illuminates when LOW range has
been selected; flashes during
range change.
If the indicator flashes while driving,

immediately reduce engine power to avoid
catalytic converter damage.
109
Warning Indicators
FUEL/TEMPERATURE GAUGE
DISPLAY
Hill Descent Control (HDC) information GREEN

Illuminates briefly as a bulb and
system check when the starter
switch is turned to position 'II' and
also illuminates when HDC is selected.
Headlamp high beam - BLUE

Illuminates when the headlamps
are switched to high beam or
headlamps are flashed.
If HDC is selected and all operating conditions

are met, the indicator will illuminate
continuously.
Tire pressure monitoring- AMBER

The indicator illuminates as a bulb
turned to position II. If the
indicator stays on or illuminates during driving,
the tire pressure in one or more tires is
significantly low and should be rectified as
soon as safely possible.
If HDC is selected and all operating conditions

are not met (vehicle in neutral gear and vehicle
speed above HDC operating range) the
indicator will flash.
If a fault with the HDC system occurs, HDC will
fade-out and then deselect, or deselect
immediately (depending on the type of fault and
whether or not HDC is in operation). The green
indicator will extinguish and the message
SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE will appear in the
message center (where fitted) or the HDC fault
amber indicator will illuminate.
Brake systems
This indicator shares its position
and symbol with four brake
system warnings and illuminates
briefly as a bulb check when the starter switch
is turned to position II (the indicator will
illuminate red and amber during bulb check).
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) and

Electronic Traction Control (ETC.) - AMBER
Illuminates briefly as a bulb check
when the starter switch is turned
to position II. The indicator also
illuminates when DSC is switched off.
Deactivating DSC has no effect on traction
control.
Emergency brake assist - AMBER

If the indicator remains amber after starting, or
illuminates whilst driving, a fault with the EBA
system is indicated. Drive with care and seek
Brake pad wear - AMBER
It illuminates when brake pad wear has reached
a predetermined limit.
The indicator will flash while DSC and/or ETC. is

activated and will remain flashing until the
system is no longer active.
Electronic Brake force Distribution (EBD) RED

A fault with the EBD system is indicated by
illumination of the red brake warning indicator.
If this illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, stop the vehicle gently, as soon as
safety permits, check and top up brake fluid if
necessary. If the lamp remains illuminated,
seek qualified assistance before continuing.
If the indicator illuminates constantly, and does

not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed,
a fault has been detected in the system and DSC
and/or ETC. will be inactive - drive with care and
seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.
110
Warning Indicators
LED DISPLAY
Brake fluid level - RED

Low brake fluid level is indicated by illumination
of the red brake warning indicator. If this
illuminates while the vehicle is being driven,
stop the vehicle gently, as soon as safety
permits. Check and top up brake fluid if
necessary. If the lamp remains illuminated,
Have the problem checked by your Land Rover
Retailer.
EMS fault- AMBER

Illuminates when the engine
management system registers a
serious fault - reduced
performance may be experienced. Avoid high
speeds and consult your Land Rover Retailer as
soon as possible.
Transmission fault- AMBER/RED
Illuminates when the transmission
registers a fault.
Anti-lock braking system - AMBER

position II. If the indicator
remains on or illuminates whilst driving, a fault
with the ABS system is indicated. Drive with
care, avoiding heavy brake application, and
seek qualified assistance urgently.
AMBER The operation of the transmission is

limited. Seek qualified assistance as soon as
possible.
WARNING
The Park function on the automatic
transmission may be inoperable. Use the
parkbrake.
RED - the transmission is unable to function
properly. Stop as soon as safety permits and
turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle with the
ignition switched off for five minutes and then
switch the ignition back on. If the red light is
still on, do not use the vehicle.
111
Warning Indicators
Transmission fault- AMBER
Illuminates when the transmission
oil temperature reaches a
predetermined limit. Stop the
vehicle where safety permits and switch off the
engine. Allow the transmission to cool for one
hour before continuing.
HDC fault- AMBER

Illuminates when there is a fault in
the Hill Descent Control system.
This indicator is only present on
vehicles not fitted with a message center. If the
brake temperatures reach a predefined limit,
the HDC warning indicator will flash until the
system has cooled, see Hill Descent Control,
200.
RED - the transmission is unable to function

properly. Stop as soon as safety permits and
turn off the engine. Allow the transmission to
cool for at least one hour before continuing.
Note: The above transmission warning lights
only appear on vehicles that are not fitted with
a Message Center.
Low washer- AMBER
Illuminates when the contents of
the screen washer bottle fall below
a set level.
Door open- RED
Illuminates when the one of the
vehicles doors is open.
Tire pressure monitoring- RED

position II. If the indicator stays
on or illuminates during driving, the tire
pressure in one or more tires is very low and
should be rectified as soon as safely possible.
Low coolant- AMBER
Illuminates when the level of
engine coolant has reached a
predetermined limit. Stop the
vehicle and check the coolant level in the tank.
If it is below the lower mark, top up with the
correct mixture of antifreeze and water at the
earliest opportunity, see ENGINE COOLANT,
259. If the problem persists, consult your Land
Rover Retailer.
112
Warning Indicators
SPEEDOMETER DISPLAY
Cruise control active - GREEN
Illuminates when cruise control is
operating.
Adaptive front lighting system- AMBER

Illuminates when a fault occurs
with the Adaptive Front Lighting
System.
Parkbrake system - RED or AMBER
Illuminates for about 3 seconds as
a bulb check when the starter
switch is turned to position ll.
If the indicator flashes red or illuminates amber,
a fault with the parkbrake system is indicated,
When parking the vehicle in this condition,
ensure that the vehicle is secured stationary
without reliance on the parkbrake.
Front fog lights - GREEN*
Illuminates when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
Rear fog guard lamps - AMBER

Illuminates when the rear fog
guard lamps are switched on.
113
Audible Warnings
Audible Warnings
AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Seat belt reminder

In some markets, a warning chime will sound
(one second frequency):
The market specification will determine which

of the following audible warnings are
appropriate to your vehicle.
Electronic air suspension warnings

A warning chime will sound:
Whenever the air suspension raise/lower

switch is operated to raise the vehicle to
off-road height, or to return it to standard
ride height.
If changes to or from off-road height are

requested but not permitted.
Whenever the speed threshold for the

current ride height is reached.
If the seat belt remains unfastened, the chime

will sound at intervals of 15 seconds.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System*
A warning chime will sound:
Whenever the air suspension is lowered to

crawl mode.
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) warning

A warning chime will sound once:
If a fault with the DSC system is detected,

and the appropriate warning indicator(s)
illuminates (DSC, ABS, Amber Brake
Warning or HDC fault or text message). The
vehicle may still be driven with care, but
seek qualified assistance at the earliest
opportunity.
Starter key reminder

A warning will chime continuously:
If the driver's seat belt has not been

fastened when the starter switch is turned
on, . The chime operates in conjunction
with the seat belt warning indicator and
sounds for 6 seconds, or until the seat belt
is fastened (whichever occurs first).
If the key is left in the starter switch while

the driver's door is open, . The chime stops
as soon as the door is closed or the key is
removed from the starter switch.
The starter key reminder can be enabled
or disabled by a Land Rover Retailer.
114
Whenever the tire pressure is very low in

one or more tires.
Whenever the vehicle speed increases from

0 to 60 km/h (38 mph) with more than one
tire very low.
Whenever a Tire Pressure Monitoring

System or wheel sensor fault is detected.
Lamps & Indicators

Lamps & Indicators
EXTERIOR LAMPS
Lamps master switch
AUTO
AUTO
H5487G
The detent positions are:
1. Off
2. Front fog lamps*

3. Rear fog lamps
AUTO
If front fog lamps are not fitted, the rear fog

lamps come on at the first pull of the switch.
Side lamps
The front and rear side lamps, along with
licence plate and side marker lamps*,
illuminate when the lamps master switch is
turned to positions 2 or 3, regardless of the
position of the starter switch.
H5485L
The rotary master switch has a maximum of

four positions and three detent positions. If a
vehicle is not fitted with all options, the number
of switch positions will be reduced accordingly.
Automatic control lamps*

With the rotary master switch in position 4 and
starter switch in position II, the side lamps,
low beam headlamps and licence plate lamps
will illuminate automatically when the ambient
light falls below a predefined level.
The positions are:

1. Off
2. Side lamps
3. Low beam headlamps
All of the lamps will go out when the ambient

light rises above that level.
4. Automatic control lamps*
115
Lamps & Indicators

High beam
Dimmer Control
Rotate the dimmer control to vary the level of
instrument pack illumination.
AUTO
H5488G
With the rotary master lighting switch in

position 3 and starter switch in position ll,
push the column lighting switch lever away
from the steering wheel as far as it will go to
select high beam, and release it.
AUTO
To cancel high beam, pull the lever towards the

steering wheel again and release it.
While high beam is selected, a blue indicator
will be illuminated in the instrument pack.
Note: Legislation limits the number of
forward-facing lamps that can be illuminated at
any one time. Therefore, if front fog lamps and
low-beam headlamps are on together, the
switching on of high-beam headlamps would
cause the fog lamps to be switched off.
H5491L
Headlamp courtesy delay

As a driver convenience feature the headlamps
can be kept on for a short time after the vehicle
is parked. Turn the starter switch off with the
headlamps still switched on. The lamps master
switch can be in positions 2, 3 or 4.
Headlamp high beam flash

To flash the headlamps on high beam, pull the
lever towards the steering wheel and release it.
Remove the key from the starter switch and

turn lamps master switch fully anticlockwise to
the Off position. The headlamps will remain
illuminated for up to 240 seconds. This
automatic time delay is configurable (see
SELECTING SETTINGS OPTION, 93).
The blue indicator in the instrument pack

illuminates when the headlamps are flashed.
The courtesy delay may be cancelled at any

time by turning the starter switch to positions l
or II or the lamps master switch from position
1 to 2.
116
Lamps & Indicators

Note: If Automatic Control Lamps* are
switched on, the headlamp courtesy delay will
operate automatically.
Front fog lamps*
WARNING
Fog lamps should ONLY be used when
visibility is severely restricted - as soon as
conditions clear, switch off fog lamps to
prevent dazzling of other road users.
Headlamp courtesy delay can be

enabled or disabled by a Land Rover
Retailer or by the driver.
Daytime running lamps*
In certain markets, with the engine running and
the main lighting switch turned off, the front
and rear side lamps, the licence plate lamps and
the headlamp low beams will illuminate. The
instrument pack illumination remains off.
With the lamps master switch in positions 2 or

3, pull out the switch to its first-out position to
operate the front fog lamps.
An indicator will illuminate in the instrument
pack.
Unless they are required or prohibited

by law, daytime running lamps can be
disabled/enabled by a Land Rover
Retailer.
Rear fog lamps (with front fog lamps fitted)

With the lamps master switch in positions 2 or
3, pull out the switch to its fully extended
position.
Note: The following lamps operate only with

the starter switch in position ll.
Stop lamps
The stop lamps will illuminate when the brake
pedal is pressed and will remain on while the
brake pedal is pressed.

pack.
Rear fog lamps (without front fog lamps
fitted)
With the lamps master switch in position 3 ,
pull out the switch to its fully extended position.
The stop lamps also illuminate when Hill

Descent Control is braking the vehicle or during
Electronic Parkbrake dynamic deceleration.

pack.
ALWAYS remember to switch the fog lamps off
as soon as visibility permits.
Reversing lamps
Selection of reverse gear will operate the
reversing lamps.
117
Lamps & Indicators

HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
DIRECTION INDICATORS
H5494G
With the starter switch in position II, the

left-hand steering column lever will operate the
direction indicators (a GREEN warning
indicator on the instrument pack will flash in
time with the direction indicators).
H5493G
Press the switch to operate the hazard warning

lamps. All of the direction indicator lamps
(including the instrument pack warning
indicators and those fitted to a trailer) will flash
together.
Hold the lever partially up or down against

spring pressure to indicate a lane change.
Bulb failure of any front or rear direction
indicator lamp (not side repeaters) will cause
the instrument pack warning indicator to flash
rapidly and the audible indicator signal to
double in speed.
Use ONLY in an emergency to warn other road

users when your stationary vehicle is causing
an obstruction, or is in a hazardous situation.
Remember to switch off before moving away.
118
Wipers & Washers

Wipers & Washers
OPERATING
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
The wipers and washers will only operate when

the starter switch is turned to position I or II.
DO NOT operate the wipers on a dry screen.
In freezing or very hot conditions, ensure

that the blades are not stuck to the glass.
In winter, remove any snow or ice from

around the arms and blades, including the
wiped area of the windshield and the heater
air intakes.
3
2
1
Note: If the wiper blades have stuck to the

glass, an electronic cut-out may temporarily
prevent the wiper motor from operating. If this
is the case, switch the wipers off and turn the
starter switch off. Clear the obstruction and try
again.
H5495G
Rain sensor variable delay* or intermittent

variable delay
Push the lever up to position 1.
Semi-automatic operation of the wiper blades is

possible by setting the wiper lever to the rain
sensor variable delay* mode. In this mode, the
wipers operate only when the rain sensor
detects moisture on windshield and remain
inactive whilst the screen is dry.
Normal speed wipe

Fast speed wipe
Single wipe
Pull the lever down and release immediately.
Note: With the lever held down, the wipers will
operate at fast speed until the lever is released.
119
Wipers & Washers

Rain sensor variable delay*
Intermittent variable delay
Caution: BEFORE entering an automatic car

wash, ensure that the wipers are switched off
- otherwise they could operate during the car
wash programme and be damaged.
H5496G
With the lever in position 1, rotate the delay

switch clockwise to increase, and anticlockwise
to decrease, the frequency of the intermittent
wipe.
H5497G
The rain sensor is fitted to the inside of the

windshield, immediately ahead of the rear view
mirror. The sensor is able to detect varying
amounts of dirt or water on the outside of the
screen.
Speed-dependant mode
With the lever in position 1, speed-dependant
mode is operable.
If the vehicles speed drops below 8 km/h
(5 mph) with the wipers operating, the wiper
frequency automatically reduces. The wipers
will switch to the next lowest operating speed.
When the vehicles speed increases to over
8 km/h (5 mph), the original wiper speed
setting is restored automatically.
With the wiper switch in position 1, the

variable delay automatically adjusts the
frequency of the wiper operation according to
the information supplied by the rain sensor.
You can increase or decrease the sensitivity of
the rain sensor, and therefore the frequency of
wiper operation, by rotating the delay switcheither clockwise or anticlockwise.
This setting can be configured by a

Speed-dependant-intermittent mode
The frequency of wiper operation in intermittent
mode is also adjusted automatically according
to road speed on those vehicles not equipped
with a rain sensor.
If the sensor detects constant rain, the wipers

will operate continuously.
Auto park
If the starter switch is turned to the Off position
while the wipers are operating, they will
continue to the Park position and stop.
The intermittent period can be adjusted for each

of the dependant modes by rotating the delay
switch either clockwise or anticlockwise.
This setting can be configured by a
120
Wipers & Washers

FRONT WINDSHIELD WASHER
HEADLAMP POWER WASH

If the headlamps are on, and there is sufficient
liquid in the washer reservoir, operating the
screen washer will also power-wash the
headlamps.
The headlamp power wash will operate on
every fifth operation of the screen washer,
provided that the headlamps are still switched
on and 10 minutes have elapsed since the last
headlamp wash.
Switching the headlamps off and back on again
will reset the cycle.
H5498G
Push the wiper stalk button to operate the front

screen washer. If the button is pressed for more
than 0.5 seconds, the washer will continue to
operate while the button is pressed. When the
button is released, the wipers will complete the
current stroke and then complete two further
strokes before parking automatically .
If the vehicle is fitted with the Terrain Response

system, the headlamp wash will operate every
third operation of the screen washer in all
Special Programs (see Terrain Response,
209).
Note: In the screen washer reservoir, if the fluid
level sensor detects a low level, the headlamp
power wash is inhibited.
Heated washer jets
If the ambient temperature falls to a point where
icing of the washer jets could occur, power is
applied to heat the jets provided that the starter
switch is in position II.
If the button is pressed for less than 0.5

seconds, only the washer will operate.
An approved screenwash is necessary to

prevent freezing in very cold weather, see
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 331.
121
Wipers & Washers

REAR WINDOW WIPER
AND WASHER
Tailgate open disable

If the rear wiper is switched on or already
running and the tailgate is opened, the wiper
will:
stop immediately
not start to move if it is already stationary.
If the tailgate is subsequently closed, the wiper

will resume its normal operation after a delay of
three seconds.
If the tailgate is open and the vehicles speed is
above 3km/h (2 mph), the wiper will operate as
if the tailgate were closed.
1
H5499G
Auto park
If the starter switch is turned to the Off position
while the wiper is operating, it will continue to
the Park position and stop.
Wiper - intermittent operation

Pull the lever position 1. The intermittent delay
period will vary according to the delay switch
setting and with the vehicles speed, if
speed-dependant-intermittent mode has been
enabled (see Speed-dependant-intermittent
mode, 120).
Washer
Pull the lever to position 2 and hold it there.
The wiper and washer will both operate. When
the lever is released, the washer will stop and
the wiper will complete a further two wipe
cycles and then return to intermittent operation,
provided that the continuous function has not
been set.
Reverse gear input
If reverse gear is selected while the front wipers
are operating, the rear wiper will operate
accordingly
If reverse gear is selected while the rain
sensor* is operational and the front windshield
wipers are in use, the rear wiper will operate
accordingly.
122
Horn
Horn
HORN
H5500L
To operate, press either of the horn switches.
123
Electric Windows
Electric Windows
ELECTRIC WINDOWS
WARNING
Closing of an electrically operated window on
fingers, hands or any vulnerable part of the
body, can result in serious injury. Always
observe the following precautions:
2
4
5
ISOLATE the rear window switches when

carrying children.
ENSURE that children are kept clear whilst
raising or lowering windows.
1
3
ENSURE that all adult passengers are familiar

with the controls and the potential dangers of
electrically operated windows.
DO NOT allow passengers to extend any part
of their bodies through a window aperture
while the vehicle is moving - injury from
flying debris, branches of trees or other
obstructions could occur.
It is recommended that the starter key be
removed when leaving the vehicle in order to
avoid inadvertent actuation of the power
windows.
H5502L
Operating the windows

The electric windows can be operated when the
starter switch is at position I or II and for up
to 40 seconds after the starter switch is turned
to position 0 (provided a front door is not
opened).
Switch operation
1. Right-hand front window.
2. Left-hand front window.
3. Right-hand rear window.
4. Left-hand rear window.
If a front door is opened, the windows become

inoperable.
5. Isolating switch for rear door window

switches.
Press lightly and hold the top of a switch to

lower the window and lift lightly and hold the
top of a switch to raise the window. The window
will stop moving as soon as the switch is
released.
124
Electric Windows
One touch operation (drivers door only)
By pressing firmly (and then releasing) the
switch, a window will open or close fully at a
single touch. Window movement can be
stopped at any time by BRIEFLY pressing the
switch again.
Rear window isolation switch
To stop window movement during a

one-touch open or close operation, operate
the switch in the opposite direction to which the
window is travelling.
Resetting One touch operation
Disconnecting the power when the window is
moving will cause memory loss. To reset the
memory, drive the window to the top and keep
the switch pressed for one second.
H5505L
Press the right-hand side of the switch to

isolate the window switches in the rear doors;
press the left-hand side to restore independent
control.
125
Electric Windows
Anti-trap mechanism (drivers door only)
If the anti-trap sensor detects an obstruction
during window closing, the closing operation is
interrupted and the window backs off.
Rear window operation
This is a safety feature designed to help prevent

inadvertent closing of a window on vulnerable
parts of the body or other obstructions.
Remove any obstruction and then close the
window.
If, for any reason, it is required to override the
anti-trap mechanism, the following procedure
should be used:
After the initial attempt to close the

window, attempt it twice more with less
than 10 seconds between switch presses.
On the next (fourth) attempt, the window

will move up a short distance with
increased force to override the blockage.
If this fails to remove the blockage, the anti-trap

feature will be lost and must be reset.
Resetting Anti-trap operation
Drive the window to the top and keep the switch
pressed for more then one second. Then drive
the window to the bottom and keep the switch
pressed for more than one second.
H5504G
The rear windows can also be operated from

the switches on the rear passenger doors. The
rear door window switches will not operate if
the isolating switch in the drivers door has
been activated, see Rear window isolation
switch, 125.
126
Sunroof
Sunroof
SUNROOF OPERATION
To close the roof: From the open position,

press the front of the switch momentarily.
This will return the roof to the tilted
position. If the starter key is not in position
ll, the switch will have to be held pressed.
From the tilted position, press the front of
the switch and hold it. The roof will fully
close. Releasing the switch before the roof
is fully closed will stop the movement.
Note: At any time while the sunroof is moving,

a further press of the switch will stop the
movement.
Caution: ALWAYS close the roof when the
vehicle is unattended.
Anti-trap mechanism
If the roof encounters resistance while
travelling anywhere between the fully open and
the tilted positions, the closing operation is
interrupted and the roof opens slightly. This is
a safety feature designed to prevent inadvertent
closing of the roof on vulnerable parts of the
body or other obstructions. Remove any
obstruction and then close the roof.
H5507L
This anti-trap feature does not apply while the

roof is closing from the tilted position.
The electric sunroof can be operated when the

starter switch is at position 1 or II and for 40
seconds after position 0 has been selected,
provided that neither front door has been
opened.
WARNING
It is possible to override the anti-trap
mechanism by pressing and holding the front
of the switch whilst the roof is closing.
To tilt the roof: With the roof closed or

partially tilted open, press the rear of the
switch momentarily. The roof will move to
its fully tilted position. If the starter key is
not in position ll, the switch will have to be
held pressed.
Extreme care must be taken to ensure that

none of the vehicles occupants have any part
of their body in a position where it can be
trapped by the roof.
The override allows the roof to be closed
when movement is restricted by ice or dirt.
To open the roof: With the roof in the tilted

position, press the rear of the switch once
more momentarily. If the starter key is not
in position ll, the switch will have to be
held pressed.
127
Sunroof
Front sunroof blind
WARNING
Accidental closure of a sunroof on fingers,
hands or any vulnerable part of the body, can
result in serious personal injury. Always
observe the following precautions:
ENSURE that children are kept clear and that
the sunroof is not obstructed when opening or
closing.
ENSURE that all adult passengers are familiar
with the controls and the potential dangers of
operating an electrically operated sunroof.
DO NOT allow passengers to extend any part
of their bodies through the sunroof aperture
while the vehicle is moving - injury from
flying debris, branches of trees or other
obstructions could occur.
H5509L
Pull the sunroof blind, against spring pressure,

across the sunroof aperture to deploy it. When
it is pressed against the front edge of the
aperture, it will lock into place.
Operation after power supply interruption

Under certain unusual, the roof may lose its
calibration which will render it inoperable. If
this happens, it needs to be recalibrated as
follows:
WIth the power supply reconnected, turn

the ignition switch to position ll.
Depress the front of the switch for 20

seconds. The sunroof will start to move.
Continue to hold the switch until the
sunroof completes one full open and
closing cycle. When the roof stops moving,
release the switch.
To open it, push vertically on the textured part

of the blind handle. Allow the blind to return
under spring pressure.
Rear sunroof blinds
The sunroof can then be operated as normal.

Note: Calibration will not function if the battery
voltage is low.
H5511G
The rear sunroof blinds operate in the same

way as the front one.
The blinds retract into the center roof panel
between them.
128

TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
12
12
11
10
9
H5513N
OPERATION OF CONTROLS
In this case, the appropriate indicator in the

AUTO switch extinguishes. The circular
indicator represents the blower, the rectangular
indicator represents air distribution.
1. Auto mode
Allowing the system to function automatically is
by far the simplest method of operation for the
owner and is preferable in most operating
conditions.
Press AUTO (1) for fully automatic

operation.
Rotate the temperature controls (3) to

select the required temperature.
Let the automatic temperature control

system do the rest.
Press AUTO again to re-establish automatic

operation.
Note: If the air distribution and blower controls
are operated independently, the system may
not be able to achieve or maintain the required
temperature settings.
2. Blower control
Rotate the blower control (2) to adjust airflow
through the vents.
In Auto mode, air conditioning, air distribution,

blower speeds and air recirculation are adjusted
automatically to achieve, and then maintain, a
thermal environment consistent with prevailing
conditions.
The air distribution and blower controls can be
operated independently to override the
automatic setting.
129

3. Temperature controls
Rotate the controls (3) to set the required
temperature for the corresponding side of the
passenger compartment.
5. Air recirculation - manual

Press the button (5) once to
activate air recirculation. Press the
button a second time to deactivate
air recirculation.
Temperatures within the range 16C (60F) to

28C (83F) can be set. The blue dot gives
maximum cooling and the red dot maximum
heating (depending on prevailing conditions).
Air recirculation prohibits the entry of air from

outside the vehicle, recirculating the air inside
the vehicle instead. This is useful to prevent the
entry of traffic fumes.
Note: Because of the mixing of air within the

vehicle, the system will not achieve a
temperature differential from left to right of
more than 4C (7F).
Air recirculation also significantly influences

the dehumidifying and cooling performance of
the air-conditioning system.
To obtain maximum air conditioning, rotate the

temperature controls fully anticlockwise.
Note: Prolonged recirculation at low ambient

temperatures may cause the windows to mist.
This mode automatically activates the air

conditioning and air recirculation, and sets the
blower speed at maximum and the air
distribution to the face-level vents.
6. Off
Press to switch the system off; the
indicator in the switch will
illuminate to show this condition.
Pressing the button again returns the system to
its previous mode.
Note: Rotating the temperature controls fully

clockwise provides maximum heating to the
foot/screen vents.
7. Economy mode
With the engine running, press the
button (7) to put the air
conditioning system into
Economy mode. This reduces the power
consumed by the system.
When in stationary traffic, select P or N in an

automatic transmission vehicle to maximise air
conditioning efficiency.
4. Air distribution control
Press to select the desired distribution setting:
Windshield and side window vents
Face level vents
Foot level vents
More than one setting can be selected to

achieve the desired distribution.
130

8. Rear environment*
The rear supplementary
heating/cooling unit is located
behind the left-hand-side rear
quarter panel and provides
supplementary heating and air conditioning to
the rear passengers. Do not obstruct the
louvres on the side of the quarter panel.
11. Defrost mode

If the windshield is misting or
covered in ice, press button (11)
to activate the automatic defrost
programme; the system will immediately direct
its output to achieve maximum screen clearing
by:
Automatic: Pressing the button once activates

automatic mimic mode in which the comfort
level of the rear passengers is controlled by the
front system.
setting the blower speed to an appropriate

level.
distributing air flow to the screen only.
deactivating air recirculation (in certain

circumstances).
The upper amber light will be illuminated.
In addition, the rear and front* screen heaters

will be switched on (or their timed operating
cycle will recommence if they are already
switched on).
Manual: Press the button a second time to pass

control to the rear passengers via a secondary
control panel (see REAR PASSENGER
CONTROLS*, 134).
Press the button a second time (or select

AUTO or any air distribution control) to leave
the Defrost mode. Heated screens will remain
on until their time-out period has expired.
The lower amber light will be illuminated.

Off: Pressing the button a third time switches
the feature off.
12. Front seat heaters*

Press the left or right button once
to operate the relevant seat heater
at a high level, press twice to heat
the seat at a lower level. For further information
concerning the operation of both front and rear
seat heaters, please refer to SEAT HEATERS,
133.
9. Heated rear screen

Press to operate.
Note: Heated front and rear screen
functions are only available while
engine is running.
Caution: DO NOT stick labels over the heating
elements on the rear screen, and DO NOT
scrape or use abrasive materials to clean the
inside of the rear screen.
Note: If the vehicle is not fitted with front seat

heaters, these buttons will be blank.
10. Heated windshield*

Press to operate. If the vehicle is
not fitted with a heated
windshield, this button will be
blank.
131

General Notes
For optimum operating efficiency, ensure

all the air vents (including those in the rear
of the vehicle) are open.
For the automatic temperature control

system to function efficiently, all windows
(and the sunroof) should be closed, and the
air intake vents free from ice, snow, leaves
or other debris.
In very humid conditions, slight screen

misting may be experienced when the air
conditioning system is turned on. This is a
natural occurrence on most automotive air
conditioning systems. It is not a fault and
misting will clear after a few seconds once
the air conditioning system is operating.
The air conditioning compressor will not

function unless the engine is running.
Surplus water produced by the

dehumidifying process is expelled from the
system via drain tubes beneath the vehicle.
This may result in a small pool of water
forming on the road when the vehicle is
stationary and is not a cause for concern.
132

SEAT HEATERS
With the starter switch turned on, the seat

cushion and seat back can be heated at two
different levels.
Press once to operate at a high level (both

indicators illuminate).
After a period based on cabin temperature,
the high level will end and one light will
extinguish.
Press twice to heat the seats at a lower level

(right-hand indicator extinguishes).
Press the switch a third time to turn off the

heater manually (both indicators will
extinguish).
The seat heaters are thermostatically controlled

and will operate to maintain a factory-set
temperature. The indicators in the switches will
remain illuminated until the heaters are
manually turned off, the high level has timed
out, or the engine is turned off.
H5739N
Front seat heaters
Caution: The seat heaters consume

considerable power from the battery. For this
reason, they should ONLY be operated while
the engine is running.
H5517G
Rear seat heaters
133

REAR PASSENGER CONTROLS*
H5518G
1. Temperature control. As the knob is turned

to fully clockwise (red dot) the temperature
of the incoming air will increase.
2. Distribution control. With the knob turned
fully anticlockwise, incoming air will be
directed to the lower outlet on the left-hand
trim panel for third row seats*; fully
clockwise will direct air to the passengers
faces.
3. Blower control. As the knob is turned to
clockwise, the speed of the air blower
increases.
Note: The panel is only active when the Rear
Environment button on the front control panel
is set to Manual mode.
The graphics will be back-lit when the panel is
active (visibility dependent upon background
light levels).
134

VENTILATION
H5519L
The ventilation system provides fresh,

conditioned and/or heated air to the interior of
the vehicle from the air intake grille in front of
the windshield.
Combined Filter*
Vehicles fitted with automatic temperature
control have a combined carbon and particulate
air filter.
Note: Always keep the air intake grille clear of

obstructions such as leaves, snow or ice.
The carbon layer reduces the level of odours

coming through the heater system from
outside.
Air outlets are provided to the windshield, face,

lap (driver only) and feet - the location of these
vents is shown in the illustration above. The
temperature of the air supplied to the vents is
controlled by the heater.
135

Air Vents
Air temperature from all vents is controlled by
the temperature settings of the heater.
Drivers Lap Vent
Face level vents
H5521G
Direct the air flow by moving the control in the

center of the louvres. Rotate the thumbwheel
towards the right to fully open, or the left to fully
close the vents.
H5522L
Airflow can be directed to the drivers lap via an

outlet located below the steering wheel. Control
the airflow by adjusting the louvres.
To ensure best ventilation and minimum noise,

the vents should be fully open when the air
distribution control is set to face level.
136

Rear upper vent controls*
Second row of seats only.
Center console rear vent controls
H5525G
Press the ridged portion of the louvres to open

and adjust the direction and volume of air.
H5920G
Rotate the louvres to direct the air flow.
Move the louvres to adjust the direction and

volume of airflow. Rotate the bezel to direct the
air flow.
Note: The temperature cannot be set by the rear
occupants.
137

Rear pillar vent controls*
Third row of seats only
Third row seats vent*
H5527G
H5526G
A fixed louvre outlet on the left-hand side rear

quarter panel provides airflow to the lower
third-row seat area.
Direct the airflow by moving the control in the

center of the louvres.
138
Interior Equipment
Interior Equipment
INTERIOR LAMPS
Automatic activation
All of the courtesy lighting comes on when:
The vehicles interior lighting falls into two

categories:
Courtesy lighting consists of approach

lamps*, dome lamps, footwell lamps,
puddle lamps, ignition glow ring and
loadspace lamps. They enable safe entry
into, or exit from, the vehicle in low light
conditions without the need to switch on
individual lamps.
The position of the starter switch is

changed to 0 from I or II.
Any door, including the upper tailgate is

ajar.
The vehicle receives an unlock signal.
Row 1 dome lamp button is pressed.
The courtesy lamp feature automatically turns

off these lamps if:
Demand lighting consists of interior lamps,

dome lamps, map lamps, glovebox and
vanity mirror lamps. They offer lighting at
the touch of a switch, usually part of the
lamp fitting.
60 seconds (customer adjustable) have

elapsed since the courtesy lamps were
activated.
Courtesy lighting
Front footwell lamps*
60 seconds (customer adjustable) have

elapsed since the last door was closed.
These illuminate the front footwell areas of the

vehicle.
the starter switch is switched to II with all

doors closed.
the last door is closed after the car is

externally locked.
Puddle lamps*
A battery-saving feature turns off all interior

lamps 15 minutes after the starter switch has
been turned from II or I to 0. This timing
feature will be restarted if any of the automatic
switch-on criteria occur.
These are located in the bottom edge of the

doors and illuminate the ground close to the
doors when the doors are opened.
Ignition glow ring
This surrounds and illuminates the starter key
slot.
Collision illumination
In the event of a collision occurring at a speed
of less than 5 km/h (3 mph), all of the courtesy
lamps (except approach lamps) will be turned
on.
Loadspace lamp
These illuminate the rear loadspace area during
entry to and exit from the vehicle, also when the
tailgate is opened.
139
Interior Equipment
Interior lamps
H5529G
H5528G
The front interior lamps are grouped together

centrally above the front windshield.
The rear interior lamps are grouped together in

the roof above the second row of seats. This
fitment may include the rear air conditioning
controls*.
All of these lamps are switched on by pressing
the switch adjacent to the lamp required.
It is possible to deactivate automatic operation
of all of the courtesy lamps by pressing the
front centre switch. The message INTERIOR
LIGHTS OFF will flash in the Message Center*.
To switch the lamps off without disabling
automatic mode, briefly press the centre
switch.
To enable automatic mode press the front
centre switch for more than three seconds. The
message INTERIOR LIGHTS AUTOMATIC will
flash in the message centre*.
140
Interior Equipment
Low-level Night-time Illumination*
With the main lighting switch turned to
sidelamps or headlamps, LEDs in the front
interior lamp provides very low level
illumination. The level of illumination can be
adjusted using the instrument pack illumination
dimmer switch.
Dome lamps
The dome lamps (center) are both courtesy and
demand lamps. Pressing the front dome lamp
switch brings on both front and rear dome
lamps, regardless of starter switch position.
Map lamp operation
Press the required map lamp switch (outer
lamps) to turn on and off.
Low level lighting provides very limited

illumination for the interior of the vehicle, whilst
the vehicle is being driven, without affecting the
drivers night vision.
Glovebox lamp
Illuminates automatically whenever the
glovebox is opened and extinguishes when the
glovebox is closed.
Vanity mirror lamps*
The vanity mirror lamps are turned on when the
corresponding vanity mirror cover is opened
and turned off when it is closed.
H5530G
Pivot the sun visor downward and raise the

cover on the vanity mirror to illuminate the
mirror. Close the cover to extinguish the lamps.
Note: Map lamps, glovebox lamps and vanity
mirror lamps will extinguish automatically after
15 minutes to prevent battery drain provided
that the starter switch is in position 0 and the
key has been removed.
141
Interior Equipment
CLOCK
To adjust the time:
Setting the time - Standard audio
1. Switch on the radio and press the MENU

button.
2. Rotate the rotary control clockwise until the
word Clock appears. Press the control.
3. Rotate the control to reveal Set and press

the control again.
4. After selecting Set the display shops the
hour setting. Rotate the control to change
the hour setting, or press it to accept it.
2
TA
Clock
5. The display then shows the minute setting.

Rotate the control to change the minute
setting, or press it to accept it.
ON
The display then highlights OK. Press to

accept this.
Note: The clock will remain illuminated for ten
minutes after the starter key is turned to
position 0.
3
Clock
Cancel
Set
4
Clock
Set
PM
06 : 15
OK
5
Clock
Set
AM
09 : 43
OK
H5531G
142
Interior Equipment
Setting the time - Premium audio
To adjust the time:
1. Switch on the radio and press the MENU

button.
2. Rotate the rotary control clockwise until the
word Clock appears. Press the control
again.
3. Rotate the control and then press it to
select the 12 or 24 hour scale or to Set the
time.
2
News
Clock
1
4. After selecting Set the display shops the

hour setting. Rotate the control to change
the hour setting, or press it to accept it.
12
Time
12/24
1
5. The display then shows the minute setting.

Rotate the control to change the minute
setting, or press it to accept it.
24
Note: The clock will remain illuminated for ten

minutes after the starter key is turned to
position 0.
12
5
09
Time
Set
1
AM
4
09
32
Time
Set
1
AM
4
09 32
H5800G
143
Interior Equipment
Ashtrays*
Push the bottom edge of the ashtray cover to
open (lower left inset).
SMOKERS EQUIPMENT
Cigar Lighter*
To remove the ashtray, open fully, then pull the

ashtray forwards.
WARNING
DO NOT use the ashtrays for disposing of
waste paper or other combustible items.
H5533L
Push the center of the faceplate and it will lower

to reveal the lighter.
With the starter switch turned on, press the
lighter in to heat up. When it has reached the
correct temperature it will partially eject and
can then be withdrawn for use.
ONLY hold the cigar lighter by the handle.
DO NOT plug accessories into the cigar

lighter socket. Use the accessory sockets
provided.
After use, push the lighter back in to the first

position and lift up the faceplate.
144
Interior Equipment
AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS
Rear auxiliary power sockets
Front auxiliary power socket
H5535L
An auxiliary power socket is mounted in the

front console.
H5537G
Another power socket is located on the rear

face of the cubby box.
Pull down the hinged cover to access the

socket. When released, the cover will return to
its closed position.
145
Interior Equipment
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
The driver should not drink and should not use
the cup holder while driving.
If the cup holder is retractable, it should be
kept closed when not in use.
Do not carry open-top drink containers in the
cup holders while the vehicle is in motion; a
spilled hot drink could cause personal injury.
Spilled drinks can also damage upholstery,
carpeting and electrical components.
Use only for soft containers. DO NOT use to
hold cups made of glass, china or hard
plastic, as these may cause injury in the event
of an accident or emergency manoeuver.
Unopened, sealed containers (drinks cans,
for example) are hard objects and may also
cause injury.
Front seat cup holders*
H5538G
On 7-seat vehicles, a third power socket is fitted

in the left-hand-side trim in the loadspace area.
Using a power socket
The power sockets can be used to power Land
Rover approved accessories that use a
maximum of 180 Watts.
WARNING
NEVER plug non-approved accessories into a
power socket - damage to the vehicle's
electrical systems could occur and could
result in a fire.
H5539L
Caution: Always run the engine during

prolonged use of electrical accessories,
otherwise the battery may become
discharged.
The inner core of the front passengers cup

holder can be lifted out for cleaning or to make
a holder for a larger drinks container.
146
Interior Equipment
Front passengers cup holder*
Second-row seats cup holders
H5928L
Push in the cup holder and allow it to spring

out. Push again to close it.
H5543G
The cup holders for the occupants of the

second-row seats are in the center console. Pull
out the tray to gain access to the cup holders.
Press in again to close.
The inner cores of the cup holders can be lifted
out for cleaning or to make a holder for a larger
drinks container.
147
Interior Equipment
Door holders
Rear compartment cup holders
H5547G
H5545L
WARNING
Do not carry any open-top drinks containers in
the cup/bottle holders whilst the vehicle is in
motion; a spilled hot drink could cause
personal injury. Spilled drinks can also
damage upholstery, carpeting and electrical
components.
Use only for soft containers. DO NOT use to
hold cups or bottles made of glass, china, or
hard plastic, as these may cause injury in the
event of an accident or emergency
manoeuvre. Unopened, sealed containers
(drinks cans, for example) are hard objects
and may also cause injury.
148
Interior Equipment
REAR STORAGE BINS
H5548G
In the side panels of the loadspace are storage

bins.
Press the catch and lift the lid for access.
WARNING
DO NOT wedge the lid in an open position as
this may restrict the deployment of the rear
airbags.
149
Interior Equipment
CUBBY BOX
CD storage
H5549G
Lift the catch at the front of the cubby box lid to

access the main cubby box.
Card Holder
H5921G
A rubber mat in the bottom of the cubby box is

designed to hold CD cases and is removable for
cleaning.
H5551G
A clip is provided on the front inside face of the

cubby box to hold a credit/toll card.
150
Interior Equipment
COOL BOX*
The tray on top of the cool box should always

be in place to ensure maximum cooling
performance. This tray can be inverted to allow
for the storage of taller containers while still
maintaining the sealing.
When fitted, the cool box replaces the cubby

box.
The cool box is switched on/off using the
switch on the inside front lip of the cool box.
This switch has a built-in indicator which will
illuminate to show that the cool box is
operating.
The tray can be clipped onto the inside of the

main lid when not required.
The cool box is most effective when filled with
cold or pre-chilled items.
If the indicator does not illuminate when the

cool box is switched on, or it goes out while the
cool box is operating, this means that the
battery voltage is low and the cool box has
switched itself off. This will only happen when
the engine is not running.
The cool box must be cleaned regularly to

remove any condensation or contamination
that could lead to odours.
If the engine is started, the indicator will

illuminate and the cool box will continue to
operate.
The cool box should be left switched off when it
is not needed to protect the vehicles battery.
H5553G
H5552G
151
Interior Equipment
SUN VISOR
TICKET HOLDER
H5554L
Pivot the sun visor downward to reduce sun

glare through the front windshield. If required,
the visor can then be pivoted towards the side
window to reduce sun glare from that side of
the vehicle.
Vanity Mirror*
Lifting the cover of the vanity mirror switches
on the lamp; closing the cover switches off the
lamp.
H5556L
At the lower edge of each side of the windshield

is a clip to retain a car park stub.
152
Interior Equipment
Manual rear-view mirror*
REAR-VIEW MIRRORS
Auto-dip rear-view mirror*
H5560L
H5558L
Adjust the mirror manually to suit.
On some models, the vehicle is equipped with

an electrochromatic dimming function that
dims the mirrors to reduce glare from the
headlamps of following vehicles at night.
Moving the lever at the bottom of the mirror

forwards or backwards changes the mirrors
position to and from dimmed.
This function does not operate when reverse

gear has been selected.
153
Interior Equipment
CD storage*
GLOVEBOX
H5922L
If the cool box option is fitted the glovebox is

fitted with a storage rack for CD cases.
H5565L
The rack can be removed by pressing down the

lock tab, and pulling the rack out of the glove
box.
Lift the release catch (arrowed in top inset) to

open the upper glovebox. The lid will naturally
be returned by a spring to its closed position. It
should be pushed fully closed.
Pull the release catch (arrowed in bottom inset)
to open the lower glovebox. Close the lid by
pushing it until it clicks.
154
Interior Equipment
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS
REAR LOADSPACE ACCESS

HATCH
H5569G
Four fixing points are provided in the rear

loadspace floor, to assist in safely securing
large items of luggage. Land Rover provide a
range of approved luggage retention
accessories.
H5570G
There are access hatches on both sides of the

rear loadspace. On seven-seater models the
right-hand side hatch gives access to the toolkit
and the left-hand hatch gives access to the tow
bar*.
WARNING
DO NOT carry unsecured equipment, tools or
luggage, which could move and cause
personal injury in the event of an accident or
emergency manoeuver either on or off-road.
Pull down the catch (upper inset) and pull the

hatch away from the side of the vehicle.
When refitting the hatch, ensure that it is
securely and correctly fitted before driving.
155
Loadspace Cover
Loadspace Cover
LOADSPACE COVER
To operate the loadspace cover

1. Pull the rigid portion of the blind to unroll
the cover.
Caution: When retracting the cover ensure
that nothing is left on top. If any items are
left on top, including paper or fabrics,
they may be drawn into the mechanism
and cause it to jam.
2. Engage the end pieces into the recessed
features moulded into the loadspace sides.
Caution: If the cover is damaged in any way it
should not be used as the damaged area
may prevent the cover from operating
correctly.
H5903G
The loadspace cover is a tray unit with a

roller-blind type of cover which can be
extended to cover the rear loadspace.
The loadspace cover cartridge can be placed at
either end of the loadspace. The foremost fitting
is close behind the second row of seats; the
rearmost is behind where the third row of seats
are in a seven-seat vehicle.
156
Loadspace Cover
To remove the deployed loadspace cover
H5904G
1. Disengage the ends from the recess and

fully retract the cover into the tray unit.
2. Fold the rigid portion of the blind back
under the unit and press until the edge
engages and is retained.
H5907G
3. Pull up the paddle at the right-hand end of

the cartridge; this disengages the locking
bolt. Lift the right-hand end of the unit and
pull it a way from the opposite loadspace
side.
It is easier to do this if the second row seat
backs have been tipped forward.
4. Installation of the cartridge is the reverse of
the removal procedure above.
157
Loadspace Cover
WARNING
When fitting the cartridge in position ensure
that the paddle returns to the flush
(horizontal) position. Failure to do so may
allow the cartridge to move when the vehicle
is in motion.
5-seat vehicle
When the loadspace cover is removed, it must
be stored away from the vehicle.
WARNING
DO NOT store the loadspace cover loose in the
vehicle.
7-seat vehicle
When fitted into the rearmost position in the
loadspace sides, the third row seats must be
deployed.
H5574G
This is done by lowering the unit into the gap

between the rows of seats and engaging the
units receivers onto the studs protruding from
the outboard portions of the outboard
second-row seat-backs.
WARNING
Never fit the loadspace cover behind the
second row of seats if the third row is to be
occupied. Access to and from the third row
seats will be severely hampered.
WARNING
Do not attempt to raise the second-row seats
into the upright position, or tip them forward
for third-row access, while the loadspace
cover is in this stowed position as damage
will occur.
If the loadspace cover is removed from a 7-seat

vehicle in order to maximise the loadspace area
by folding down both second and third rows of
seats, the unit can be stowed in the gap
between the folded-flat second and third row
seats.
Remove the stowed unit before moving the

seats.
DO NOT carry loose items of luggage on top of
the loadspace cover - these may damage the
cover or obscure vision, and could become
dangerous projectiles in the event of a sudden
stop or collision.
All equipment, luggage or tools carried in the
loadspace should be secured to minimise the
risk of injury to the driver and passengers in
the event of an accident or emergency
manoeuver.
158
Audio System
Audio System
RADIO ANTENNA
1. Audio Mode switch

Press to change audio modes (radio to CD for
example).
The antenna is etched onto the surface of the

glass of the left-hand rear side window.
No maintenance is possible; however it is
important to ensure that the interior surface of
the glass is protected from possible damage
caused by contact with hard objects or from the
injurious effects of abrasive cleaners.
2. Volume increase control

Press to increase volume.
AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLS*
4. Search forward/ track select control

Press to change to the next radio station on the
waveband.
3. Volume decrease control

Press to decrease volume.
During CD play, press the control to move

forward to the next track. Operate the control
repeatedly to move forward through several
tracks at a time.
5. Search backward/track select control

Press to change to the previous radio station on
the selected waveband.
2
3
During CD play, press the control to move

backward to the beginning of the current track
on the disc. Operate the control repeatedly to
move backwards through several tracks at a
time.
4
5
H5575L
159
Audio System
PASSENGER CONTROLS
Audio system controls are available to the
passengers.
2
2
7
1
3
H5578G
Third-row-seat passenger controls
1. Headphone jack
H5577G
2. Repeat
Second-row-seat passenger controls
3. Mode
4. Seek down
5. Seek up
6. Volume down
7. Volume up
160
In-Car Telephones
In-Car Telephones
IN-CAR TELEPHONES
For your safety, always note the following
precautions before fitting an in-car telephone,
or any mobile communication equipment.
Only use an installation kit incorporating an

aerial external to the vehicle.
Ensure that the installation is carried out by

a competent installer and that the installer
is aware of the Airbag SRS System.
For your safety
WARNING
Using any hand-held appliance while driving
can be dangerous. Always stop the vehicle
before making a call and ensure that the
telephone is switched off while you are
driving.
161
Voice Recognition
Voice Recognition
VOICE RECOGNITION*
Activating the system
Voice control provides a safe and convenient

way of operating the audio system without the
need to operate the controls manually. This
enables you to concentrate fully on driving the
vehicle, and removes the need to divert your
attention from the road ahead in order to
change settings, or receive feedback from the
system.
A number of voice commands are available, and
with a little experience you will find them easy
and convenient to use. Whenever you issue one
of the defined commands with the system
active, the voice control system converts your
command into a control signal for the audio
system. Your inputs take the form of dialogues
or commands. You are guided through these
dialogues by announcements or questions.
H5786R
To activate voice control:
Briefly pull the control paddle (your Audio

will mute at this point). A brief acoustic
signal will be heard, and LISTENING will
be displayed on the main message centre
to indicate that the system is now waiting
for a voice command.
Note: It is only necessary to use the steering

wheel voice control paddle at the beginning of
each voice session.
162
Voice Recognition
Defined voice commands

The voice control system understands
predefined commands which need to be quoted
word for word.
Please refer to the Navigation, TV &

Telephone Handbook for full operating
instructions.
An audio feedback of voice commands is

available. To activate the feedback, pull the
voice control paddle briefly and give one of the
following commands:
Using Notepad
Notepad is a feature for recording short
messages as memory aids or reminders.
General commands
Voice help To list all commands.
Notepad Help To list Notepad commands.
You can record up to 10 notes for up to 30

seconds each in length.
Pull the voice paddle towards the steering
wheel, wait for LISTENING to appear in the
message centre, then give the Notepad
command.
Audio commands
Radio help To list Radio commands.
CD help To list CD commands.
The voice recording will automatically be

stopped if the note is longer than 30 seconds.
To stop voice recording at any time, pull the
voice button towards the steering wheel.
Please refer to the Audio System Handbook

for full operating instructions.
Navigation & Telephone commands
The following table gives the commands to be
Phone help To list telephone commands.
Command
Record note or Notepad
record.
Navigation help To list Navigation

commands.
System response
The system gives a beep to
indicate the start of recording.
Play notepad or Read notepad. Notepad audio will read out

each note in turn. You can say
Replay, Delete or Cancel after
each beep, or remain silent to
hear the next note.
Clear Notepad or Notepad
delete.
Do you want to clear the

notepad?
Notepad help.
The system will read out

Notepad information and all
the commonly used
commands.
163
Action
You may start your recording
after the beep. To stop
recording, pull and hold in the
steering wheel voice paddle.
Saying Replay will replay the
previous message.
Saying Delete will delete the
previous message.
Saying Cancel will end the
Notepad session.
Say YES to delete all stored
notes. Say NO to cancel the
command.
Land Rover Homelink

Land Rover Homelink
HOMELINK TRANSMITTER
The Land Rover HomeLink Universal
Transmitter is built into the underside of the
rear view mirror and provides a convenient way
to replace up to three hand-held transmitters
with a single built-in device. This innovative
feature will learn the radio frequency codes of
most current transmitters to operate garage
doors and gates. With the available accessory
package, the HomeLink Transmitter can also
control home or office lighting and security
systems. For reliability, the HomeLink
Transmitter is powered by your vehicles
battery and charging system.
Precautions
When programming your HomeLink
Transmitter, you will be operating the garage
door or gate. Be sure that people and objects
are out of the way, to prevent potential harm or
damage.
2 3
H5842N
WARNING
HomeLink
Do not use this

Transmitter with
any garage door that lacks safety stop and
reverse features, as required by federal
safety standard (this includes any garage or
door opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which
cannot detect an object in the path of a
closing door and then automatically stop
and reverse the door, does not meet current
federal safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases the
risk of serious injury or death. For more
information on this matter, call toll-free:
1-800-355-3515 or consult
www.homelink.com.
1. Channel 1 button
2. Channel 2 button
3. Status indicator light
Red - transmitter
Green - auto dimming
4. Channel 3 button
5. Dimming on button
6. Dimming off button
164
5 6
Land Rover Homelink

Programming
If after repeated attempts you do not

successfully program the HomeLink
Transmitter to learn the signal of the hand-held
transmitter, call toll-free for customer
assistance: 1-800-355-3515 or consult
www.homelink.com.
1. Turn the starter switch to position ll.

2. If you have previously programmed your
HomeLink Transmitter, proceed to step 3.
Otherwise, hold down the two outside
buttons (1) and (4) on the HomeLink
Transmitter until the red light (3) begins to
flash (approximately 20 seconds). Release
both buttons.
Operating the Land Rover HomeLink

Transmitter
Once it is programmed, the HomeLink
Transmitter can be used in place of your
hand-held transmitter(s). To operate, simply
press the appropriate button on the HomeLink
Transmitter. The red light (3) comes on while
the signal is being transmitted.
This initializes the HomeLink Transmitter

and erases previous settings from all three
channels.
DO NOT perform this step when
programming additional hand-held
transmitters.
NOTE: If your hand-held transmitter appears to

program the HomeLink Transmitter, but does
not open your garage door and, if your garage
door was manufactured after 1995, your garage
door opener may have a code protected or
rolling code feature.
3. Decide which one of the three channels you

want to program.
4. Hold the signal-emitting end of your
hand-held transmitter 5 - 14 cm (1 - 3 in.)
away from the HomeLink Transmitter
buttons so that you can still see the red
status indicator light (4).
A rolling code type of system will change the

code of your garage door opener every time
you open or close your garage door.
5. With one hand, push the hand-held

transmitter button, and with the other, the
desired button on the HomeLink
Transmitter. Continue to press both
buttons through step 6.
To determine if you have one of these systems,

depress the button on your HomeLink
Transmitter that you programmed. If the red
light on the HomeLink Transmitter flashes
rapidly for 1-2 seconds, then lights
continuously, your garage door opener has a
rolling code system.
6. Hold down both buttons until you see the

red light on the Land Rover HomeLink
Transmitter flash, first slowly and then
rapidly. (This could take up to a minute). It
indicates that you have successfully
programmed the HomeLink Transmitter
to learn the new frequency signal. Release
both buttons once the rapid flashing
begins.
7. Turn the starter switch to position 0.
165
Land Rover Homelink

Training a garage door opener equipped with
rolling codes
To train your rolling code garage door opener
to operate from your HomeLink Transmitter,
follow these steps:
e) Your garage door opener should now

recognize your HomeLink Transmitter. If
not, repeat the procedure but in step d)
press and release the transmitter button
three times. You may use either your
HomeLink Transmitter or your original
hand-held transmitter to open your garage
door.
1. Program your hand-held transmitter to the

HomeLink Transmitter by following the
procedures outlined previously (if you have
already completed this programming,
proceed to the next instruction).
If after following these suggestions you still

have difficulties programming your HomeLink
Transmitter, call toll-free for customer
assistance: 1-800-355-3515 or consult
www.homelink.com.
2. Train your garage door opener receiver to

recognize your HomeLink Transmitter:
(your garage door opener receiver will
learn to recognize the HomeLink
Transmitter by following the same process
used to train the hand-held transmitter)
Erasing channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold
down the two outside buttons (1) and (3) until
the red light begins to flash, then release both
buttons. Individual channels cannot be erased,
but can be reprogrammed using the procedures
for programming the HomeLink Transmitter
(steps 3 through 6).
a) Remove the cover panel from your

garage door opener receiver (the receiver
should be located by the garage door
motor).
b) Locate the training button on the garage
door opener receiver. The exact location
and color of the button may vary by garage
door opener brand. If you have difficulty
locating the training button, reference your
garage door opener manual, call
1-800-355-3515 or consult
www.homelink.com.
c) Press the training button on the garage
door opener receiver for 1-2 seconds, then
perform the next step within 30 seconds.
d) Return to the HomeLink Transmitter in
the vehicle and depress the programmed
button twice. Depress the button to
confirm that the HomeLink Transmitter
has been trained to the receiver.
166
Land Rover Homelink

Accessories
Accessories for your HomeLink Transmitter
are available from the manufacturer of the
device. If you would like additional information
or would like to purchase other accessories
such as home lighting or security products that
can be operated by the HomeLink
Transmitter, please call the toll-free:
1-800-355-3515 or consult
www.homelink.com.
Reprogramming a single button

To program a device to the HomeLink
Transmitter using a previously trained button:
1. Press and hold the desired button. No NOT
release the button until step 4 has been
completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 5 - 14 cm (1 - 3 in.)
away from the HomeLink Transmitter
surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
button. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, at first slowly and then rapidly.
Auto-dimming
The auto-dimming feature of the interior mirror,
see Auto-dip rear-view mirror*, 153, can be
turned on or off using buttons (5) and (6).
4. When the indicator light begins to flash

rapidly, release both buttons.
Compliance
IC: 4112A-NZLBTPHL
Note: Be sure to retain your original transmitter

for future programming procedures (i.e. new
vehicle purchase).
This device complies with Part 15 FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
When selling your vehicle, be sure to erase all

channels on the HomeLink Transmitter that
you programmed.
HomeLinkis a registered trademark owned by

Johnson Controls, Inc. Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
167
168
Driving & Operating

Starting & Driving
STEERING COLUMN LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . .171
STARTER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
DRIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
FUEL ECONOMY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . .174
Catalytic Converter
CATALYTIC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Fuel Filling
GAS STATION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
FUEL FILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
TYPE OF FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
FUEL FILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
EMPTY FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Park Distance Control

USING PARK DISTANCE
CONTROL (PDC)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Automatic Transmission
USING AN AUTOMATIC GEARBOX . . . . . .182
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . .183
ELECTRONICALLY SELECTED
AUTOMATIC MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Transfer Gearbox
TRANSFER GEARBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
USING THE TRANSFER GEARBOX . . . . . .187
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Cruise Control
CRUISE CONTROL* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
169
Driving & Operating

Brakes
FOOT BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
PARKBRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Dynamic Stability & Traction Control

DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
ELECTRONIC TRACTION
CONTROL (ETC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Hill Descent Control

HILL DESCENT CONTROL* . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Air Suspension
AIR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Terrain Response
TERRAIN RESPONSETM SYSTEM* . . . . . 209
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Towing
TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
TRAILER HITCH* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
TOW BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Towing Eyes
TOWING EYES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Towing the Vehicle

TOWING FOR RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
LASHING EYES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Front Lighting Systems

XENON/HALOGEN LIGHTING* . . . . . . . . . 230
170
Starting & Driving

Driving & Operating
STEERING COLUMN LOCK
Caution: The gear selector MUST be in the P

(park) position, before the starter key can be
removed. If the starter key is left in place, a
continuous battery drain occurs which could
completely discharge the battery.
WARNING
To prevent the loss of steering control, do not
under any circumstances turn the key to the
O position while the vehicle is moving. To
prevent the steering column lock engaging, it
is most important that before the vehicle is
moved in any way, the key be inserted in the
lock and turned to position 1. If, due to an
accident or electrical fault, it is not safe to
turn the key, disconnect the negative lead of
the battery and then turn the key.
STARTER SWITCH
The starter switch uses the following sequence
of key positions to operate the steering lock,
electrical circuits and starter motor:
Position 0
H5579L
The starter switch and steering column lock is

located in the side of the steering column cover.
To unlock the steering column
Insert the key into the starter switch and rotate
key to position l. If the key will not rotate, turn
the steering wheel left or right while rotating the
key.
Steering locked.
Some lighting circuits are operational,

including: sidelamps and hazard warning
lamps.
With the drivers door open, seat memory

facility operational.
Position I
To lock the steering column

Remove the key from the starter switch.
The lock is now set to operate. Rotate the
steering wheel until the lock operates.
Steering unlocked.
Clock, audio system and cigar lighter can

now be operated.
Wipers/washers are operational.
Position II
171
All instruments, warning indicators and

electrical circuits are operational.
Starting & Driving

Position III
Cold climates
In very cold climates the oil pressure warning
light may take several seconds to extinguish.
Similarly, engine cranking times will also
increase. At -25C (-13F) the starter motor
may require continuous operation for as long
as 30 seconds before the engine will start. For
this reason, ensure that all non-essential
electrical equipment is switched off to
maximise the available battery effort for
starting.
The starting sequence is initiated. Note that

operation of position I electrical functions
will be interrupted during engine cranking.
Note: The gear selector position P or N must

be selected before the engine can be started.
STARTING
WARNING
Never start or leave the engine running in an
unventilated building - exhaust gases are
poisonous and contain carbon monoxide,
which can cause unconsciousness and may
even be fatal.
After starting
Ensure that the parkbrake AND FOOTBRAKE are
firmly applied and the accelerator pedal is not
depressed while moving the gear selector lever
from N or P. An interlock will prevent this
movement if the footbrake is not applied.
Before starting the engine and driving, ENSURE

that you are familiar with the precautions
shown under CATALYTIC CONVERTER, 175.
In particular, you should be aware that if the
engine fails to start, continued use of the starter
may result in unburnt fuel damaging the
catalytic converter.
1. Check that the parkbrake is applied and that
the transmission selector is in the P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
2. Switch off all unnecessary electrical
equipment.
3. Turn the starter switch to position II and
then on to position III and immediately
release it. The starter will automatically
switch off when the engine starts. DO NOT
press the accelerator pedal while starting.
Note: The battery charging and oil pressure
warning lights should extinguish as soon as the
engine is running.
172
Starting & Driving

DRIVING
Caution: Red warning indicators are of

particular importance, their illumination
indicating that a fault exists. If a red light
illuminates, always stop the vehicle and seek
qualified assistance before continuing.
Vehicle stability
WARNING
Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance
and, hence, a higher center of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars to enable the vehicle
to perform in a wide variety of different
off-road applications. An advantage of the
higher ground clearance is a better view of
the road, allowing the driver to more easily
anticipate problems. Inexperienced drivers
should take additional care, remembering
that your vehicle is not designed for cornering
at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars, any more than a low-slung
sports car is designed to perform
satisfactorily in off-road conditions. As with
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
your vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or even vehicle rollover.
In the case of the parkbrake, the above only

applies if the vehicle is moving when the
indicator illuminates.
Warming-up
DO NOT warm-up the engine by allowing it to
idle at a slow speed.
In the interests of fuel economy and of reducing
engine wear, it is advisable to drive the vehicle
straight away, remembering that harsh
acceleration and labouring the engine before
the normal operating temperature has been
reached can damage the engine.
Breaking-in
Proper breaking-in will have a direct bearing on
the reliability and smooth running of your
vehicle throughout its life.
Vehicle height
In particular, the engine, gearbox, brakes and

tires need time to bed-in and adjust to the
demands of everyday motoring. During the first
800 km (500 miles), it is essential to drive with
consideration for the breaking-in process and
heed the following advice:
Caution: The overall height of your vehicle

exceeds that of ordinary passenger cars, see
DIMENSIONS, 341. Always be aware of the
height of your vehicle and check the available
headroom before driving through low
entrances. This is particularly important if the
vehicle is fitted with a roof rack or if the
sunroof is tilted open.
Instruments and warning indicators
Before driving it is important to fully
understand the function of the instruments and
warning indicators (see INSTRUMENT PACK,
91).
173
LIMIT maximum road speed to 110 km/h

(68 mph) or 3,000 rev/min. Initially, drive
the vehicle on a light throttle and only
increase engine speeds gradually once the
breaking-in distance has been completed.
DO NOT operate at full throttle or allow the

engine to labor in any gear. It is advisable
NOT to use Sport Mode when breaking in.
AVOID fast acceleration and heavy braking

except in emergencies.
Starting & Driving

FUEL ECONOMY
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Fuel consumption is influenced by two major

factors:
How your vehicle is maintained.
How you drive your vehicle.
WARNING
Exhaust fumes contain poisonous substances
and inhalation can cause unconsciousness
and may even be fatal.
To obtain optimum fuel economy, it is essential

that your vehicle is maintained in accordance
with the manufacturer's service schedule.
Items such as the condition of the air cleaner
element, tire pressures and wheel alignment
can significantly affect fuel consumption. But,
above all, the way in which you drive is most
important. The following hints may help you to
obtain better value from your motoring:
Avoid unnecessary, short, start-stop

journeys.
Avoid fast starts by accelerating gently and

smoothly from rest.
Decelerate gently and avoid sudden and

heavy braking.
Anticipate obstructions and adjust your

speed accordingly well in advance.
When stationary in traffic, select neutral

(N) to improve fuel economy and air
conditioning performance.
DO NOT inhale exhaust gases
DO NOT START or leave the engine

running in an enclosed, unventilated
area, or drive with the tailgate open.
DO NOT modify the exhaust system from

the original design.
ALWAYS have exhaust system leaks

repaired immediately.
If you think exhaust fumes are entering

the vehicle, have the cause determined
and corrected immediately.
Land Rover vehicles are fitted with emission

and evaporative control equipment necessary
to meet a number of territorial requirements.
In many countries it is against the law for
vehicle owners to modify or tamper with
emission control equipment, or to sanction the
unauthorised replacement or modification of
this equipment. In such cases the vehicle owner
and the repairer may both be liable for legal
penalties.
It is important to remember that all Land Rover
Retailers are properly equipped to perform
repairs and to maintain the emission control
system on your vehicle.
174
Catalytic Converter
Catalytic Converter
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The exhaust system incorporates a catalytic

converter, which converts most harmful
exhaust emissions from the engine into
environmentally less harmful gases.
Consult your Land Rover Retailer if your

vehicle is burning excessive oil (blue
smoke from the exhaust), as this will
progressively reduce catalyst efficiency.
On rough terrain do not allow the underside

of the vehicle to be subjected to heavy
impacts which could damage the catalytic
converter.
DO NOT overload or excessively rev the

engine.
DO NOT switch off the engine when the

vehicle is in motion with a drive gear
selected.
It can not, however, remove all harmful exhaust

emissions.
Caution: Catalytic converters can be easily
damaged through improper use, particularly
if the wrong fuel is used, or if an engine
misfire occurs. For this reason it is VERY
IMPORTANT that you heed the precautions
which follow.
WARNING
Fuel
ONLY use fuel recommended for your vehicle.
Exhaust system temperatures can be

extremely high - DO NOT park on ground
where combustible materials such as dry
grass or leaves could come into contact with
the exhaust system - in dry weather a fire
could result.
Starting the engine
DO NOT continue to operate the starter

after a few failed attempts (unburnt fuel
may be drawn into the exhaust system,
thereby poisoning the catalyst), and do not
attempt to clear a misfire by pressing the
accelerator pedal - seek qualified
assistance.
Vehicle maintenance
When starting the engine, DO NOT drive if

a misfire is suspected and do not attempt
to clear a misfire by pressing the
accelerator - seek qualified assistance.
Do not attempt to push or tow-start the
vehicle.
Driving
If a misfire is suspected, the Check Engine

warning light is flashing or the vehicle lacks
power while driving, avoid high speeds and
seek immediate assistance from your Land
Rover Retailer
NEVER allow the vehicle to run out of fuel

(the resultant misfire could damage the
catalyst).
175
It is vital that unqualified persons do not

tamper with the engine, and that regular
systematic maintenance is carried out by a
DO NOT run the engine with a spark plug or

HT lead removed, or use any device that
requires an insert into a spark plug.
Fuel Filling
Fuel Filling
GAS STATION SAFETY
FUEL FILLER
WARNING
WARNING
Petroleum gases are highly inflammable and,

in confined spaces, are also extremely
explosive.
To avoid any sudden discharge of fuel caused

by excessive fuel vapor pressure, DO NOT
fully remove the filler cap until any captive
tank pressure has been released.
Always take sensible precautions when

refuelling:
Take careful note of warning labels located

around the filler cap.
Switch off the engine.
Do not smoke or introduce other ignition

sources.
Switch off mobile phones.
Take care not to spill fuel.
Do not overfill the tank.
Do not fill gas cans in the vehicle.
Do not leave the fuel filler pump unattended

during refuelling.
Use only the hold-open latch provided on

the fuel filler pump. Never jam the latch
open with some other object.
The fuel filler is located behind the rear

right-hand wheel arch. An arrow on the fuel
gauge points to that side of the vehicle.
WARNING
If a flash fire occurs during refuelling, leave
the nozzle in the vehicle fill pipe and back
away from the vehicle. Notify the station
attendant at once so that all dispensing
devices and pumps can be shut off with
emergency controls. If the facility is
unattended, use the emergency intercom to
summon help and the emergency shutdown
button to shut off the pump.
H5581G
176
Fuel Filling
With the vehicle fully unlocked (all doors and
tailgate), press the left side of the fuel filler flap
to open (shown in inset).
H5584G
Insert the pump nozzle (1) into the filler neck,

pushing aside the spring-loaded cover (2).
When delivery is complete, withdraw the nozzle
and replace the cap. Tighten the cap clockwise
until you hear it click three times.
H5582G
Caution: When replacing the fuel filler cap

ensure that it is tightened until it clicks.
Failure to do so may result in the engine
warning light illuminating due to evaporative
emission levels increasing.
The fuel filler flap springs out revealing the filler

cap.
H5583G
Unscrew the filler cap and place it on the

projection on top of the hinge of the fuel filler
flap.
177
Fuel Filling
TYPE OF FUEL
During manufacture, engines are tuned to suit

the fuel supplies commonly available in the
country for which the vehicle is destined.
However, if a vehicle is later exported to a
different country, or is used to travel between
different territories, the owner should be aware
that the available fuel supplies may not be
compatible with the engine specification.
Fuel specification - gasoline engines

Caution: On gasoline engine vehicles fitted
with a catalytic converter, serious damage to
the catalyst will occur if LEADED fuel is used!
Fuel specification
See ENGINES, 334.
Your engine will run on a lower grade of fuel but

performance and fuel economy will be reduced.
Premium unleaded gasoline with a CLC or AKI

octane rating of 90 or higher should be used.
Using gasoline with a lower octane rating than

90 RON, however, can cause persistent, heavy
engine knock (a metallic rapping noise). If
severe, this can lead to engine damage.
Note: Federal law requires that gasoline octane

ratings be posted on the pumps. The Cost of
Living Council (CLC) octane rating or Anti
Knock Index (AKI) octane rating shown is an
average of Research Octane Number (RON) and
Motor Octane Number
If in doubt, seek advice from the territory

concerned.
If heavy engine knock is detected when using
the recommended octane rated fuel, or if steady
engine knocking is present while maintaining a
steady speed on level roads, contact your
Retailer for advice.
The RON value and type of gasoline available at

gas stations will vary in different parts of the
world.
Note: An occasional, light, engine knock while

accelerating or climbing hills is acceptable.
178
Fuel Filling
FUEL FILLING
WARNING
Gas station pumps are equipped with automatic

cut-off sensing to avoid fuel spillage. Fill the
tank SLOWLY until the filler nozzle
automatically cuts-off the supply.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury and

even death if misused.
Methanol/unleaded fuel blends, even in small
amounts, can cause blindness and possible
death is swallowed. Additionally, take
precautions to prevent methanol from coming
into contact with the skin.
WARNING
DO NOT attempt to fill the tank beyond its
maximum capacity. If the vehicle is parked on
a slope, in direct sunlight or high ambient
temperature, expansion of the fuel can cause
a spillage.
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM

In the event of an accident, the Supplementary
Restraint System (airbag system) may stop the
operation of the fuel pump, depending on the
severity and type of the impact.
The reduced diameter filler neck accepts ONLY

a narrow filler nozzle of the type found on
pumps that supply UNLEADED fuel.
If this happens, the system must be reset

before attempting to restart the engine.
Note: Ensure the filler cap is fitted correctly

after refuelling.
Resetting the Fuel Cut-off System
EMPTY FUEL TANK
WARNING
Caution:
To avoid the possibility of fire or personal

injury, do not reset the Fuel Cut-off System if
you see or smell fuel.
DO NOT RUN THE FUEL TANK DRY.

Running the fuel tank dry could create an
engine misfire capable of damaging the
engine, the catalytic converter or the fuel
pump.
If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the system as

follows:
Note: Should the vehicle run out of fuel it will be

necessary to add a minimum of 4 litres (1
Gallon) of fuel in order to restart the vehicle. In
some circumstances it will be necessary to
drive a short distance, typically 1.6 - 5
kilometers (1 - 3 miles) in order for the vehicles
monitoring systems to register the additional
fuel.
1. Turn the ignition switch to position 0 and

wait for 1 minute.
2. Turn the ignition switch to position ll and
wait for 30 seconds.
3. Make a further check for fuel leaks.
4. If no leak is found, start the engine as
normal.
179

USING PARK DISTANCE

CONTROL (PDC)*
The vehicle is fitted with four ultrasonic sensors

on each of the bumpers. (Some vehicles are
fitted with sensors only in the rear bumpers.)
The range of the front sensors, and the two
sensors on the corners of the rear bumper is
approximately 0.6 metres (2 feet). The two
center rear sensors have a range of
approximately 1.5 metres (5 feet).
Caution: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice
and snow. If deposits build up on the surface
of the sensors, their performance may be
impaired. When washing the vehicle, avoid
aiming high pressure jets directly at the
sensors at close range.
PDC in operation
Caution: PDC is automatically switched off at
the rear when a trailer is attached to the
vehicle.
The distance from an obstruction is identified
by an intermittent tone sounding (higher pitch
for the front sensors and a lower pitch for the
rear). As the vehicle moves closer to an
obstruction, the repetition frequency of the
tones increases proportionally.
H5585G
When the distance between the sensor and the

obstruction is less than approximately 0.30
metres (1 foot), the tone becomes continuous.
Caution: The parking aid is for guidance only.

The sensors may not be able to detect certain
types of obstruction (narrow posts or small
narrow objects, small objects close to the
ground and some objects with dark,
non-reflective surfaces, for example).
The front PDC may sound spurious tones if it
detects a frequency tone using the same band
as the sensors.
Park Distance Control (PDC) is a system that
assists the driver when manoeuvring the
vehicle into a parking space, or anywhere that
there are obstacles that need to be avoided,
warning the driver accordingly.
180

Activating PDC
When the starter switch is turned on, engaging
Drive and switching the Electronic Parkbrake
(EPB) off will automatically activate the front
PDC sensors. The indicator light in the switch
will illuminate to indicate this.
The system can be disabled by pressing the

switch (illustrated) on the center front
instrument pack. The indicator light in the
switch goes out. A second press of the switch
re-enables the system. The system is reset if
the ignition is turned off and on again.
The front sensors remain active until the speed

exceeds 15 km/h (10 mph). They then
deactivate.
Depending on the system condition, the

indicator light may illuminate and a short tone
sounds as confirmation.
When the vehicles speed drops below 10 km/h

(6 mph), the front sensors are re-activated. If
the vehicle stops and Neutral is selected, the
sensors remain active.
Note: The confirmation tone only sounds when

the rear PDC is activated by selecting reverse,
or when the system is re-activated by pressing
the switch when in reverse.
If Reverse is selected, both front and rear sets

of sensors become activated and a short
confirmation tone sounds after one second.
They remain so regardless of speed.
If a long, high-pitched tone sounds and the

switch indicator light flashes when PDC is
activated, then a fault in the system has been
detected - contact your Land Rover Retailer for
assistance.
If the driver selects Neutral from Reverse, both

sets of sensors remain active.
Selection of Park, or turning on the EPB while
the vehicle is stationary, will override other
inputs and turn off the PDC system.
H5847N
181
USING AN AUTOMATIC GEARBOX
The following information is particularly

important for drivers who are unfamiliar with
the techniques required to drive vehicles with
automatic transmission.
Starting
The engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) positions.
ALWAYS apply the parkbrake and foot

brake before starting the engine.
The selector release button (see inset)

must be pressed while selecting P and R,
and also to enable the lever to be moved
between the P and R positions.
KEEP THE BRAKES APPLIED while moving

the selector lever into a drive position (the
selector lever cannot be moved from the P
or N position unless the foot brake is
applied).
H5589L
WARNING
DO NOT rev the engine or allow it to run

above normal idle speed while selecting D
or R, or while the vehicle is stationary with
any gear selected.
To reduce the risk of inadvertent vehicle

movement when parked, always leave the
vehicle with the gear selector in P (Park)
position, as well as applying the handbrake.
ALWAYS keep the brakes applied until you

are ready to move off - remember, once a
drive gear has been selected, an
automatic vehicle will tend to creep
forward (or backward if reverse is
selected).
Note: The gear selector lever must be in the P

position before the starter key can be removed.
For maximum air conditioning performance
when stationary, select P or N.
DO NOT allow the vehicle to remain

stationary for any length of time with a
drive gear selected and the engine running
(always select P or N if the engine is to
idle for a prolonged period).
Caution: Vehicles fitted with automatic

transmission can NOT be push or tow
started.
182
N - Neutral:
Selector lever positions

An LED indicator on the selector panel and a
number or letter on the gear selector display in
the instrument pack, identify the selected gear
position.
Select Neutral when the vehicle is stationary

and the engine is required to idle for a brief
period (at traffic lights, for example). In Neutral,
the transmission is not locked, so the parkbrake
must be applied whenever N is selected.
If the vehicle remains stationary, the selector
lever becomes locked in Neutral and it is then
necessary to depress the brake pedal in order to
release the selector lever.
Press the selector release button and foot brake
to move from Neutral to Reverse or Drive.
D - Drive:
P
P
Select for all normal driving; full automatic gear

changing occurs on all six forward gears,
according to road speed and accelerator
position.
P
Caution: DO NOT select P or R if the vehicle

is moving.
++
DO NOT select a forward drive gear when the

vehicle is moving backwards.
Do not select reverse gear when the vehicle is

moving forwards.
D
H5591G
Kick-down in automatic mode

To provide rapid acceleration for overtaking,
push the accelerator pedal to the full extent of
its travel (this is known as kick-down), a click
will be felt through the accelerator pedal. Up to
a certain speed, this will cause an immediate
downshift to the lowest appropriate gear,
followed by rapid acceleration. Once the pedal
is relaxed, normal gear change speeds will
resume (dependent upon road speed and
accelerator pedal position).
P - Park:
This position locks the transmission and should
be selected before switching the engine off. To
avoid transmission damage, ensure that the
vehicle is completely stationary, with the
parkbrake applied, before selecting P.
The selector release button MUST be pressed
before moving the selector lever into, or out of,
the Park position.
R - Reverse:
Before selecting Reverse, ensure that the
vehicle is stationary, with the brakes applied.
The selector release button MUST be pressed
before moving the selector lever into Reverse
position.
Note: Moderate accelerator pressure may also

result in a downshift in the transmission,
depending on vehicle speed.
183
CommandShift TM
CommandShift gear selection can be used as
an alternative to fully automatic transmission
and is particularly effective when rapid
acceleration or engine braking are required.
Sport mode
In Sport mode, full automatic progression
through the gear ratios is retained and the
transmission will stay in the lower gears for
longer. This improves mid-range performance
with downshifts occurring more readily.
H5595G
H5593G
To select Sport mode, move the gear lever from

the D position towards the left hand side of the
vehicle (see illustration). The word SPORT will
appear in the gear selector display in the
instrument pack (for approximately 6 seconds)
and the LED in the selector display to the side
of the selector lever (arrowed in inset)
illuminates.
1. With D (Drive) selected, move the gear

selector from the D position towards the
left-hand side of the vehicle (this is the
same as selecting Sport mode).
2. The transmission then automatically
selects the ratio most appropriate to the
vehicle's road speed and accelerator
depression. Move the selector forward or
backward will manually select a higher or
lower gear (when available). The message
TRANSMISSION COMMANDSHIFT
SELECTED appears in the main message
centre.
Sport mode can be deselected at any time, by

returning the lever to the D position.
To return to Sport mode after CommandShift
has been selected move the selector into the D
position. Then move it back into Sport mode.
Note: On vehicles fitted with the Terrain
Response system, Sport mode will be available
only with Terrain Response Special Programs
off.
184
3. A single forward (+) movement of the
selector lever will change the transmission
to a higher gear, while rearward (-)
movement of the lever will change down to
a lower gear. The selected gear will be
indicated in the digital display in the
instrument pack (see inset).
In HIGH range, with CommandShift selected,

kick-down will cause a downshift of at least two
gears (5 to 3, for example). When in LOW
range, the downshift will only be one gear (5 to
4, for example).
4. To deselect CommandShift, simply move

the selector lever sideways, back to the D
position. Automatic gear changing will then
resume.
Note: In CommandShift, kick-down is still
available for increased acceleration. See
Kick-down in automatic mode, 183, for more
information.
Response system, the automatic transmission
will go straight into CommandShift if the lever
is moved into sport/CommandShift in any
Special Program.
Using CommandShift in HIGH range
If CommandShift is selected in HIGH range, 1st
gear must be selected to move off from
stationary. Normal sequential gear changing
can be utilised once the vehicle is moving.
Using CommandShift in LOW range
If CommandShift is selected in LOW range, the
vehicle can move off from stationary in 1st, 2nd
or 3rd gear - this is particularly useful to
improve traction when driving off-road. See the
Off-road Driving section of this handbook, for
further details.
Kick-down in CommandShift
When in CommandShift, kick-down overrides
the manual gear selection, to provide increased
acceleration. The characteristics of kick-down
operation differ according to the gear range
selected (HIGH or LOW).
185
ELECTRONICALLY SELECTED
AUTOMATIC MODES
Emergency release from Park

If the transmission is in Park position and a
complete loss of power, such as battery failure,
occurs, it will be necessary to move the lever
from P in order to transfer it to a recovery
truck, for instance.
In fully automatic mode or manual selection

mode (not available in sport mode) the
transmission control system will electronically
adjust gear change points to suit a variety of
driving conditions.
Hill ascent, trailer and high altitude mode
A suitable gear change pattern is selected to
retain lower gears for longer. This is to counter
momentum loss caused by more frequent gear
changing during hill ascent or when towing.
This gear change pattern is also selected at high
altitudes to combat reduced engine torque.
Hill descent mode
When in manual CommandShiftTM mode, with
the optimum gear for engine braking selected,
the selector lever can then be moved across to
the D position. The transmission will retain the
previously selected manual gear until the
descent is completed, then the transmission
will automatically change to D.
High coolant temperature mode
In high ambient temperatures during extreme
load conditions, it is possible for the engine and
the gearbox to overheat. At a certain
temperature the transmission will select a gear
change pattern designed to aid the cooling
process, whilst enabling the gearbox to
continue performing normally in high
temperatures.
Response system, automatic transmission
change points/patterns will change depending
on which mode has been selected.
H5761R
Limp-Home mode
Should the transmission develop a fault, F is
displayed in the gear position display and only
limited gears are available.
Remove the cover on top of the centre console.

Simultaneously push up the lever on the back of
the mechanism and press the button on the
gearknob and move it from the P position.
186
Transfer Gearbox
Transfer Gearbox
TRANSFER GEARBOX
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically
controlled transfer gearbox allowing the driver
to select HIGH or LOW range driving gears.
HIGH range
HIGH range should be used for all normal road
driving and also for off-road driving across dry,
level terrain.
LOW range
LOW range should ONLY be used in situations
where low speed manoeuvring is necessary,
such as reversing a trailer or negotiating a
boulder-strewn river bed, or when moving off
while heavily loaded or towing.
Also use LOW range for more extreme off-road
conditions, such as steep ascents and
descents. DO NOT attempt to use the LOW
range for normal road driving.
H5597L
USING THE TRANSFER GEARBOX
While the vehicle is in HIGH range, the range

indicator light in the instrument pack display is
extinguished and the HIGH range indicator light
at the switch is illuminated.
The recommended method of changing range

is with the vehicle stationary. For vehicles
equipped with a message center, the messages
displayed will assist the experienced driver in
carrying out a range change on-the-move.
The range indicator light in the instrument pack

display illuminates continuously to act as a
reminder that LOW range is engaged. It flashes
to indicate a range change in progress and
extinguishes once the vehicle is in HIGH range.
Stationary method
With the vehicle stationary and the engine
running, apply the foot brake and move the
transmission selector to the N (neutral)
position before moving the transfer gear switch
towards the range required (HIGH or LOW).
When the switch is released, it returns to the
central position.
187
Transfer Gearbox
H5748G
H5749G
While a HIGH to LOW range change is in

progress, the HIGH range indicator light at the
switch will remain illuminated. The LOW range
indicator lights at both the switch and the
instrument pack display will flash.
While a LOW to HIGH range change is in

progress, the LOW range indicator light at the
switch will remain illuminated. The HIGH range
indicator lights at both the switch and the
instrument pack display will flash.
When the range change is complete, the HIGH

range indicator light at the switch extinguishes.
The LOW range indicator lights at both the
switch and the instrument pack display will
illuminate constantly.
When the range change is complete, the LOW

range indicator light at both the switch and the
instrument pack display extinguishes. The
HIGH range indicator light at the switch will
illuminate constantly.
A warning chime will sound, and LOW RANGE

ENGAGED is displayed in the message center
(if fitted) for a few seconds.
A warning chime will sound, and HIGH RANGE

ENGAGED is displayed in the message center
(if fitted) for a few seconds.
188
Transfer Gearbox
Range changing on the move
Drive-line fault lamp

If a fault occurs within the drive line, a lamp will
illuminate in the instrument pack display. The
color of that lamp will indicate what criteria
apply to driving the vehicle, see Warning
Indicators, 108.
Note: If the vehicle speed is too high when a

range change is requested, a warning chime
sounds and SPEED TOO HIGH FOR RANGE
CHANGE appears in the message center*.
If N is not selected before using the transfer
gear switch, the message SELECT NEUTRAL
FOR RANGE CHANGE is displayed and a
warning chime sounds.
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Caution: DO NOT use auxiliary equipment,
such as roller generators, that are driven by
only one or two wheels of the vehicle, as they
will cause failure of the transfer gearbox.
Note: Do not attempt to make moving range

changes at speeds of 3 km/h (2 mph) or less.
Changing from HIGH to LOW on the move
With the vehicle slowing down and travelling
NO FASTER THAN 40 km/h (24 mph), first
select N in the main gearbox. Pull the transfer
gear switch fully rearwards to the LOW
position and release it (the switch returns to the
center position when released).
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the Stationary method.
Now select D or manual CommandShiftTM
mode. The transmission interlock prevents the
engagement of a drive gear until the range
change is complete.
Changing from LOW to HIGH on the move
With the vehicle travelling NO FASTER THAN 60
km/h (38 mph), select N in the main gearbox.
Push the transfer gear switch fully forwards to
the HIGH position and release it.
Indication of the range change status is the
same as for the stationary method.
Now select D (drive). The transmission
interlock prevents the engagement of a drive
gear until the range change is complete.
If the range change indicator light still flashes
when the starter key is turned from position
ll to position l, apply the parkbrake.
189
Cruise Control
Cruise Control
CRUISE CONTROL*
Caution: Always observe the following

precautions:
Cruise Control enables the driver to maintain a

constant road speed without using the
accelerator pedal. This is particularly useful for
motorway cruising or for any journey where a
constant speed can be maintained for a lengthy
period.
1
2
3
4
DO NOT use Cruise Control when using

reverse gear.
DO NOT use Cruise Control in traffic

conditions where a constant speed cannot
easily be maintained.
DO NOT use Cruise Control on winding or

slippery road surfaces, or in off-road
conditions such as rough tracks or on
sand.
Use of Sport mode is not recommended

when Cruise Control is selected.
Note: Cruise Control is NOT available when the

vehicle is being driven in LOW range gears.
It is also not available on vehicles fitted with the
Terrain Response system, when Mud Ruts,
Sand or Rock Crawl is selected.
To operate
Accelerate until the desired cruising speed is
reached. This must be above the system's
operational minimum speed of 30 km/h (18
mph).
Press the + switch (1) to set the vehicle speed
in the system's memory. Cruise Control will
now maintain that road speed.
H5599L
The warning indicator in the

instrument pack illuminates. With
Cruise Control operating, speed
can be increased by normal use of the
accelerator e.g. for overtaking. When the
accelerator is released, road speed will return to
the previously set cruising speed.
The Cruise Control system has four switches:

1. + Accelerate set switch.
2. - Decelerate set switch.
3. Resume switch.
4. Suspend switch.
A speed can be set and stored whilst the vehicle

speed is below 30 km/h (18 mph) or when the
vehicle is stationary and in D or N. Once the
vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (18 mph) the
set speed can be achieved by pressing the
resume switch (3).
190
Cruise Control
Suspending Cruise Control
Cruise Control can be suspended by a single
press of the Suspend switch (4). The warning
indicator in the instrument pack extinguishes.
To increase the set cruising speed:
Cruise Control will also suspend when the

brake pedal is pressed, when the gear selector
is moved into neutral or if HDC or DSC becomes
active.
The vehicle speed at the point of switch release

becomes the new set speed.
Press and hold the + switch (1); the vehicle

will accelerate. Release the switch as soon as
the desired speed is reached.
To resume Cruise Control at the previously set

speed, press the Resume switch (3).
Alternatively, the set speed can be increased

incrementally by tapping the + switch. Each
press of the switch will increase the speed by 1
km/h.
Note: The set speed will NOT be erased by

pressing the Suspend switch (4). The set speed
will only be erased when the starter switch is
turned to position 0.
A further alternative is to increase speed by

normal use of the accelerator. When the desired
speed is reached, press the + switch (1) to set
the Cruise Control.
To reduce the cruising speed:
Note: If the accelerator pedal is pressed to

increase speed, but the + switch (1) is not
pressed, cruise control will be cancelled after a
set period.
Press and hold the - switch (2); the vehicle will

decelerate. Release the switch as soon as the
desired speed is reached. The vehicle speed at
the point of switch release becomes the new set
speed.
WARNING
When setting the cruise control to the speed
limit it is important to remember that it is
possible for the vehicle speed to increase
when travelling downhill. This may result in
the vehicle exceeding the speed limit.
Alternatively, the set speed can be decreased

incrementally by tapping the - switch. Each
press of the switch will decrease the speed by 1
km/h.
Note: Cruise Control will not operate at speeds
below 30 km/h (18 mph).
The driver must always ensure that a safe

speed is maintained below the speed limit,
taking traffic and road conditions into
account.
191
Brakes
Brakes
FOOT BRAKE
WARNING
For your safety, the hydraulic braking system

operates through dual circuits. If one circuit
should fail, the other will continue to function.
DO NOT rest your foot on the brake pedal

while travelling as this may overheat the
brakes, reduce their efficiency and cause
excessive wear.
However, in the event of brake failure where

only one circuit is operational, the vehicle
should only be driven at slow speed to the
nearest qualified Land Rover Retailer.
NEVER allow the vehicle to freewheel with the

engine turned off as braking assistance will
not be available. The pedal brakes will still
function, but more pressure will be required
to operate them.
In these circumstances, exercise extreme

caution and be aware that increased brake
pedal travel, greater pedal pressure, and longer
stopping distances will be experienced.
If the RED brake warning indicator should

illuminate while the vehicle is in motion,
bring the vehicle to a halt as quickly as traffic
conditions and safety allow and seek
qualified assistance before continuing, see
Warning Indicators, 108.
Servo assistance
The braking system is servo assisted, but ONLY
when the engine is running. Without this
assistance greater braking effort is necessary to
safely control the vehicle, resulting in longer
stopping distances. Always observe the
following precautions:
ALWAYS take particular care when being

towed with the engine turned off.
If the engine should stop for any reason

while the vehicle is in motion, bring the
vehicle to a halt as quickly as traffic
conditions safely allow, and DO NOT pump
the brake pedal as the braking system may
lose any remaining assistance available.
NEVER place non-approved floor matting or

any other obstructions under the brake pedal.
This restricts pedal travel and braking
efficiency.
Wet conditions
Driving through water or even very heavy rain
may adversely affect braking efficiency. Always
dry the braking surfaces by intermittent light
application of the brakes, first ensuring that you
are at a safe distance from other road users.
Brake pads
Brake pads require a period of bedding in. For
the first 800 km (500 miles), you should avoid
situations where heavy braking is required.
Remember! Regular servicing is vital to ensure
that the brake pads are examined for wear and
changed periodically to ensure long term safety
and optimum performance.
192
Brakes
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
WARNING
The purpose of the anti-lock braking system

(ABS) is to allow efficient braking without wheel
locking - thereby allowing the driver to retain
steering control of the vehicle.
ABS cannot overcome the physical limitations

of braking distance, or the danger of
aquaplaning, i.e. where a layer of water
prevents adequate contact between the tires
and the road surface.
Under normal braking conditions, where

sufficient road surface friction exists to slow
the vehicle without the wheels locking, ABS will
not be activated. However, if the wheels begin
to lock under braking, then ABS will
automatically come into operation. This will be
recognisable by a rapid pulsation felt through
the brake pedal.
The fact that a vehicle is fitted with ABS must

never tempt the driver into taking risks that
could affect safety. In all cases, it remains the
driver's responsibility to drive within normal
safety margins, having due consideration for
prevailing weather and traffic conditions.
The driver should always take account of the
surface to be travelled over and the fact that
brake pedal reactions will be different to
those experienced on a non-ABS vehicle.
In an emergency situation, ABS functions most

effectively when full braking effort is applied
even when the road surface is slippery. The ABS
system constantly monitors the speed of each
wheel and varies the brake pressure to each,
according to the available grip.
Warning indicator
A fault with the ABS system is
indicated by illumination of the
amber ABS warning indicator. If
the indicator illuminates, drive with care,
avoiding heavy brake applications and seek
qualified assistance urgently. For further
information on the functionality of the ABS
warning indicator, see Anti-lock braking
system - AMBER, 111.
No matter how hard you brake, you should be

able to continue steering the vehicle as normal.
DO NOT pump the brake pedal at any time;

this will interrupt operation of the system
and may increase the stopping distance.
NEVER place additional floor matting or

any other obstruction under the brake
pedal. This restricts pedal travel and may
impair brake efficiency.
193
Brakes
Off-road driving
While anti-lock braking will operate in off-road
driving conditions, on certain surfaces total
reliance on the system may be unwise. It cannot
reliably compensate for driver error or
inexperience on difficult off-road surfaces.
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)

If rapid full brake application is made, EBA
automatically boosts the braking force to the
maximum and helps to stop the vehicle. Also, if
the driver brakes more slowly, but with
sufficient brake pressure to activate ABS on
both front wheels, the system automatically
increases the braking force so that all four
wheels are in ABS control, optimising the
performance of the ABS system.
Note the following:
On soft or deep surfaces such as powdery

snow, sand or gravel, and on extremely
rough ground, the braking distance
required by the anti-lock braking system
may be greater than for normal braking,
even though improved steering would be
experienced. This is because the natural
action of locked wheels on soft surfaces is
to build up a wedge of surface material in
front which assists the wheels to stop.
Pressure should be maintained on the brake

pedal during the entire brake application. If the
brake pedal is released, EBA will cease
operation.
A fault with the EBA system is indicated by
illumination of the amber brake warning
indicator, see INDICATOR GROUPING, 108. In
the event of a fault, the system should be
checked by a Land Rover Retailer at the earliest
opportunity.
If the vehicle is stopped on a very steep

slope where little traction is available, it
may slide with the wheels locked as there is
no wheel rotation to provide a signal to the
ABS. To counteract this, briefly release the
brakes to permit some wheel movement,
then re-apply the brakes to allow ABS to
gain control.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

Your vehicle is equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), which balances the
distribution of braking forces between front and
rear axles to maintain maximum braking
efficiency under all vehicle loading conditions.
Before driving off-road, read and

thoroughly understand the Off-road
driving section of this handbook.
For example; under light loads EBD applies less

effort to the rear brakes to maintain vehicle
stability; conversely allowing full braking effort
to the rear wheels when the vehicle is towing or
is heavily laden.
Cornering Brake Control (CBC)

Cornering Brake Control (CBC) is an advanced
form of ABS, which maintains vehicle stability
and steering control during braking whilst
cornering or changing lanes at speed.
A fault with the EBD system is indicated by

illumination of the red brake warning indicator.
If this illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, gently stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits and seek qualified assistance.
194
Brakes
PARKBRAKE
It is important to confirm that the red indicator

is continuously illuminated (not flashing). This
indicates that the parkbrake has been correctly
applied. If the lever is operated while the vehicle
is travelling at less than 3 km/h, the vehicle will
be brought to a stop abruptly. The stop lamps
will not illuminate.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrically

operated parkbrake (EPB).
If the system detects a fault with the parkbrake,

the amber parkbrake warning indicator will
illuminate and the message Parkbrake fault
will appear on the instrument pack. If a fault is
detected while EPB is operated, the red warning
indicator will flash and the amber indicator will
illuminate. Also the message Parkbrake fault.
System not functional. will appear on the
instrument pack. The red indicator will continue
to be illuminated for at least ten seconds after
the ignition has been switched off.
WARNING
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake system to hold
the vehicle stationary if the amber parkbrake
warning indicator is illuminated and/or the
red warning indicator is flashing. Seek
Note: Text messages described within this
section are only available where a vehicle is
fitted with a driver information module.
Dynamic operation
In an emergency, the parkbrake can be applied
dynamically, i.e. with the vehicle travelling at
more than 3 km/h (2 mph). Pulling up on the
lever and holding it up gives a gradual reduction
in speed. The brake warning indicator will
illuminate accompanied by a harsh sound and
Caution! Parkbrake applied appears on the
message screen. The stop lamps will illuminate.
H5601L
Applying the parkbrake manually

With the vehicle stationary, pull up the lever (1)
located alongside the gear selector, and release
it. The lever will return to the neutral position
and the red parkbrake warning indicator in the
instrument pack will illuminate.
Releasing or depressing the lever will cancel the

parkbrake application.
195
Brakes
The parkbrake should not be used regularly to
decelerate the vehicle or to bring it to a
standstill; this facility is intended for emergency
use only.
Releasing the parkbrake automatically

If the vehicle is stationary with the parkbrake
applied, pressing the accelerator will release
the parkbrake and allow the vehicle to move off.
Caution: Driving the vehicle with the

parkbrake applied (other than in the
emergency situation described above) or
repeated use of the parkbrake to decelerate
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the
brake system.
It is not possible to automatically release the

parkbrake without pressing the accelerator. If
you want to move the vehicle without pressing
the accelerator, then manual release should be
used. Automatic release is available in first,
second and reverse gears in HIGH range, and
first, second, third and reverse gears in LOW
range.
Releasing the parkbrake manually

To disengage the parkbrake, the ignition must
be on. Apply pressure to the footbrake or
accelerator pedal while pressing down on the
lever (2).
To delay the automatic release feature, hold the

lever in the apply position, then at the desired
point, release it.
To assist in a smooth drive-away, the system
anticipates the requirement and reduces the
system load depending on the gradient. (It may
be possible to hear this pre-arm operation).
It is not possible to manually release the

parkbrake without pressing the footbrake or
accelerator.
WARNING
If the reduction in load causes the vehicle to

move after a valid gear is engaged, the full
system load will be re-applied to the parkbrake.
This may cause a small reduction in the
refinement of the subsequent drive-away. It is
also possible to override this load reduction by
lifting the parkbrake lever after gear
engagement.
The parkbrake operates on the rear wheels of

the vehicle and hence secure parking of the
vehicle is dependent on being on a hard and
stable surface.
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake to operate
effectively if the vehicle has been subjected
to immersion in mud and water.
In the event of a fault, Parkbrake Fault. Auto

Release not functional will appear in the
instrument pack.
DO NOT rely on the parkbrake system to hold

the vehicle stationary if the amber parkbrake
warning indicator is illuminated and/or the
red warning indicator is flashing. Seek
Under most conditions the EPB system will

release seamlessly as the accelerator is applied,
allowing the vehicle to move forward. However,
release times may be extended for an initial
time period at the start of a journey when
changing into gear from P or N. This is
normal and is to allow for the extended gear
engagement times that may occur under certain
circumstances.
196
Brakes
Fault management
If a fault is diagnosed by the system when the
ignition is on but the parkbrake is not in use, the
amber parkbrake warning indicator will flash
and the message Parkbrake fault will be
displayed.
Note: Under some transmission fault
conditions parkbrake release may not be
automatic and/or automatic parkbrake function
may be inoperable.
Releasing the parkbrake in an emergency
If the vehicle has the parkbrake applied and an
electrical fault prevents the system operating
normally, there is provision for mechanically
releasing the parkbrake.
Note: Whenever possible, this operation should
be carried out by Roadside Assistance.
WARNING
As this operation removes the static braking
on the vehicle, chocks must be placed on both
sides of one of the wheels or the foot brake
must be applied before releasing the cable.
This procedure could take considerable
physical effort.
Using a suitable tool such as a screwdriver, lift
out the coin tray situated on the opposite side
of the gear shift lever from the parkbrake; this
reveals a stirrup cable end. Attach the jack
handle to the cable loop, insert the screwdriver
shaft into the jack handle and pull to release the
parkbrake cable.
H5603L
Once the failure conditions have been

corrected, the parkbrake switch must be
applied to reinstate normal function.
If the vehicle is used in severe off-road
conditions such as wading, deep mud, etc,
additional maintenance and adjustment of the
parkbrake will be required. Consult your Land
Rover Retailer
197

DYNAMIC STABILITY
CONTROL (DSC)
In some driving conditions, to maximise

traction, it may be beneficial to deactivate DSC.
Such conditions include:
DSC helps to optimise dynamic stability, even

in critical driving situations. The system
controls dynamic stability when accelerating.
Additionally, it identifies unstable driving
behaviour, such as understeering and
oversteering and helps to keep the vehicle
under control by manipulating the engine
output and applying the brakes at individual
wheels. Some noise may be generated when
the brakes are applied. The system is ready to
operate each time the engine is started.
To rock the vehicle out of a hollow or out

of a soft surface.
Starting in deep snow or on a loose

surface.
Driving in deep sand.
Driving on tracks with deep longitudinal

ruts.
Driving through deep mud.
WARNING
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is unable to
compensate for driver misjudgement. It
remains the drivers responsibility to adopt a
suitable driving style in every driving
situation. Risks should never be taken on
account of the additional security afforded by
the DSC system.
Warning indicator
The indicator illuminates briefly as
a bulb and system check when the
starter switch is turned to position
II.
If the warning indicator flashes, the system is
active, regulating engine output and brake
forces.
H5846N
To deactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the

DSC switch on the instrument panel (the DSC
warning indicator will illuminate continuously).
Deactivating DSC has no effect on traction
control operation.

not extinguish when the DSC switch is pressed,
a fault has been detected in the system. Any
fault will deactivate DSC. Drive with care and
seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.
Note: Driving with DSC deactivated, may add

additional loads on the brakes - always drive
with DSC switched on if possible.
Deactivating DSC operation

Land Rover recommend that DSC is operational
in all normal driving conditions.
198

ELECTRONIC TRACTION
CONTROL (ETC)
Reactivating DSC
To reactivate DSC, press and briefly hold the
DSC switch on the instrument panel. DSC will
automatically reactivate when the engine is
started.
ETC is continuously available to boost vehicle

traction when one or more wheels has a
tendency to spin, while others do not. It
operates in conjunction with the DSC system.
DSC is reactivated automatically when the

program is changed on vehicles fitted with the
Terrain Response* system.
If a wheel is spinning, ETC automatically brakes

that wheel until it regains grip. This braking
activity allows the engine power to be
transmitted to the remaining wheels. Some
noise may be generated when the brakes are
applied.
Warning indicator
A fault with the ETC system is
indicated by illumination of the
amber DSC warning indicator.
This could also indicate that the DSC has been
manually deactivated, see INDICATOR
GROUPING, 108.
not extinguish when the DSC lever is pressed, a
fault has been detected in the system. Any fault
will deactivate ETC. Drive with care and seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.
199

HILL DESCENT CONTROL*

Hill Descent Control (HDC) operates in
conjunction with the anti-lock braking system
to provide greater control in off-road situations
particularly when descending severe gradients.
HDC may be used in D, R and CommandShift
1 in HIGH range and in D, R and all
CommandShift gears in LOW range. When in
D, the vehicle will automatically select the
most appropriate gear. The vehicle should not
be driven with the HDC active in N neutral.
Note: If Terrain Response is fitted, some of its
program/range combinations will activate HDC
automatically.
HDC can be selected at speeds below 80 km/h
(50 mph). Once the vehicle speed reduces
below 50 km/h (30 mph), the green lamp will
illuminate continuously, and full HDC function
will be active. If the vehicle speed exceeds 80
km/h (50 mph), HDC will deselect and the green
HDC indicator will extinguish.
H5606L
To select HDC
Press and release the switch (arrowed) to
select HDC. Press and release again to deselect.
If HDC is already selected and vehicle speed

rises above 50 km/h (30 mph) in HIGH range,
HDC function is suspended and the green HDC
indicator will flash. A message will also appear
in the message display center.
The green information indicator will extinguish.

If HDC is deselected when HDC is operating, the
system fades out, allowing the vehicle to
gradually increase in speed.
When used in LOW range, HDC controls the
vehicle speed more aggressively. Use LOW
range gears when steep descents are to be
attempted.
Note: HDC is automatically deselected if the
vehicle ignition is switched off for more than 6
hours.
200

Hill Descent Control in action
HDC should be used in conjunction with an
appropriate gear selection, see BASIC
OFF-ROAD TECHNIQUES, 239.
To increase the descent speed, press and hold

the + switch. The vehicle speed at the point of
switch release will become the new descent
speed. Alternatively, the descent speed can be
adjusted by tapping the - or + switches. Each
press of the switch will adjust the descent
speed by approximately 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph).
During a hill descent, if engine braking is

insufficient to control the vehicle speed, HDC
automatically operates the brakes to slow the
vehicle and maintain a speed relative to the
selected gear range and the accelerator pedal
position.
Note: Each gear has a predefined minimum

descent speed.
Note: The descent speed will only increase if
the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the
vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is
reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the +
switch may result in no speed increase.
While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed,

descent speeds can be varied using the
steering-wheel-mounted cruise control + and
- switches, where fitted. To reduce the descent
speed, press and hold the - switch. The vehicle
speed at the point of switch release will become
the new descent speed.
When driving off-road, HDC can be

permanently selected to ensure that control is
maintained. ABS and traction control are still
fully operational and will assist if the need
arises.
Note: With HDC selected, gear changes can be
carried out in the normal way.
1
2
If the brake pedal is depressed when HDC is

active, HDC is overridden and the brakes will
perform as normal (a pulsation might be felt
through the brake pedal). If the brake pedal is
then released, HDC will recommence operating
at the speed at which the brakes were released.
3
4
In extreme circumstances, the HDC system

may cause brake temperatures to exceed their
preset limits. If this occurs, HDC
TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE SYSTEM
COOLING will be displayed in the message
center. HDC will then fade out and become
temporarily inactive. On vehicles not fitted with
a message centre, the HDC amber warning
indicator will flash HDC will not be available
until the brakes reach an acceptable
temperature, at which time the warning
message will disappear from the message
center and HDC will, if required, resume
operating.
H5599L
201

If a fault is detected in the HDC system, HDC
FAULT SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE will appear in
the display or the amber HDC warning indicator
will illuminate if no message center is fitted. If
the fault is detected while the system is active,
HDC will then fade out. Do not attempt a steep
descent when HDC is unavailable or use a very
low gear and/or the footbrake. If a fault has
been detected, consult your Land Rover
Retailer at the earliest opportunity.
HDC fade-out
HDC fade-out gradually decreases the HDC
function with the effect that the rate of hill
descent will increase. HDC will be disabled
completely once the descent is complete.
If required (e.g. the angle of the descent levels
out significantly), fade-out may be achieved
deliberately by deselecting HDC while the
system is operating.
HDC Information indicator - GREEN
If HDC is selected and the operating conditions
are met, the indicator will illuminate
continuously.
If the indicator flashes while HDC is active, HDC
operating conditions are not met.
HDC Warning indicator - AMBER
If a fault with the HDC system is detected, the
HDC warning indicator (amber) will illuminate
or HDC FAULT SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE will
appear in the message center*.
If the brake temperatures reach a predefined
limit, the HDC warning indicator (amber) will
flash until the system has cooled.
202
Air Suspension
Air Suspension
AIR SUSPENSION
The air suspension system maintains the
correct vehicle height by controlling the
quantity of air in the vehicles air springs.
55mm
Unless stated otherwise, height changes may

only be made while the engine is running and
the driver and passenger doors are closed.
0mm
When the air suspension system lifts the

vehicle, it normally uses compressed air stored
in its reservoir. The suspension will rise much
more slowly if this reservoir is depleted due to
repeated raising and lowering of the
suspension.
50mm
H5755G
Access height can be selected at any time, but

the system response will depend on the
vehicles speed:
On-road Height
The normal height for the vehicle.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h

(12 mph), the suspension will wait for up to
one minute for the vehicle to slow down. If
the vehicle does not slow down to below
20 km/h (12 mph) within this time, the
Access height request will be cancelled.
Note: If Terrain Response is fitted, some of its

programs/range combinations will adjust
suspension height automatically
If the vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h

(12 mph), the suspension will move to a
part-lowered height and remain at this
height for up to one minute. If the vehicle
does not slow down to 8 km/h (5 mph)
within this time, the Access height request
will be cancelled.
If the vehicle speed is lower than 8 km/h

(5 mph), the suspension will be lowered to
Access height immediately.
Access Height
This is 50 mm (1.9 in.) lower than On-road
height. It provides easier entry, exit and loading
of the vehicle.
Access height may be selected up to 40

seconds after the ignition is turned off,
provided that the drivers door has not been
opened within this time.
Off-road Height
This is 55 mm (2 in.) higher than On-road
height. It provides improved ground clearance
and approach, departure and break-over
angles, see DIMENSIONS, 341.
Off-road height can be selected at any speed up
to 40km/h (24 mph). When the system is at
Off-road height, the system will automatically
select On-road height if the vehicle speed
exceeds 50 km/h (30 mph).
203
Air Suspension
WARNING
WARNING
The driver should ensure that the vehicle is

clear of obstacles and people before lowering
the vehicle. Remember that, for example, the
clearance under the floor and bumpers, and
in the wheel arches, will be 105 mm (4.1 in.)
less at Access height than at Off-road height.
The handset will operate effectively from

inside the vehicle. It is therefore important to
keep it out of reach of children at all times.
When operating the handset from inside the
passenger compartment, ensure that the
underside of the vehicle has been checked for
obstructions before lowering, and that a
responsible adult has been posted outside the
vehicle to supervise the lowering process.
The suspension will automatically rise from

Access height when the vehicle speed exceeds
10 km/h (6 mph).
Care should be taken with all suspension

height changes when a trailer is attached to
the vehicle.
If Access height was selected directly from

Off-road height, the system will return to
Off-road height when the vehicle speed exceeds
10 km/h (6 mph). Otherwise the system will lift
the suspension to On-road height.
Messages
When a message center is fitted to the vehicle,
messages relating to the air suspension system
may be displayed.
Crawl (Locked at Access Height)

This mode enables the vehicle to be driven at
low speeds at Access height to give increased
roof clearance in low car parks, etc.
For an explanation of those messages , see

MAIN MESSAGE CENTER, 95.
Crawl can be selected when the vehicle speed is

below 35 km/h (22 mph). When the vehicle is in
Crawl, On-road height will be selected
automatically if the vehicle speed exceeds
40 km/h (24 mph).
Remote Operation
The remote handset is programmable to give a
range of functions, see LAND ROVER
BUTTON, 36. If the vehicles remote handset
has been configured to operate the air
suspension, height may be controlled remotely
to assist in loading the vehicle or a trailer
attachment.
The suspension height can be set anywhere
between Off-road height and Access height.
Normal height control will resume when the
vehicle is driven away.
Note: Remote operation is disabled when the
vehicle is moving.
204
Air Suspension
Using the Control
A flashing symbol (2) or (7) indicates that the

system is in a waiting state or shows that it will
automatically override the drivers choice if
speed criteria are exceeded.
Selecting Access Height

If Access height is selected above 20 km/h
(12 mph), symbols (5) and (7) will flash while
the system waits for the vehicle to slow down.
3
4
When the vehicle slows down to 20 km/h

(12 mph), symbol (4) will extinguish as the
system goes to the part-lowered height.
Symbol (5) will be lit and symbol (7) will
continue to flash.
5
6
H5608G
When the vehicle slows down to 8 km/h

(5 mph), symbols (5) and (7) will be lit. When
Access height is reached, symbol (7) will
extinguish.
1. Raise/lower Switch
2. Raising Symbol
3. Off-road Symbol
4. On-road Symbol
5. Access Symbol
6. Lock Symbol
7. Lowering Symbol
Suspension Heights
The raise/lower switch (1) is used to move up
or down through the suspension heights.
Symbols (3), (4) or (5) will be lit to show the
height selected. A symbol indicating the
suspension height will also be displayed in the
message center* when Off-road, Access or
Crawl is selected.
Symbols (2) or (7) will be lit to show the
direction of movement. They extinguish when
the height change movement is completed.
If a height change is requested that is not
allowed, such as attempting to raise the height
of the vehicle with the engine not running,
symbols (2) and (7) will flash twice and a chime
will sound. A message will be displayed on the
message center*.
205
Air Suspension
Selecting and Cancelling Crawl (Locked at
Access Height)
Automatic Height Change Warnings
1
3
4
5
6
H5610G
H5609G
When the suspension is at Off-road height,

Access or Crawl, the suspension height will
change automatically when vehicle speed
exceeds predetermined levels.
When the suspension is at On-road or Access

height and the vehicle speed is below 35 km/h
(22 mph), press the raise/lower switch (1) in
the down direction for one second. Symbol (5)
and (6) will be lit to confirm the selection.
When the suspension is at Off-road height or

Crawl, it warns the driver that the vehicle is
approaching a speed threshold. A chime will
sound, a message will be displayed on the
message center* and the On-road symbol (4)
and either (2) or (7) will flash.
Crawl can be cancelled manually by pressing

the raise/lower switch in the up direction for
one second. Symbol (6) will extinguish.
Note: When Crawl is cancelled, the suspension
will rise to On-road height if the vehicle speed is
greater than 10 km/h (6 mph).
The Off-road height speed warning is shown

above. If the vehicle slows down, the warning
will disappear.
Selecting Access Height Directly from

Off-road Height
When the suspension is at Off-road height,
press switch (1) down, then press it again
before symbol (7) goes out.
The system will remember to return the
suspension to Off-road height automatically if
the vehicle is driven above 10 km/h (6 mph).
206
Air Suspension
Door Open Override
If a door is opened during a height change while
the vehicle is at rest, the height change will
stop.
Extended Mode
If the vehicle is grounded and traction control is
induced, the system automatically pumps air
into the air springs to raise the vehicle clear of
the obstruction. Extended mode is activated
automatically and cannot be selected manually.
1
3
4
4
5
H5611G
The symbol for the target height (3, 4 or 5) will

remain lit and the lifting symbol (2) or the
lowering symbol (7) will flash.
H5612G
When Extended mode is activated, symbol (3)

will flash if the suspension is above Off-road
height. Symbols (3) and (4) will flash if the
suspension is between Off-road and On-road
heights. Symbols (4) and (5) will flash if the
suspension is between On-road and Access
heights. A message will be displayed on the
message center*.
The height change will resume if all of the doors

are closed within 90 seconds.
To exit Extended mode, either press the

switch (1) briefly up or down, or drive the
vehicle at a speed greater than 20 km/h (12
mph).
207
Air Suspension
Suspension Freeze
If the system is attempting to change the
suspension height and it detects that the
suspension is prevented from moving, the
system will freeze all movements.
Remote Operation
This can be caused by attempting to lower the

vehicle onto an obstacle or attempting to lift the
vehicle against an obstruction.
The symbols behave in the same way described

in Extended mode and the same message will
be displayed on the message center.* As in
Extended mode, to exit this freeze state, either
press the switch (1) up or down, or drive the
vehicle at a speed greater than 20 km/h
(12 mph).
2
3
H5613G
The handset can be configured to operate the

air suspension, see Customer programmable
button, 36. Remove the starter key, turn on the
hazard warning lamps and close all doors.
Remote operation is not possible unless this is
done.
Press and hold the Land Rover button (3), then
press the Lock button (1) to raise the vehicle, or
the Unlock button (2) to lower the vehicle.
Movement will stop when any button is
released.
The height will initially change slowly but, after
three seconds, the speed will increase. While
the height is changing, a symbol on the
raise/lower switch will be lit according to the
direction of movement.
If the starting height is above or below On-road
height, movement will stop when On-road
height is reached. Further movement can be
achieved by releasing the buttons and pressing
them again.
208
Terrain Response
Terrain Response
TERRAIN RESPONSETM SYSTEM*
The suspension and drive systems comprising

Terrain Response are:
The Terrain Response system is permanently

active, continuously providing benefits in
traction and vehicle control. These can be
further enhanced for specific on- and off-road
driving conditions by the selection of special
programs, using one simple driver interface.
Engine management
Gearbox management
Intelligent differential control
Dynamic stability, traction control and HDC

systems
Air suspension
The system will provide a variable throttle

response, ranging from very cautious for
slippery conditions (where a large pedal
movement has only a small effect on engine
power) to very responsive, for example, for
sand, where engine power is allowed to rise
more quickly.
This further extends the breadth of off-road
capability of Land Rover vehicles. In addition,
Terrain Response offers control of systems that
have previously not been manually controllable.
Note: Since each Terrain Response special
program uses the optimum settings of each
drive component - throttle response,
suspension, transmission, etc. - relative to the
terrain being driven over, it follows that
changing from one special program to another
brings in a different set of criteria.
H5614L
This allows the driver to tell the vehicle what

sort of terrain is to be driven over. Based on the
selected special program, the system optimises
the vehicle set-up for the prevailing conditions,
providing the optimum in traction, vehicle
control and vehicle composure.
This means that, for instance, the engine revs

produced by the current throttle position might
increase or decrease slightly in the new
program, or the suspension could change
height. The changes are not dramatic, but are
noticeable.
The Terrain Response special programs

automatically bring in changes in vehicle drive
and suspension systems that have until now
been only individually and manually
controllable by the driver.
To obtain the maximum benefits from the

system, it is suggested that you first try it out in
circumstances where any distraction will not
affect other road users.
209
Terrain Response
Terrain Response is designed to benefit the
driver, regardless of the level of off-road driving
experience. The enhanced traction system, with
the control of many system parameters through
one simple driver input, coupled with specific
advice from the message center, will aid drivers
with limited off-road experience. Additionally,
the system can back-up the skills of
experienced drivers, who will also benefit from
the wider performance envelope available
through the special programs.
Note: Special programs should be engaged

pro-actively - before starting to drive in
particular conditions. They are not intended as
a means of extracting a vehicle that has been
driven into difficulties.
The system has been designed to instil
confidence regarding choice of special
program, despite the fact that conditions
associated with each program are distinctly
different. However, the vehicle will be very
capable under all circumstances, even when no
special program is selected, as some
sub-systems will re-act to the conditions where
possible. In case of any uncertainties about the
most appropriate special program selection, it
will be best to leave the system in Terrain
Response General program until terrain
conditions become more distinct and a
program choice can be made with more
confidence.
Using Terrain Response

The Terrain Response system is always active
and can not be switched off. When the vehicle
is started the system will normally start in its
General program. Using the correct special
program will provide benefits in how the vehicle
can be driven over different surfaces or
terrains. It is recommended that a special
program be engaged whenever driving
conditions could become difficult.
The system is of particular use when driving

off-road, but, even here, it should be used
pro-actively and not be used as a means of
retrieving control.
Depending on the terrain, it may be beneficial

for the transmission to change gear under
different speed and load conditions. Each
special program will provide the most
appropriate gear-shift points for the terrain,
including the most appropriate gear to set off in
(i.e., second, HIGH range, or third, LOW range,
in Grass-Gravel-Snow or first, low range, when
in Rock Crawl).
If a Terrain Response special program has been

selected, then the transmission can be left in
D. If descending a slippery slope,
CommandShift 1 or 2 should be considered.
WARNING
When towing, the automatic vehicle height
rise associated with using the system in LOW
range will be automatically prevented by the
system. This will be indicated by a text
message. However, this function relies on the
fitting of a Land Rover-approved towing
electrical socket. Failure to fit a Land
Rover-approved towing electrical socket, or
to follow these guidelines, may lead to the
vehicle being raised to off-road height even
with a trailer attached.
In addition to the electronically controlled

center differential, fitted to the vehicle as
standard, a vehicle fitted with Terrain Response
may also be optionally equipped with an
electronically controlled rear differential. The
amount of slip allowed in the electronically
controlled differentials will be optimised
continuously, both from the point of view of
traction and vehicle stability. Depending on the
Terrain Response program selected, the control
of the differentials will vary to provide the
optimum settings.
210
Terrain Response
Driver over-ride options
All systems will be set to optimum parameters
for the terrain conditions reflected in the choice
of control program. Two of the systems
controlled by Terrain Response:
Air Suspension
may also be operated independently by the

driver.
In some special programs, the Terrain
Response system will switch on HDC and in low
range the system will automatically move the
suspension to off-road height.
WARNING
This height increase will start regardless of
whether the vehicle is moving or not.
Both the HDC and ride height automatic
selections can be cancelled by the driver at any
time. Conversely, if HDC or a specific ride
height has not been automatically selected by
the system, the driver can always choose to
operate it as normal at any time.
Whether the HDC or ride height options are
being brought in automatically by the system,
or manually by the driver, the changes of state
will be confirmed through the message display
and by the individual system information
indicators. Use of the system in the special
programs, particularly in low range, may
prompt some driving advice and warnings as
well as additional information to be displayed
on the message center.
Note: Transmission gear selection can be
overridden by using the CommandShift
function on the gearbox to lock the vehicle in a
particular gear.
211
Terrain Response
Operation
H5616G
A rotary knob just behind the gear lever is

rotated to select the required special program.
When the selector reaches either end of the
selection range, it can be turned further, but
doing so has no effect.
H5618G
If the Mud-Ruts, Sand or Rock Crawl special

programs are selected when the ignition is
switched off, then the system will remember for
approximately six hours which program was
selected, and return to that program once the
ignition is switched back on.
In addition to the Terrain Response General

setting, four special programs are available:
Grass/gravel/snow (also includes ice)
Mud/ruts
Sand
Rock Crawl
The system indicates, via the message center,

that the previously selected special program is
still selected. After more than six hours, the
system will automatically revert back to the
General program (Special programs off).
When the ignition is turned on, the graphics

around the control knob are illuminated, with
the active program highlighted in amber. The
brightness of the graphics night illumination is
controlled as part of the instruments
illumination control; the brightness of the
amber lighting is high or low depending on the
use of the vehicles headlamps.
If a Special Program is active, the Special
Program symbol will also be displayed on the
instrument pack message center.
212
Terrain Response
Terrain Response General
When the Terrain Response
special programs are off, the
system will be in its General
program. This will be indicated by the above
symbol being displayed briefly on the message
center. Sub-systems will adapt to the prevailing
terrain conditions and select control settings
based on the conditions sensed.
Grass-Gravel-Snow
Use this program for surfaces
where the underlying base is fairly
firm but a coating of other material
gives a tendency to slip. The coating can be
water, slime, grass, snow or loose gravel, shale
or pebbles, or even a thin coating of sand. This
program should also be selected in icy
conditions.
This program setting is compatible with all onand off-road terrain conditions. Normal
conditions in which it is not necessary to select
a specific program include driving on surfaces
that closely match a hard road surface. Dry
cobbles, Tarmac or even wooden planks are all
included in the scope which consists of hard
supportive surfaces with no loose coating of
water, dust or similar material.
In this special program the Terrain Response

systems will select settings to give the best
traction, handling and vehicle control for
predominantly slippery conditions. Hill Descent
Control (see HILL DESCENT CONTROL*, 200)
will be engaged automatically in low range, but
can be manually deselected.
In slippery conditions it is often beneficial to
start off in a higher gear than usual, for
example, second gear in HIGH range or third
gear in LOW range.
It is recommended that a special program be

deselected once the specific conditions for its
use no longer prevail. This is done by turning
the selector knob back to the General program
position.
For use of the vehicle with snow chains fitted,

see SNOW CHAINS, 273.
When a special program is deselected, all

vehicle systems will be returned to their normal
control settings. The one exception is HDC,
which will remain active if it was manually
selected previously. Also, as a precaution, the
vehicle will change from raised to normal ride
height only when moving.
Note: When in deep snow, if the vehicle is

struggling for forward traction or is stuck, then
switching off Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
may be an advantage. If DSC is switched off,
then it must be switched back on as soon as the
difficulty is overcome.
213
Terrain Response
Mud-Ruts
Sand
Use this program when traversing

ground that is not only muddy or
deeply rutted but possibly soft and
uneven to the point of demanding maximum
axle displacement. This unevenness can also be
that brought about by sizeable wooden debris
in the form of roots, brushwood, small logs,
etc.
Use this program to drive on soft

and predominantly dry, yielding
sandy ground, such as dry
beaches, dunes and sand deserts. Also
consider using this program for deep gravel.
The Sand special program uses the control
settings and software logic best suited to
driving on sand, with the driver-override option
as before.
This acts like the previous program, except that

it selects settings for the individual systems
that optimise traction and vehicle control for
muddy/rutted driving conditions, with driver
over-ride options as before. The program is
available in HIGH and LOW range, but LOW
range is recommended.
In instances where the sand is damp or wet and

soggy, the conditions are better addressed by
the use of mud/ruts special program.
Where the sand is extremely soft and dry and of
a depth that allows the wheels to sink well into
it, there may be additional benefit in switching
off the Dynamic Stability Control, see
Deactivating DSC operation, 198.
It is anticipated that this program will usually be

used in low range. If not, the driver will be
prompted to consider selecting low range. If the
Mud-Ruts program and low range are selected
together, the vehicles ride height will be raised
automatically.
214
Terrain Response
Rock Crawl
If an inappropriate special program is

attempted to be selected - such as choosing
Rock Crawl while in HIGH range - the symbol of
that program will flash amber, an audio warning
will sound, and the instrument pack message
center will advise that the chosen special
program is unavailable and will suggest
corrective action to be taken.
Use this program to cross wet or

dry, solid, unyielding ground,
such as clusters of boulders,
which demands high levels of road-wheel
displacement and careful vehicle control. This
program would also be used for crossing river
beds strewn with large rock features
submerged below water.
If, after 60 seconds, the requirements have not

been met, the warnings will cease and the
message center will show which program
remains active.
Unlike the other options, Rock Crawl is only

selectable in LOW range. If selection is
attempted in HIGH range, the special program
selection will NOT be accepted and the driver
will be prompted to select LOW range. This
special program will utilise system control
settings to optimise the vehicle suspension and
traction system for the conditions, which are
likely to require extreme suspension
articulation and good low-speed control.
Should the system become partly inoperable

for any reason, it may not be possible to select
certain special programs and a warning will be
given when selection of an affected program is
attempted. If the system should become totally
inoperable, all of the control program symbols
will be switched off and the message center will
display a text message.
The air suspension system provides an
automatic levelling function (see AIR
SUSPENSION, 203). In circumstances where
the system is used in LOW range, it is most
likely that mobility and vehicle composure
would benefit from increased ground clearance.
When a special program requires increased air

suspension height, the system will
automatically select it, unless it suspects that a
trailer is attached because an electric load is
seen on the trailer socket.
A message will be displayed on the message
center.
MESSAGES
Messages relating to the Terrain Response
system are displayed on the vehicles message
center.
Caution: Selection of a wholly inappropriate

special program for the prevailing terrain
conditions will not endanger the driver or
immediately damage the vehicle. However, if
continued, such an action will impair the
vehicles response to those conditions and
will reduce the durability of the suspension
and drive systems.
Inappropriate special program selection
For an explanation of those messages, see

MAIN MESSAGE CENTER, 95.
215
Towing
Towing
H5620G
TOWING
This is particularly important when towing twin

axle trailers!
The torque ranges of Land Rover engines allow

maximum-weight loads to be pulled smoothly
from standstill and reduce gear changing on
hills or rough terrain.
The trailer should be level with the ground

when loaded.
The height of the drawbar hitch point

should be set so that the trailer is level
when connected to the loaded vehicle.
WARNING
To preserve the vehicles handling and
stability, only fit towing accessories that have
been designed and approved by Land Rover.
Note: Air suspension vehicles should be set

with the engine running.
Points to remember:
DO NOT use lashing eyes or vehicle recovery

towing eyes to tow a trailer. Use of the towing
eyes for purposes other than their designed
intention could result in damage or injury.
It is the drivers responsibility to ensure that the
towing vehicle and trailer are loaded and
balanced so that the combination is stable
when in motion. When preparing your vehicle
for towing, pay attention to any instructions
provided by the trailer manufacturer as well as
to the information that follows.
An equalising or other form of weight
distributing hitch should NOT be used with your
vehicle.
When calculating the laden weight of the

trailer, remember to include the weight of
the trailer PLUS the load.
The recommended trailer tongue weight

plus the combined weight of the vehicle's
load-carrying area and rear seat
passengers must never exceed the
specified maximum rear axle load (see
TOWING WEIGHTS, 342).
Before balancing the combination on

vehicles equipped with air suspension,
ensure that:
All doors are closed.
The engine is running.
Balancing the combination

To ensure optimum stability, it is essential that
the trailer adopts a level aspect. In other words,
the trailer must be level with the ground, with
the towing hitch and trailer drawbar set at the
same height (note the illustration at the top of
the page).
On-road ride height is selected.

This ensures that the towing hitch is at the
correct height.
216
Towing
Where the load can be divided between

trailer and tow vehicle, loading more
weight into the vehicle will generally
improve the stability of the combination.
WARNING
In the interest of safety, the gross vehicle
weight, maximum rear axle weight,
maximum trailer weight and tow hitch load
(tongue weight) must not be exceeded.
Exceeding allowable vehicle and axle loads
will increase the risk of tire and suspension
failure, increase vehicle brake stopping
distance and adversely affect vehicle
handling and stability. This may result in a
crash or vehicle rollover.
Towing regulations vary from country to

country. Always ensure national
regulations governing towing weights and
speed limits are observed (refer to the
relevant national motoring organisation for
information). The vehicles maximum
permissible towed weight refers to its
design limitations and NOT to any specific
territorial restriction (see TOWING
WEIGHTS, 342).
Tongue weight
WARNING
Note: When towing do not exceed 100 km/h

(60 mph), or 80 km/h (50 mph) when the
compact spare wheel* is in use, see WHEELS
& TIRES, 337.
The tongue weight plus the combined weight

of the vehicle's load carrying area and rear
seat passengers must never exceed the
specified maximum rear axle load (see
TOWING WEIGHTS, 342).
Gear range selection

To avoid overheating the gearbox, it is not
advisable to tow heavy trailer loads at speeds of
less than 32 km/h (21 mph) using the main
gearbox in HIGH range. Select LOW range
instead.
Trailer socket
The vehicles electrical system is configured to
support all towing requirements and the
electrical socket fitted will comply with legal
requirements for the specific territory.
Vehicle weights
When loading a vehicle to its maximum (gross
vehicle weight), ensure that axle loading does
not exceed the permitted maximum values. It is
your responsibility to limit the vehicle load in
such a way that neither the maximum axle loads
nor the gross vehicle weight are exceeded.
All towing circuits are independently fused in a

satellite fuse box located in the lower loadspace
trim panel, see Tow hitch fuses, 314.
217
Towing
Tyre pressures:
Tongue weight:
Breakaway cable
or secondary
coupling
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS

Increase rear pressures of towing vehicle to those for Maximum gross
vehicle weight conditions, see WHEELS & TIRES, 337. Ensure trailer tyres are
at recommended pressures.
If the vehicle is loaded to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), the tongue weight
is limited to 150 kg (330 lb.). If a greater tongue weight is necessary (up to
250 kg (550 lb.) maximum), vehicle load should be reduced to ensure the
GVW and rear axle weights are not exceeded - see VEHICLE WEIGHTS, 340,
for further information.
A breakaway cable or secondary coupling MUST be attached. If the
trailer/caravan is fitted with brakes, it is usual for an attached breakaway cable
to operate the brakes in the event of the coupling becoming detached. See
your trailer manufacturers literature. If your trailer does not have a breakaway
cable, a secondary coupling must be attached. Use a suitable point on the
towing bracket to securely attach the coupling. It is not advisable to loop
cables or couplings around the neck of the tow ball as they could slide off.
Caution: For all of the towing conditions

described, it is important that the following
points are observed:
All loads in the vehicle should be

distributed as far forward as possible.
The maximum Gross Vehicle Weight must

not be exceeded, see VEHICLE WEIGHTS,
340.
The maximum individual axle weights

must not be exceeded, see VEHICLE
WEIGHTS, 340
Changes between high and low range

should not be made while the vehicle is
on the move.
Total trailer weight and tongue load can

be measured with platform scales found
at highway weighing stations, building
supply companies, etc.
The loading capacities and conditions for

coil sprung and self levelled vehicles are
different. Read the following section on
permitted loading conditions for full
details.
218
Towing
TRAILER HITCH*
TOW BAR
The optional trailer hitch receiver is rated as a

Class lll. When selecting a drawbar for the
receiver, the following dimensions must be
adhered to:
Your vehicle is fitted with a towing housing

which will accept a detachable tow bar.
A. The maximum recommended drawbar

length is 229 mm (9 in.).
B. The maximum recommended drawbar rise
height is 70 mm (2.75 in.).
C. The minimum recommended drawbar rise
height is 19 mm (0.75 in.).
9"
H5623N
3"
4
H5791N
Note: A drawbar of 228 mm (9 in.) length with

a rise of 38 mm (1.5 in.) is recommended for
use with the Land Rover approved towing hitch.
Consult your retailer for the most up-to-date
information.
219
Towing
Detachable tow bar stowage
H5627N
Seven-seater models - the tow bar is stowed on

the left-hand side of the rear loadspace, behind
an access cover.
H5625N
Five-seater models - the tow bar is stowed

under an access hatch in the rear loadspace
floor.
220
Towing
Detachable tow bar
H5629N
Fitting the detachable tow bar
2. The tow bar can only be installed when the

green locking lever is in the unlocked
position.
WARNING
The tow bar is heavy. Care must be taken
when handling it.
3. Insert the tow bar into the mounting and

push firmly upwards until the tow bar locks
into position.
1. Remove the protective cover from the tow

bar mounting.
4. The red marker should be completely

covered by the green locking lever.
Note: The protective cover should be

stowed in the tow bar stowage area, while
the tow bar is installed.
5. A key is provided to prevent theft from the

vehicle. Turn the key anticlockwise to lock
the tow bar. Remove the key and store in a
safe place.
221
Towing
WARNING
When handling the tow bar, hold the bottom of
the component. Locking into position occurs
automatically and causes the locking lever to
rotate under spring pressure.
The tow bar must be locked in position before
towing. The tow bar can only be locked if it is
installed correctly into the tow bar mounting.
It is advised that the tow bar be removed and
stored within the vehicle stowage when not in
use.
222
Towing
Removing the tow bar
2
3
H5631N
3. Carefully lower the tow bar and place it in

its stowage area and fully secure it.
WARNING
The tow bar is heavy. Care must be taken
when handling it.
4. Replace the protective towing cover in the

tow bar mounting. Press the bottom of the
cover to fix it in position.
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to

unlock the tow bar.
2. To remove the tow bar, pull the handle
outwards and rotate the handle
anticlockwise until a click is heard. The
marker on the handle should show red.
223
Towing Eyes
Towing Eyes
TOWING EYES
WARNING
The towing eyes at the front and rear of the
vehicle are designed for on-road vehicle
recovery purposes only and must NOT be used
to tow a trailer or caravan.
Use of the towing eyes for purposes other than
their designed intention could result in
damage or injury.
Front Towing Eye
A single towing eye, set behind a removable
panel in the lower front bumper, is provided at
the front of the vehicle for on-road recovery.
Before driving off-road, remove the panel from
the lower front bumper as a precaution against
accidental loss.
Removing the panel
Rotate each of the fasteners through 90o with a
coin (or something similar) to loosen the cover.
Lower the top edge and then pull the cover
forward to remove it.
H5633G
H5634G
224
Towing Eyes
Rear Towing Eye
The towing eye provided at the rear of the
vehicle can be used for towing your vehicle or
towing another vehicle in recovery situations.
Refitting the panel

Offer up the panel and ensure that the two lugs
on the bottom edge engage with the holes in the
body panel.
Tighten the fasteners by turning each clockwise
through 90o.
H5636G
H5745G
225
Towing Eyes
Refitting the rear cover
Offer up the cover and ensure that the four lugs
on the top edge engage with the holes in the
body panel.
Removing the rear cover

Rotate each of the fasteners through 90o with a
coin (or something similar) to release the lower
edge. The cover can then be rotated to release
the hooks at the top.
Tighten the fasteners by turning each clockwise

through 90o.
H5746G
H5635G
226
Towing the Vehicle

TOWING FOR RECOVERY
This means that the vehicle should not be

towed
Towing the Vehicle
Caution: Under no circumstances must your

vehicle be towed with only two wheels in
contact with the ground. It must be towed with
all four wheels on the ground, recovered onto
a trailer, or have a combined wheel lift and
towing dolly arrangement to lift it clear of the
ground.
Note: Your vehicle has permanent four-wheel

drive and is fitted with a steering lock. The
following procedure must be carried out
carefully to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Leaving the starter switch in position I or II
for extended periods may drain the vehicle
battery.
Most vehicle recovery specialists will load your

vehicle onto a trailer - this is the recommended
method. However, if it is necessary to recover
the vehicle by towing with all four wheels on the
ground, use the following procedure:
1. Secure the towing attachment from the

recovery vehicle to the front towing eye
(see TOWING EYES, 224).
2. With the parkbrake applied, insert the
starter key and turn it to position II.
Towing the vehicle on four wheels
3. Apply the foot brake and place the auto

selector lever into the neutral position.
WARNING
ALWAYS adhere to the following procedure
when towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Failure to do so could result in
unintended vehicle movement or
unanticipated vehicle conditions.
4. Turn the starter switch to position l. Do

not turn the starter switch to position 0.
5. If required, the starter switch may be
turned to position II, to operate the brake
lamps and direction indicators.
When preparing to tow the vehicle on four

wheels, it is essential that neutral is selected
on the transmission. Before selecting neutral,
ensure that the parkbrake is applied and
properly secured.
6. Release the parkbrake before towing the

vehicle.
Caution: If, for any reason, power from the
battery is lost and the auto gearbox selector
cannot be placed in the neutral position, see
Emergency release from Park, 186.
DO NOT remove the key or turn the starter

switch to position 0 while the vehicle is in
motion, as this will lock the steering.
If the gearbox cannot be set in neutral, the

vehicle must not be towed under any
circumstances.
Without the engine running, the brake servo

and power steering pump cannot provide
assistance; greater effort will therefore be
required to operate the brake pedal and turn
the steering wheel. Longer stopping
distances will also be experienced.
If the rear electronic differential has failed

locked, the vehicle must not be towed under
any circumstances.
Caution: If the following conditions are met,

the vehicle may only be towed for a distance
of 50 km (30 miles) at a maximum speed of 50
km/h (30 mph).
227
Towing the Vehicle

After towing on four wheels
After towing, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parkbrake.
2. Turn the starter switch to position ll and
apply the foot brake.
3. Place the auto selector lever in the Park
position.
4. Turn the starter switch to position 0.
5. Remove the towing attachment and replace
the panel in the front bumper.
LASHING EYES
Pairs of lashing eyes are fixed to the underside
of the vehicle - at the front (to the rear of the
front wheels) and at the rear (either side of the
towbar attachment bracket). DO NOT secure
lashing hooks or trailer fixings to any other part
of the vehicle.
H5638G
Note: The front and rear lashing eyes are for

lashing only and must NOT be used for towing.
Caution: Once the vehicle is loaded onto the
trailer and if the vehicle electronics are
operational, the Electronic Air Suspension
(EAS) must be set to Access height. This
should be done BEFORE securing the vehicle
to the trailer.
H5637G
228
Load Carrying
Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS
A range of roof rack systems are available as
Land Rover approved accessories. For further
information about roof rack systems approved
for use with your vehicle and advice as to which
system would suit your requirements best,
please consult your Land Rover Retailer.
Always observe the following precautions:
Only fit roof racks that have been designed

for your vehicle. If in doubt, consult your
All loads should be evenly distributed, side

to side, with any weight bias towards the
front of the roof rack. system.
Ensure all loads are secured within the

periphery of the roof rack system.
WARNING
The MAXIMUM load for approved roof rack
systems is 75 kg (165 lb.) for normal road use
and 50 kg (110 lb.) off-road. The above
weights include the mass of the roof rack
system.
A loaded roof rack can reduce the stability of
the vehicle, particularly when cornering and
encountering cross winds.
Check to ensure that the roof rack and load are
secure after 50 km (30 miles) of any journey.
Driving off-road with a loaded roof rack is not
recommended. If it is necessary to stow
luggage on the roof rack while driving
off-road, all loads must be removed before
traversing side slopes.
229

XENON/HALOGEN LIGHTING*
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps return to

the central position and the units swivelling
capability is disabled.
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)

The headlamps on this system can be either:
a halogen high/low beam main lamp with a

fill-in halogen lamp alongside, or
a xenon bi-functional (high/low beam) with

a fill-in halogen lamp alongside
When the engine is started, the headlamps can

be seen to swivel as they go through a
self-calibration for a few seconds.
AFS is a new lighting system designed to give

the driver improved visibility under varying
driving conditions. It has two main
components: a position-controllable headlamp
unit and a static lamp.
Illustration A shows the light spread of a

vehicle not fitted with AFS; B shows that of one
fitted with the system.
Bi-functional xenon projector units
The main light source consists of bi-functional
(high and low beam) xenon projector units,
with a fill-in high beam halogen lamp
alongside.
The projector units can be swivelled left or right
to improve light spread on bends in the road.
They also react dynamically in the vertical plane
to the vehicles braking or acceleration to
maximise headlamp performance.
These units operate when the engine is running

and the master lighting switch is in position 3.
They will also operate with the master lighting
switch in position 4 (Auto)*, if the ambient light
has fallen below a preset level.
The system takes inputs from the vehicles road
speed and steering angle to determine the
amount of horizontal swivel. The amount of
swivel is highest at low - manoeuvring - speeds,
and reduces as speed increases.
At speeds up to 30 km/h (18 mph), only that
unit on the inside of the turn swivels.
H5918L
230
On-road Driving
On-road Driving
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING . . . . . . . . .233
WARMING UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
VEHICLE HEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
FUEL ECONOMY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
BREAKDOWN SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
231
232
On-road Driving
On-road Driving
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING
WARNING
Note: Power assistance is dependent on the

engine running. If the engine is not running, a
much greater effort will be required to steer the
vehicle.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.
Since these vehicles are designed to be
operated off-road, these vehicles have a
higher ground clearance and hence a higher
center of gravity. Such a feature has been
associated with an increased risk of vehicle
roll-over. An advantage associated with
higher ground clearance vehicles is a better
view of the road, allowing the driver to
anticipate problems. Another factor shown to
significantly increase roll-over risk is
unauthorized vehicle modifications such as
fitting incorrect specification tires (see
WHEELS & TIRES, 337), oversize tires, body
lifting, incorrect springs/dampers, incorrect
vehicle loading/trailer towing.
WARMING UP
In the interests of fuel economy, it is advisable
to drive the vehicle straight away, remembering
that harsh acceleration or labouring the engine
before the normal operating temperature has
been reached can damage the engine.
When the engine is cold, engine idle speeds will
be faster than normal. Under these
circumstances, use the foot brake to control the
vehicle until the engine is warm and running at
normal speed, and be aware of the need to take
additional care when manoeuvring the vehicle.
However, on-road crash data also indicates

that driver behaviour is a greater factor than a
high center of gravity in determining a
vehicle's overall roll-over rate. The single
most effective driver behaviour that can
reduce the risk of injury or death in all crashes
including roll-over, is to ALWAYS WEAR
YOUR SEAT BELT and to properly restrain all
child passengers in the rear seat in an
appropriate child safety seat. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a
seat belt.
VEHICLE HEIGHT
Caution: The overall height of your vehicle
exceeds that of ordinary passenger cars.
Always be aware of the height of your vehicle
and check the available headroom before
driving through low entrances. This is
particularly important if the vehicle is fitted
with a roof rack or if a sunroof is open.
233
On-road Driving
Other measures that can reduce the risk of
injury and death from vehicle crashes and
roll-over are:
Limit speed. Posted speed limits should

never be exceeded, and you should always
drive below these limits whenever traffic,
weather, road or other conditions dictate.
Always use your common sense and good
judgement.
Take curves at reasonable speeds, avoiding

unnecessary braking.
Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, road

and weather conditions. Avoid risk-taking
behaviour such as following too close,
rapid lane changing or abrupt manoeuvres.
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers

are going to make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do. Be ready for their
mistakes.
Avoid distractions such as cellular phone

calling, reading, eating, drinking or
reaching for items on the floor.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors

and flash your turn signal lights.
Always leave room for unexpected events

such as sudden braking.
Never operate your vehicle when you have

consumed alcohol, are sleepy or fatigued
or have taken any medication that affects
judgement, reflexes or alertness.
WARNING
Many vehicle roll-overs occur when a driver
attempts to bring a vehicle back onto the road
after some or all of the wheels drift onto the
shoulder of the road, especially when the
shoulder is unpaved. If you find yourself in
such a situation, do not initiate any sharp or
abrupt steering and/or braking manoeuvres to
re-enter the roadway. Instead, let the vehicle
slow down as much as safely possible before
attempting to re-enter the roadway and keep
your wheels as straight as possible while
re-entering the roadway.
234
On-road Driving
FUEL ECONOMY
BREAKDOWN SAFETY
Fuel consumption is influenced by two major

factors:
If a breakdown occurs while travelling:
How your vehicle is maintained.
How you drive your vehicle.
Wherever possible, consistent with road

safety and traffic conditions, the vehicle
should be moved off the main
thoroughfare, preferably onto the shoulder
as far as possible. If a breakdown occurs
on a motorway, pull well over to the inside
of the hard shoulder.
Switch on hazard lights.
If possible, position a warning triangle or a

flashing amber light at an appropriate
distance from the vehicle to warn other
traffic of the breakdown, (note the legal
requirements of some countries).
Consider evacuating passengers through

the doors facing away from traffic, to a safe
area away from the vehicle, as a precaution
in case your vehicle is accidentally struck
by another one.
Remember the breakdown safety code
To obtain optimum fuel economy, it is essential

that your vehicle is maintained in accordance
with the manufacturer's service schedule.
Items such as the condition of the air cleaner
element, tire pressures and wheel alignment
will have a significant effect on fuel
consumption. But, above all, the way in which
you drive is most important. The following hints
may help you to obtain better value from your
motoring:
Avoid unnecessary, short, start-stop

journeys.
Avoid fast starts by accelerating gently and

smoothly from rest.
Do not drive in the lower gears for longer

than necessary.
Decelerate gently and avoid sudden and

heavy braking.
Anticipate obstructions and adjust your

speed accordingly well in advance.
When stationary in traffic, select neutral to

improve fuel economy and air conditioning
performance.
235
236
Off-road Driving
Off-road Driving
BASIC OFF-ROAD TECHNIQUES . . . . . . . .239
AFTER DRIVING OFF-ROAD . . . . . . . . . . .242
Off-road Driving Techniques

BEFORE YOU DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
237
238
Off-road Driving
BASIC OFF-ROAD TECHNIQUES
Off-road Driving
These basic driving techniques are an

introduction to the art of off-road driving and do
not necessarily provide the information needed
to successfully cope with every single off-road
situation, including off-road recovery
techniques.
Always ensure that seat belts are worn for

personal protection while driving on-road
or off-road.
DO NOT drive off-road alone or without

letting someone know where you are
going and when you plan to return.
Safety Tips
We strongly recommend that owners who

intend to drive off-road frequently should seek
as much additional information and practical
experience as possible.
Before driving off-road it is important that you
check the condition of the wheels and tires and
that the tire pressures are correct. Worn or
incorrectly inflated tires will adversely affect the
performance, stability and safety of the vehicle.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare wheel* and you need to fit it while driving
off-road, then you must proceed with extra
caution.
It is good practice to anticipate possible
problems and be prepared for them. Extra
equipment should include, at the very least, a
shovel, a tow rope, local maps and a flashlight.
Personal safety considerations should suggest
good maps.
Always wear a seat belt for personal

protection in all driving situations.
Keep all windows closed during off-road

driving to prevent ingress of dirt and water
and to prevent tree branches from injuring
occupants.
DO NOT drive if the fuel level is low undulating ground and steep inclines could
cause fuel starvation to the engine and
consequent damage to the catalytic
converter and fuel pump.
Always check the oil level prior to going

off-road. Top up if necessary.
As a precaution against accidental loss,

remove the front and rear towing eye cover
panels before driving off-road (see
TOWING EYES, 224).
To prevent damage, and improve departure

angles, remove and stow any towing
equipment fitted to the vehicle. See
Towing, 216 .
Where maximum ground clearance is

required and the vehicle is fitted with a
full-size spare wheel, remove the wheel
from its underbody mounting position and
stow it in the loadspace area. the wheel
MUST be secured in the loadspace area to
prevent it from flying forward during a
collision or sudden braking. See
CHANGING A WHEEL, 298.
WARNING
Off-road driving can be hazardous!
DO NOT take unnecessary risks and be

prepared for emergencies at all times.
Your LR3 has a higher ground clearance

and hence a higher center of gravity than
an ordinary passenger car. An abrupt
manoeuvre at an inappropriate speed or
on an unstable surface could cause the
vehicle to go out of control or roll over.
Familiarise yourself with the

recommended driving techniques in
order to minimise risks to yourself, your
vehicle AND your passengers.
239
Off-road Driving
Gear selection
Setting the selector lever set at D, the gearbox
automatically provides the correct gear for the
appropriate gear range selected (HIGH or
LOW). For greater vehicle control through gear
selection, manual CommandShift mode is
recommended.
Accelerating
Use the accelerator with care - any sudden
surge of power may induce wheel spin and,
therefore, invoke unnecessary operation of
traction control, or in extreme conditions could
lead to loss of control of the vehicle.
Survey the ground before driving
Before negotiating difficult terrain, it is wise to
carry out a preliminary survey on foot. This will
minimise the risk of your vehicle getting into
difficulty through a previously unnoticed
hazard.
HIGH range gears should be used whenever

possible - only change to LOW range when
ground conditions become very difficult.
Braking
As far as possible, vehicle speed should be
controlled through correct gear selection and
the use of Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Application of the brake pedal should be kept to
a minimum. In fact, if the correct gear and HDC
have been selected, braking will be largely
unnecessary.
Caution: Do not attempt to drive the vehicle

continuously at angles greater than 35o nose
up or down. It is acceptable to drive up or
down at angles between 35o and 45o but only
temporarily.
Failure to follow these instructions will result
in damage to the engine.
If the brake pedal is depressed when HDC is

active, HDC is overridden and the brakes will
perform as normal. If the brake pedal is then
released, HDC will recommence operating, at
reduced speed as long as there is wheel
rotation.
Use of engine for braking
Before descending steep slopes, stop the
vehicle at least its length before the descent,
engage LOW range and then select HDC. Use of
manual CommandShift gear selection to limit
the transmission to lower gears will also
increase engine braking. Select 1 or 2 LOW
range, depending on the severity of the
descent.
While descending a slope (either forwards or in
R - reverse) it should be remembered that
HDC and the engine will aim to provide
sufficient braking effort to control the rate of
descent, and that the brakes should not
normally need to be applied.
240
Off-road Driving
Steering
Electronic air suspension

Select Off-road height, to increase
approach/departure angles and ground
clearance (see AIR SUSPENSION, 203).
Loss of traction
If the vehicle is immobilised due to loss of
wheel grip, the following hints could be of
value:
H5643L
Remove obstacles rather than forcing the

vehicle to cross them.
Clear clogged tire treads.
Reverse as far as possible, then attempt an

increased speed approach - additional
momentum may overcome the obstacle.
Brushwood, sacking or any similar material

placed in front of the tires may improve tire
grip.
CD Autochanger
Playing CDs while negotiating arduous off-road
terrain is not recommended. Severe jolting of
the vehicle may disturb the operation of the
autochanger, causing the disc to jump or
skip.
WARNING
DO NOT hold the steering wheel with your
thumbs inside the rim - a sudden Kick of the
wheel as the vehicle negotiates a rut or
boulder could seriously injure them. ALWAYS
grip the wheel on the outside of the rim (as
shown) when traversing uneven ground.
Ground clearance
Don't forget to allow for ground clearance
beneath the vehicle suspension components
and under the front and rear bumpers. Note
also that there are other parts of the vehicle
which may come into contact with the ground take care not to ground the vehicle.
Ground clearance is particularly important at
the bottom of steep slopes, or where wheel ruts
are unusually deep and where sudden changes
in the slope of the ground are experienced.
ALWAYS attempt to avoid obstacles that may
foul the vehicle.
241
Off-road Driving
AFTER DRIVING OFF-ROAD
If the vehicle is used regularly in arduous

conditions - wading, deep mud, abrasive grit,
slurry, etc. - the following checks should be
made:
Before rejoining the public highway, or driving

at speeds above 40 km/h (24 mph),
consideration should be given to the following:
Wheels and tires must be cleaned of mud

and inspected for damage.
If wheels and tires are not cleaned properly,

damage to the wheels, tires, braking
system and suspension components could
occur.
Brake discs and calipers should be

examined and any stones or grit removed
that may affect braking or parkbrake
efficiency.
Inspect the drive belts and pulleys at the

front of the engine for damage.
The underside of the vehicle should be

checked for damage, especially the
suspension air springs, dampers and
drive-shaft boots.
If a full-size spare wheel has been stowed

in the loadspace area, it should be
repositioned in its original location under
the vehicle, see CHANGING A WHEEL, 298.
Inspect, clean and adjust the park brake

after 80 km (50 miles).
Inspect the park brake pads for wear every

1500 km (1000 miles) or 100 hours.
Check the road wheel speed sensors, brake

pads and callipers for abrasive wear every
1500 km (1000 miles).
The air suspension* compressor inlet filter will

need to be replaced more often.
If you have any doubts about the condition of
any of the above items, consult your Land
Rover Retailer.
Servicing Requirements
Vehicles operated in arduous conditions,
particularly on dusty, muddy or wet terrain, and
vehicles undergoing frequent or deep wading
conditions will require more frequent servicing.
Contact a Land Rover Retailer for advice.
After wading in salt water or driving on sandy
beaches, use a hose to wash the underbody
components and any exposed body panels with
fresh water. This will help to protect the
vehicle's cosmetic appearance and prevent
impairment of park brake efficiency.
Any damage to paint or protective coatings,

should be rectified by a Land Rover Retailer
as soon as possible.
If you have any doubt whether the vehicle has

been damaged, have the vehicle inspected by a
242

BEFORE YOU DRIVE
Stopping on a soft or sloping surface

If you do stop the vehicle, remember:
Before venturing off-road, it is absolutely

essential that inexperienced drivers become
fully familiar with the vehicle's controls, in
particular the transfer gear switch,
CommandShift, Hill Descent Control (HDC) and
the Terrain Response system*, and also study
the off-road driving techniques described on
this and the following pages.
Driving on Soft Surfaces & Soft Sand
The ideal technique for driving on soft surfaces
(dry sand for example) requires the vehicle to
be kept moving at all times - soft sand causes
excessive drag on the wheels resulting in a
rapid loss of motion once driving momentum is
lost. For this reason, gear changing should be
avoided.
For vehicles without Terrain Response*, it is
generally advisable to deactivate DSC (see
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC), 198),
then select the highest practical gear (using
CommandShift) to reduce the risk of wheelspin
and remain in that gear until a firm surface is
reached. It is generally advisable to use LOW
range, as this will enable you to accelerate
through worsening conditions without the risk
of being unable to restart.
On vehicles fitted with a Terrain Response*
system, use the appropriate Special Program.
Land Rover recommend that DSC is operational
in all normal driving conditions. In some
conditions, to maximise traction, it may be
beneficial to deactivate DSC, see DYNAMIC
STABILITY CONTROL (DSC), 198.
243
In vehicles fitted with Terrain Response,

engage the Sand special program and
ensure that the gearshift is in D.
In CommandShift automatic, select the

highest practical gear.
To avoid wheelspin, use the MINIMUM

throttle necessary to get the vehicle
moving.
Starting on an incline or in soft ground or

sand may be difficult. Always park on a firm
level area, or with the vehicle facing
downhill.
If forward motion is lost, avoid excessive

use of the throttle - this may dig the vehicle
into the sand. Clear sand from around the
tires and ensure that the vehicle underside
is not bearing on the sand before again
attempting to move.
If the wheels have sunk, use an air bag

lifting device to raise the vehicle, and then
build up sand under the tires so that the
vehicle is again on level ground. If a restart
is still not possible, place sand mats or
ladders beneath the tires.

Driving on Slippery Surfaces
Drive away using the MINIMUM throttle

possible
In CommandShift automatic, select the

highest practical gear.
Use the appropriate Special Program on

vehicles fitted with a Terrain Response
system*.
Drive slowly at all times, keeping braking to

a minimum and avoiding violent
movements of the steering wheel.
Select HDC, if not already selected, in case

there is a need to reverse down the slope.
Use sufficient speed in the highest practical

gear to take advantage of the vehicles
momentum. However. too high a speed
over a bumpy surface may result in a wheel
lifting, causing the vehicle to lose traction
and stability. In this case, try a slower
approach.
Traction can also be improved by easing off

the accelerator just before loss of forward
motion
Driving on Rough Tracks

Although rough tracks can sometimes be
negotiated in HIGH range, on very rough tracks,
engage LOW range to enable a steady, low
speed to be maintained without constant use of
the brake pedal.
If the vehicle is unable to complete the climb,

do not attempt to turn it around while on the
slope. Instead, adopt the following procedure to
reverse downhill to the foot of the slope.
Use the appropriate Special Program on

vehicles fitted with a Terrain Response
system*.
2. Select N (neutral) and restart the engine if

necessary.
1. Hold the vehicle stationary using the foot

brake.
3. Select LOW range, if not already selected,

then select R (reverse).
Climbing Steep Slopes

ALWAYS follow the fall line of the slope travelling diagonally could encourage the
vehicle to slide broadside down the slope.
4. Slowly release the foot brake and allow the

vehicle to reverse down the slope using
engine braking and HDC to control the rate
of descent.

temporarily.
On vehicles fitted with Terrain Response,

use an appropriate special program
depending upon the type of surface.
Steep climbs will usually require LOW gear

range and the highest practical gear,
selected with CommandShift in automatic
vehicles.
If a Terrain Response special program has

been selected, then the transmission can
be left in D.
5. Unless it is necessary to stop the vehicle in

order to negotiate obstructions, DO NOT
touch the brake pedal during the descent.
6. If the vehicle begins to slide, the limits of
adhesion have been reached, and it may be
impossible to maintain the minimum
speed. Gently press the accelerator pedal
to allow the tires to regain grip, then gently
release the accelerator pedal
244

Descending Steep Slopes
If the vehicle begins to slide, the limits of

adhesion have been reached, and it may be
impossible to maintain the minimum
speed. Gently press the accelerator pedal
to allow the tires to regain grip, then gently
release the accelerator pedal
Once level ground is reached, higher gears

or D can be selected as required.

temporarily.
H5645G
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury due to a vehicle rollover.
Bring the vehicle to a stop at least one

vehicles length before the start of the
slope.
On vehicles fitted with Terrain Response,

use an appropriate special program
depending upon the type of surface.
Select either 1 or 2 (CommandShift),

depending on the severity of the slope. If a
Terrain Response special program has
been selected, then the transmission can
be left in D. If the slope is slippery,
CommandShift 1 or 2 should be
considered.
Ensure that HDC is selected and drive

forward as slowly as possible.
Unless it is necessary to stop the vehicle in

order to negotiate obstructions, DO NOT
touch the brake pedal during the descent the engine braking and HDC will limit the
speed.
245

Traversing a Slope
Negotiating a V Shaped Gully

Observe extreme caution! Steering up either of
the gully walls could cause the side of the
vehicle to be trapped against the opposite gully
wall.
Driving in Existing Wheel Tracks
As far as possible allow the vehicle to steer
itself along the bottom of the ruts and always
keep a light hold of the steering wheel to
prevent it from spinning free. Deactivation of
DSC may help in deep ruts.
Particularly in wet conditions, if the steering
wheel is allowed to spin free, the vehicle may
appear to be driving straight ahead in the ruts,
but in actual fact (due to the lack of traction
caused by the wet ground) is unknowingly on
full right or left lock. Then, when level ground is
reached, or if a dry patch of ground is
encountered, the wheels will find traction and
cause the vehicle to suddenly veer to left or
right.
H5646G
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury due to a vehicle rollover.
Before crossing a slope ALWAYS observe the
following precautions:
Check that the ground is firm and not

slippery.
Check that the wheels on the downhill side

of the vehicle are not likely to drop into
depressions in the ground and that the
uphill wheels will not run over rocks, tree
roots, or similar obstacles that could
suddenly increase the angle of tilt.
Ensure that passenger weight is evenly

distributed, that all roof rack luggage is
removed and that all other luggage is
properly secured and stowed as low as
possible. Always remember; any sudden
movement of the load could cause the
vehicle to overturn.
Rear seat passengers should sit on the

uphill side of the vehicle or, in extreme
conditions, should vacate the vehicle until
the sloping ground has been safely
negotiated.
The Terrain Response* system displays

steering information while in LOW range and all
programs except General.
246

Crossing a Ridge
Crossing a Ditch
H5648G
Cross ditches at an angle so that three wheels

always maintain contact with the ground. If a
ditch is approached head on, both front wheels
will drop into the ditch together, possibly
resulting in the chassis and front bumper being
trapped on opposite sides of the ditch. If the
severity of terrain makes this inevitable,
selecting Off-road height with the Air
Suspension* to increase clearance between the
ground and the bottom of the vehicle may help.
H5647G
Approach at right angles so that both front

wheels cross the ridge together - an angled
approach could cause stability to be lost
through diagonally opposite wheels lifting from
the ground at the same time.
247

Wading
Caution: Do not switch off the engine during

wading. If the engine stalls during wading,
restart it immediately and, as soon as
possible, get the vehicle checked by a Land
Rover Retailer.
If, during wading, it is thought that water may
have entered the engine air intake, switch off
the engine immediately, have the vehicle
towed out and delivered to a Land Rover
Retailer for checking.
H5649G
Caution: The maximum advisable wading

depth is normally 600 mm (24 in.), but can be
700 mm (27 in.) where the vehicle is fitted
with air suspension and operated at Off-road
Height. Regularly wading at a depth greater
than the maximum advisable wading depth is
not recommended.
Note: If deep wading is to be carried out

regularly, contact your Land Rover Retailer for
advice.
After wading
Drive the vehicle a short distance and apply

the foot brake to check that the brakes are
fully effective.
Severe electrical damage may occur if the

vehicle remains stationary for any length of
time when the water level is above the door
sills.
DO NOT rely on the handbrake to hold the

vehicle stationary until the brakes have
thoroughly dried out; in the meantime,
leave the vehicle parked in P.
Before wading, ensure the electronic air

suspension* is set to off-road height.
Remove any protective covering from in

front of the radiator grille.
If the water is likely to exceed the maximum

wading depths given above, the following
precautions should be observed:
If the water was particularly muddy, check

any radiator matrix for debris (mud and
leaves) to reduce the risk of overheating.
Fix a plastic sheet in front of the radiator

grille to prevent water from soaking the
engine and mud from blocking the radiator.
Ensure that the silt bed beneath the water is

free of obstacles and firm enough to
support the vehicle's weight and provide
sufficient traction.
If deep water is regularly negotiated, check

all oils for signs of water contamination contaminated oil can be identified through
its milky appearance. In addition, check
the air filter element for water ingress and
replace if wet - consult a Land Rover
Retailer if necessary.
Ensure that the engine air intake (located

on the front wings) is clear of the water
level.
Drive slowly into the water and accelerate

to a speed which causes a bow wave to
form; then maintain that speed.
If salt water is frequently negotiated,

thoroughly wash the underbody
components and exposed body panels with
fresh water.
At all times, keep all the doors fully closed.
248
Maintenance
Maintenance
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
OWNER MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
DRIVING IN ARDUOUS CONDITIONS . . . .252
SAFETY IN THE GARAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
EMISSION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
ROAD TESTING DYNAMOMETERS
(rolling roads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Hood Opening
HOOD OPENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Under-hood Covers
REMOVING UNDER-HOOD
COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
REPLACING UNDER-HOOD
COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Engine Compartment
V8 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
V6 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Engine Oil
CHECK & TOP-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Cooling System
ENGINE COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
TOP-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
ANTIFREEZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Brakes
BRAKE FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Power Steering
POWER STEERING FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Washers
WINDSHIELD WASHER TOP-UP . . . . . . . .263
WASHER JETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
249
Maintenance
Wiper Blades
WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . 265
Battery
BATTERY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Tires
CARING FOR YOUR TIRES . . . . . . . . . . .
SNOW CHAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIRE MARKINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIRE INFORMATION LABELS . . . . . . . . .
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING . . . .
PRODUCTION OPTION WEIGHTS . . . . . .
TIRE GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM* . . . . . . . . . . .
270
273
274
276
277
279
281
282
Cleaning & Vehicle Care

WASHING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . 284
CLEANING THE INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Identification Numbers
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Parts & Accessories

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . 288
250
Maintenance
Maintenance
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
OWNER MAINTENANCE
Regular systematic maintenance is the key to

ensuring the continued reliability and efficiency
of your vehicle.
In addition to the routine services and

inspections referred to previously, a number of
simple checks must be carried out more
frequently. You can carry out these checks
yourself and advice is given on the pages that
follow.
Maintenance is the owner's responsibility and

you must ensure that owner maintenance
operations, oil services, inspections and brake
fluid and coolant changes are carried out when
required and according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Any significant or sudden drop in fluid levels,

or uneven tire wear, should be reported to a
Land Rover Retailer without delay.
The routine maintenance requirements for your

vehicle are shown in the Passport to Service
book. Most of this necessary workshop
maintenance requires specialised knowledge
and equipment, and should preferably be
entrusted to a Land Rover Retailer.
Daily checks
Passport To Service
The Passport to Service book includes a
Service Record section, which enables a record
to be kept of all the oil services and inspections
that are carried out on the vehicle. This section
of the book also provides a facility for the Land
Rover Retailer to record brake fluid changes.
Operation of lamps, horn, direction

indicators, wipers, washers and warning
indicators.
Operation of seat belts and brakes.
Look for fluid deposits underneath the

vehicle that might indicate a leak.
Weekly checks
Engine oil level.

Note: The engine oil level should be
checked more frequently if the vehicle is
driven for prolonged periods at high
speeds.
Ensure your Land Rover Retailer signs and

stamps the book after each oil service and
inspection.
Brake fluid/component replacement
Brake fluid must be completely renewed every
2 years, regardless of distance travelled. After 6
years (144 000 km) (90 000 miles), all brake
hoses should be replaced.
Brake fluid level.
Power steering fluid level.
Screen washer fluid level.
Tire pressures and condition.
Operate air conditioning*.
All fluid specifications and capacities are shown

in LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 331.
Coolant replacement
The engine coolant (antifreeze and water
solution) needs to be replaced every 10 years,
regardless of distance travelled. Your Land
Rover Retailer will replace the coolant at the
scheduled oil service.
251
Maintenance
DRIVING IN ARDUOUS CONDITIONS
When a vehicle is operated in extremely

arduous conditions, more frequent attention
must be paid to servicing requirements.
DO NOT work beneath the vehicle with the

wheel changing jack as the only means of
support.
Ensure sparks and naked lights are kept

away from the engine compartment.
Wear protective clothing, including,

where practicable, gloves made from an
impervious material.
Remove metal wrist bands and jewellery

before working in the engine
compartment.
DO NOT allow tools or metal parts of the

vehicle to make contact with the battery
leads or terminals.
For example: if your vehicle experiences deep

wading conditions, even DAILY servicing could
be necessary to ensure the continued safe and
reliable operation of the vehicle.
Arduous driving conditions include:
Driving in dusty and/or sandy conditions.
Driving on rough and/or muddy roads

and/or wading.
Driving in extremely hot conditions.
Towing a trailer or driving in mountainous

conditions.
Under no circumstances should any part of

the fuel system be dismantled or replaced by
anyone other than a suitably qualified motor
vehicle technician. Failure to comply with this
instruction may result in fuel spillage with a
consequent serious risk of fire.
Contact a Land Rover Retailer for advice.
SAFETY IN THE GARAGE

WARNING
When the engine is hot, the cooling fans may
continue to operate, or COMMENCE operating
after the engine is switched off and continue
operating for up to 10 minutes. Keep clear of
all fans when working in the engine bay, and
ensure that you observe the following
precautions :
Keep your hands, hair, tools and clothing

away from drive belts and pulleys.
If the vehicle has been driven recently,

DO NOT touch exhaust and cooling
system components until the engine has
cooled.
Poisonous fluids
Fluids used in motor vehicles are poisonous
and should not be consumed or brought into
contact with open wounds. These include;
battery acid, antifreeze, brake and power
steering fluid, petrol, engine oil and windshield
washer additives.
For your own safety, ALWAYS read and obey all
instructions printed on labels and containers.
Used engine oil
Prolonged contact with engine oil may cause
serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and
cancer of the skin. ALWAYS wash thoroughly
after contact.
DO NOT TOUCH electrical leads or

components while the engine is running,
or with the starter switch turned on.
It is illegal to pollute drains, water

courses or soil. Use authorised waste
disposal sites to dispose of used oil
and toxic chemicals.
NEVER leave the engine running in an

unventilated area - exhaust gases are
poisonous and extremely dangerous.
252
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL
ROAD TESTING DYNAMOMETERS

(rolling roads)
Your vehicle is fitted with various items of

emission and evaporative control equipment
designed to meet specific territorial
requirements. You should be aware that
unauthorised replacement, modification or
tampering with this equipment by an owner or
repair shop may be unlawful and subject to
legal penalties.
Because your vehicle is equipped with anti-lock

brakes and permanent four-wheel drive, it is
essential that any dynamometer testing is
carried out ONLY by a qualified person familiar
with the dynamometer testing and safety
procedures and ONLY on a four-wheel drive
dynamometer. Contact your Land Rover
Retailer for further information.
In addition, engine settings must not be

tampered with. These have been established to
ensure that your vehicle complies with
stringent exhaust emission regulations.
Incorrect engine settings may adversely affect
exhaust emissions, engine performance and
fuel consumption, as well as causing high
temperatures, which will result in damage to
the catalytic converter and the vehicle.
253
Hood Opening
Hood Opening
HOOD OPENING
Closing the hood

Lower the bonnet until the safety catch
engages, then using both hands, press the
bonnet down until the catches click.
WARNING
DO NOT drive with the hood retained by the
safety catch alone.
After closing the hood, check that the lock is
fully engaged by attempting to lift the front edge
of the hood. This should be free from all
movement.
H5650L
1. From inside the vehicle on the drivers side,

pull the hood release handle (see upper
inset).
2. Lift the hood safety catch lever (lower
inset) and raise the hood.
254
Under-hood Covers
Under-hood Covers
REMOVING UNDER-HOOD
COVERS
REPLACING UNDER-HOOD
COVERS
H5652G
H5653G
Press the two forward tabs and lift the front

edge of the cover. Once the front edge of the
cover is free, slide the cover towards the front
of the vehicle.
Caution: Ensure that no pipes, cables, or

other items have been trapped between the
cover and casing.
Slide the rear edge of the cover under the
rubber trim fitted to the scuttle panel. Once the
front edge of the cover is aligned with the front
edge of the casing, press the front of the cover
down until the two tabs click into place.
255
Engine Compartment
Engine Compartment
V8 ENGINE
2
H5654L
1. Engine oil filler cap.
WARNING
2. Engine oil dipstick.
While working in the engine compartment,

ALWAYS observe the safety precautions
listed under SAFETY IN THE GARAGE, 252.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.

4. Power steering reservoir.
5. Cooling system reservoir.
6. Washer reservoir.
256
Engine Compartment
V6 ENGINE
1
H5656L
1. Engine oil filler cap.
WARNING
2. Engine oil dipstick.
While working in the engine compartment,

ALWAYS observe the safety precautions
listed under SAFETY IN THE GARAGE, 252.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.

4. Power steering reservoir.
5. Cooling system reservoir.
6. Washer reservoir.
257
Engine Oil
Engine Oil
CHECK & TOP-UP
Checking Oil Level
The oil consumption of your engine is

influenced by many factors. New engines reach
the normal value only after 5000 km (3000
miles). Under high loads your engine will also
consume more oil.
1. Withdraw the dipstick and wipe the blade

clean.
2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and withdraw
again to check the level, which should
NEVER be allowed to fall below the lower
mark or hole on the dipstick.
Check the oil level at least every 400 km (250

miles), when the engine is COLD and with the
vehicle resting on level ground.
3. To top-up, unscrew the oil filler cap and

add oil to maintain the level between the
UPPER and LOWER marks or holes on the
dipstick.
Note: If it is necessary to check the oil level

when the engine is hot, switch off the engine
and let the vehicle stand for five minutes to
allow the oil to drain back into the sump. DO
NOT start the engine.
DO NOT OVERFILL! Clean up any oil

spillage incurred when topping-up.
4. Check the oil level again.
As a general guide, if the level on the dipstick:
is nearer to the upper mark or hole than the

lower, add no oil.
is nearer to the lower mark or hole than the

upper, add half a litre (one pint) of oil.
is below the lower mark or hole, add one

litre (two pints) of oil and re-check the level
after a further five minutes.
MAX
MIN
H5927N
Oil specification
It is essential to use an oil suitable for the
climatic conditions in which the vehicle is to be
operated. Precise specifications are shown in
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 331. If in doubt,
contact your Land Rover Retailer.
258
Cooling System
Cooling System
ENGINE COOLANT
TOP-UP
WARNING
NEVER remove the filler cap when the engine
is hot - escaping steam or scalding water
could cause serious personal injury.
Unscrew the filler cap slowly, allowing the
pressure to escape before removing
completely.
Caution: NEVER run the engine without
coolant.
Antifreeze will damage painted surfaces;
soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth
immediately and wash the area with a
mixture of car shampoo and water.
NEVER top up with salt water. When travelling
in territories where the water supply contains
salt, always ensure that you carry a supply of
fresh (rain or distilled) water.
Avoid spilling antifreeze onto a hot engine - a
fire may result.
The coolant level in the expansion tank should
be checked at least weekly (more frequently in
high mileage or arduous operating conditions).
Always check the level WHEN THE SYSTEM IS
COLD.
H5665G
Top-up with a 50% mixture of antifreeze and

water, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 331, up
to the upper level indicator mark located above
the COLD FILL LEVEL text on the side of the
expansion tank. This should be viewed from
standing in front of the vehicle. Ignore any
coolant visible in the top section of the tank.
If it is necessary to remove the filler cap before

the system has fully cooled, loosen the cap
slowly, allowing the air pressure to escape
gradually.
Ensure the cap is tightened fully after top-up is

completed by turning the cap until the ratchet
cap clicks.
If the level has fallen appreciably, suspect
leakage or overheating and arrange for your
Land Rover Retailer to examine the vehicle.
259
Cooling System
ANTIFREEZE
WARNING
Antifreeze is poisonous and can be fatal if
swallowed - keep containers sealed and out
of the reach of children. If accidental
consumption is suspected, seek medical
attention immediately.
If the fluid comes into contact with the skin or
eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water.
Antifreeze contains important corrosion
inhibitors. The antifreeze content of the coolant
must be maintained at 50% 5% all year round
(not just in cold conditions). To ensure that the
anti-corrosion properties of the coolant are
retained, the antifreeze content should be
checked once a year and completely renewed
every ten years, regardless of distance
travelled. Failure to do so may cause corrosion
of the radiator and engine components.
The specific gravity of a 50% antifreeze solution
at 20C (68F) is 1.075 and protects against
frost down to -36C (-33F).
Coolant specification
Use ONLY a 50% mix of water and an approved
antifreeze, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
331.
In an emergency - and only if this type of
antifreeze is unavailable - top-up the cooling
system with clean water, but be aware of the
resultant reduction in frost protection. DO NOT
top-up or refill with conventional antifreeze
formulations. If in doubt consult a Land Rover
Retailer.
260
Brakes
Brakes
BRAKE FLUID
Top-up
WARNING
Brake fluid is highly toxic - keep containers
sealed and out of the reach of children. If
accidental consumption of fluid is suspected,
seek medical attention immediately.
Take care not to spill the fluid onto a hot
engine - a fire may result.
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the fluid level
below the MIN mark.
Caution: Brake fluid will damage painted
surfaces; soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately and wash the
area with a mixture of car shampoo and
water.
H5666G
Wipe the filler cap clean before removing to

prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.
Disconnect the electrical lead.
The fluid level may fall slightly during normal

use as a result of brake pad wear but should not
be allowed to fall below the MIN mark. Any
substantial drop in fluid indicates a leak in the
system, in which case the vehicle must NOT be
driven and you should contact your Land Rover
Retailer.
Unscrew the cap (1/8 turn) and top-up the

reservoir to the MAX mark using a specified
brake fluid, see LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS,
331.
Use only new fluid from an airtight container
(old fluid from opened containers or fluid
previously bled from the system will have
absorbed moisture, which will adversely affect
performance, and must NOT be used). DO NOT
OVERFILL.
WARNING
Contact your Land Rover Retailer
immediately if brake pedal travel is unusually
long or if there is any appreciable drop in
brake fluid level.
Replace the cap and reconnect the electrical

lead, ensuring that the lead points to the
center-line of the vehicle.
With the vehicle on level ground, check the fluid

level at least every week (more frequently in
high mileage or arduous operating conditions).
Check the level visually through the side of the
transparent reservoir without removing the
filler cap.
Brake fluid must be completely renewed every

two years regardless of distance travelled.
261
Power Steering
Power Steering
POWER STEERING FLUID

WARNING
Power steering fluid is highly toxic - keep
containers sealed and out of reach of
children. If accidental consumption of fluid is
suspected, seek medical attention
immediately.
Do not spill the fluid onto a hot engine - a fire
may result.
Caution: Power steering fluid will damage
painted surfaces; soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately and wash the
area with a mixture of car shampoo and
water.
H5667G
The level of fluid can be seen through the

translucent body of the reservoir which has two
marks on it to indicate maximum and minimum
levels.
Any large or sudden drop in the fluid level must

be investigated by a qualified Land Rover
Retailer.
If necessary, add fluid to the reservoir until the

level is between the upper and the lower marks.
DO NOT fill above the upper mark. See
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS, 331.
If it can be established that fluid loss is slow,

then the reservoir may be topped-up to the
upper level mark to enable the vehicle to be
driven to the nearest qualified Land Rover
Retailer for examination.
Caution: The engine must NOT be started if

the fluid level has dropped below the lower
mark - severe damage to the steering pump
could result.
If the fluid level has dropped below the lower

level mark, top-up the reservoir before starting
the engine, or damage to the steering pump
could result.
Check and Top-up
Check and top-up the fluid level ONLY with the
engine switched off and the system cold, and
ensure that the steering wheel is not turned
after stopping the engine.
262
Washers
Washers
WINDSHIELD WASHER TOP-UP
DO NOT use an antifreeze or vinegar/water

solution in the washer reservoir - antifreeze will
damage painted surfaces, while vinegar can
damage the windshield washer pump.
Body panels may suffer discoloration as a
result of windshield wash spillage. Take care to
avoid spillage, particularly if an undiluted or
high concentration is being used. If spillage
occurs, wash the affected area immediately
with water.
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures
below 40o F, use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. In cold weather, failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of a vehicle crash.
H5668G
The windshield washer reservoir supplies both

front and rear screen washer jets and headlamp
washer jets*.
Note: State and local regulations may restrict

the use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs),
which are commonly used as antifreeze agents
in washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC
content should be used only if it provides
adequate freeze resistance for all regions and
climates in which the vehicle will be operated.
Check the reservoir level at least every week

and top-up with windshield washer fluid.
Operate the washer switches periodically to
check that the nozzles are clear and properly
directed.
Note: Ensure an approved windshield washer
solvent is used in the windshield washer
reservoir to prevent freezing.
WARNING
Some windshield wash products are
inflammable, particularly if high or undiluted
concentrations are exposed to sparking. DO
NOT allow windshield wash to come into
contact with open flames or sources of
ignition.
263
Washers
WASHER JETS
Rear
Front
The windshield washer jets are set during
manufacture and should not need adjusting.
However, if adjustment is ever necessary, insert
a needle into the jet orifice and lever gently to
position each jet so that the spray is directed
towards the center of the windshield.
H5671G
Headlamp*
The spray jets are set during manufacture and
should not need to be adjusted.
H5669L
Should any jet become obstructed, insert a

needle or thin strand of wire into the orifice to
clear the blockage.
264
Wiper Blades
Wiper Blades
WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT
Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield

and pivot the blade assembly away from the
arm. Press the tab (arrowed in inset), to release
the blade assembly and slide the assembly off
the end of the wiper arm. Carefully replace the
arm to its stowed position.
Front
To replace, position the wiper arm into the

aperture in the middle of the blade assembly
and push firmly into position until the blade
clips into place.
H5672L
265
Wiper Blades
Rear
Lift the wiper away from the rear window.

Press the tab (arrowed in inset) to release the
blade assembly and slide the assembly off the
end of the wiper arm. Carefully replace the arm
in its stowed position.
To replace, position the blade assembly onto
the inside of the wiper arm and push firmly into
position until the blade clips into place.
Only fit replacement wiper blades that are
identical to the original specification.
Grease, silicone and gasoline-based products
impair the blade's wiping capability. Wash the
wiper blades in warm soapy water and
periodically check their condition.
If signs of hardness or cracking in the rubber
are found, or if the wipers leave streaks or
unwiped areas on the windshield during use,
then the wiper blades should be replaced.
Clean the windshield regularly with an approved
glass cleaner and ensure the screen is
thoroughly cleaned before fitting replacement
wiper blades.
H5674G
266
Battery
Battery
BATTERY MAINTENANCE
Wait two minutes for the engine management

system to power down.
The battery is designed to be maintenance free,

so topping-up is unnecessary.
Open the hood, see HOOD OPENING, 254.

Disconnect ONLY the negative (-) terminal of
the battery.
WARNING
Batteries contain acid, which is both
corrosive and poisonous. If spillage occurs:
On clothing or the skin - remove any

contaminated clothing immediately,
flush the skin with large amounts of
water, and seek medical attention
urgently.
In the eyes - flush with clean water

immediately for at least 15 minutes. Seek
medical attention urgently.
Always wear eye protection when working

around batteries.
Swallowing battery acid can be fatal unless
IMMEDIATE action is taken - seek medical
attention urgently.
1
2
3
1205
L7MTA
BAC 001131
H5896L
During normal operation batteries emit

explosive hydrogen gas - ensure sparks and
naked lights are kept away from the engine
compartment.
Disconnecting the battery

Note: If the battery is flat and the vehicle is
locked and alarmed, you will first have to unlock
the left-side front door using the starter key,
(see Emergency locking/unlocking, 44).
For your safety, remove all metal wrist bands

and jewellery before working in the engine
compartment and NEVER allow the battery
terminals or vehicle leads to make contact
with tools or metal parts of the vehicle.
Insert the starter key and turn it to position ll.

Engage the Electric Park Brake (EPB), (see
PARKBRAKE, 195), or fit wheel chocks, (see
Using wheel chocks, 295). Remove the starter
key.
Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain harmful lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
If the vehicle is already locked and alarmed, you

will first have to unlock and disarm it using the
remote handset, (see LOCKING/UNLOCKING,
42).
267
Battery
Reconnecting the battery
Ensure that everything requiring power from
the battery - lights, audio, etc. - is switched off.
To remove: disconnect the negative (-) cable

first and then the positive (+) cable. When
reconnecting, connect the positive cable first
and then the negative cable. Do not allow the
battery terminals to make contact with metal
parts of the vehicle.
Reconnect the battery leads.

Note: If the battery was disconnected while it
had an insufficient charge to disarm the alarm,
the alarm could sound on reconnection.
Operating the remote handset or inserting the
key into the starter switch will disarm the alarm.
To release the battery from the vehicle, undo

the nuts securing the battery clamping plate
and remove the clamping plate.
When replacing, ensure that the battery is fitted
the right way round (terminal posts towards the
rear of the vehicle) and that the clamping plate
is secure. Tighten the clamping plate nuts until
the clamping plate is free from movement, but
do not overtighten.
Insert the starter key and turn to position ll.

Operate the EPB to extinguish the amber
warning lamp.
Effects of battery disconnection
Following disconnection and subsequent
reconnection of the vehicle battery, a number of
the vehicle systems will be reset automatically.
This may take a few minutes and with some
systems, sensors have to detect certain actions
whilst driving before full operability returns.
This in no way affects the safe operation of the
vehicle.
Replacement batteries
Only fit a replacement battery of the same type
and specification as the original - other
batteries could cause a fire hazard when
connected to the vehicles electrical system.
Battery disposal
Used batteries should be recycled.
However, batteries are hazardous - you
should seek advice about disposal from
a Land Rover Retailer or your local authority.
Battery removal and replacement
WARNING
ALWAYS remove the starter key before
disconnecting the battery. Failure to do this
may cause a failure of the airbag SRS.
Do not reverse the polarity of the battery - the
electrical system may be damaged if the
battery leads are connected to the wrong
terminals.
Caution: Keep the battery upright at all times
- damage will be caused if the battery is tilted
more than 45 degrees.
DO NOT run the engine with the battery
disconnected; or disconnect the battery with
the engine running.
268
Battery
Battery charging
WARNING
Batteries generate explosive gases, contain
corrosive acid and produce levels of electric
current sufficient to cause serious injury.
While charging, shield your eyes or avoid
leaning over the battery and keep the area
around the top of the battery well ventilated.
Do not allow naked lights near the battery
(batteries generate inflammable hydrogen
during and after charging).
While charging, always heed the following
precautions:
Before charging, disconnect and remove

the battery from the vehicle - charging the
battery with the cables connected may
damage the vehicles electrical system.
Make sure the battery charger leads are

securely clamped to the battery terminals
BEFORE switching on the battery charger.
Do not move the leads once the charger is
switched on.
The battery will be charged sufficiently

once the battery condition indicator shows
GREEN. When charging is finished, switch
off the battery charger BEFORE
disconnecting the leads from the battery
terminals.
Note: Be aware that a battery will take longer to

charge in a cold environment.
After charging, leave the battery for an hour
BEFORE reconnection to the vehicle - this will
allow time for explosive gases to disperse,
thereby minimising the risk of fire or explosion.
269
Tires
Tires
CARING FOR YOUR TIRES
WARNING
Under-inflation causes excessive flexing and
uneven wear to the tire. This can lead to
sudden failure. Over-inflation causes a harsh
ride, uneven tire wear and poor handling.
WARNING
DEFECTIVE TIRES ARE DANGEROUS. Do not
drive if any tire is damaged, is excessively
worn, or is inflated to an incorrect pressure.
Pressure checks should only be carried out

when the tires are cold (the vehicle has been
stationary for three hours or more).
Always drive with consideration for the

condition of the tires, and regularly inspect the
tread and side walls for any sign of distortion
(bulges), cuts or wear.
Tire pressures should be checked at least once

a week with normal road use, but should be
checked DAILY if the vehicle is used off-road.
The most common causes of tire failure are:
Bumping against curbs
Driving over deep potholes in the road
Driving with under- or over-inflated tires
Check the pressures (including the spare

wheel) when the tires are cold - be aware that it
only takes 1.5 km (1 mile) of driving to warm up
the tires sufficiently to affect the tire pressures.
Note: If possible, protect tires from

contamination by oil, grease, fuel and other
automotive fluids.
Air pressure naturally increases in warm tires; if

it is necessary to check the tires when they are
warm (after the vehicle has been driven for a
while), you should expect the pressures to have
increased between 30 - 40 kPa (0.28 - 0.41 bar,
4 - 6 lbf/in2 ).
In this circumstance, DO NOT let air out of the
tires in order to match the recommended
pressures.
Tires of the correct type, manufacture and

dimensions, with correct cold inflation
pressures are an integral part of every vehicles
design. Regular maintenance of tires
contributes not only to safety, but to the
designed function of the vehicle. Road-holding,
steering and braking are especially vulnerable
to incorrectly pressurised, badly fitted or worn
tires.
WARNING
If the vehicle has been parked in strong
sunlight or used in high ambient
temperatures, DO NOT reduce tire pressures;
instead, move the vehicle into the shade and
allow the tires to cool before checking.
Tire glossary
A glossary of the terms and definitions
associated with tire pressures and vehicle
weights is included in this section, see TIRE
GLOSSARY, 281.
The recommended pressures for cold tires are

shown in TIRE PRESSURES, 338.
Tire pressures
Correctly inflated tires will ensure that you
enjoy the best combination of tire life, ride
comfort, fuel economy and road handling.
270
Tires
Checking tire pressures
Loading
conditions
Normal
operating
conditions
Loaded to
Minimum
GVW
Compact
spare tire (all
conditions)
kPa
bar
lbf/in2
F
R
230
250
2.3
2.5
33
36
F
R
230
290
2.3
2.9
33
42
420
4.2
60
Valves
Keep the valve caps screwed down firmly - they
prevent dirt from entering the valve. Check the
valve for leaks (listen for a tell-tale hissing)
when you check the tire pressure.
Tire wear
H5086
The tires fitted as original equipment to your

vehicle have wear indicators moulded into the
tread pattern. When the tread has worn down to
1.6 mm (1/16 in.) the indicators start appearing
at the surface of the tread pattern, producing
the effect of a continuous band of rubber across
the width of the tire.
The following procedure should be used to

check and adjust the tire pressures:
1. Remove the valve cap.
2. Firmly attach a tire pressure gauge/inflator
to the valve.
3. Read the tire pressure from the gauge. If
required, add air to the tire.
A tire MUST be replaced as soon as an indicator

band becomes visible or the tread depth
reaches the minimum permitted by legislation.
4. If air is added to the tire, remove the gauge

from the valve and re-attach it before
checking that the pressure is correct.
Failure to remove and re-attach the gauge
from the valve could cause the gauge to
show an incorrect reading.
Note: If tire wear is uneven (on one side of the

tire only) or becomes abnormally excessive, the
wheel alignment should be checked by your
Retailer.
Tread depth must be checked regularly (at
every maintenance service, or more
frequently). Always replace a tire before the
tread reaches a remaining depth of 1.6 mm
(1/16 in.). DO NOT drive with tires worn to this
limit, the safety of the vehicle and occupants
will be adversely affected.
5. If too much air is added, remove the gauge

from the valve and allow air out of the tire
by pressing the center of the valve.
Reconnect the gauge to the valve, and
check that the air pressure is correct.
6. Refit the valve cap.
Note: After off-road use, check to make sure

there are no lumps or bulges in the tires or
exposure of the ply or cord structure.
Note: It is an offence in certain countries to

drive a vehicle with tires that are not inflated in
accordance with the vehicles proper use.
271
Tires
Punctured tires
Your vehicle is fitted with tubeless tires, which
may not leak if penetrated by a sharp object,
provided the object remains in the tire. If you
are aware of this occurring, reduce speed
immediately and drive with caution until the
spare wheel can be fitted.
WARNING
ALWAYS use the same make and type of
radial-ply tires front and rear. DO NOT use
bias-ply tires, or interchange tires from front
to rear.
Your vehicle is fitted with road wheels that
will NOT accept inner tubes. DO NOT fit a
tubed tire.
A puncture of this kind will eventually cause the

tire to lose pressure, which is why regular (and
frequent) checking of tire pressures is
important. Punctured or damaged tires must be
permanently repaired or replaced as soon as
possible - if in doubt, seek expert advice.
DO NOT replace wheels with any type other

than genuine Land Rover parts. Wheels and
tires are designed for both off-road and
on-road use and have a very important
influence on vehicle handling. Alternative
wheels which do not meet original equipment
specifications should not be fitted.
DO NOT DRIVE WITH A PUNCTURED TIRE.

Replacement tires
Wheel rims and tires are matched to suit the
handling characteristics of the vehicle. For
safety, ALWAYS check that replacement tires
comply with the original specification shown in
WHEELS & TIRES, 337, and that the load and
speed ratings shown on the side wall are the
same as that of the original equipment. Contact
your Land Rover Retailer for further
information or assistance.
Always ensure replacement tires have the

correct rating and specifications (e.g. load
index, size, speed rating) for your vehicle.
Contact your Land Rover Retailer for more
information.
When using tires other than those
recommended by Land Rover, do not exceed
the speed capacity recommended by the
manufacturer.
Tires of the correct size and type, but of

different make have widely varying
characteristics. It is therefore recommended
that only Land Rover approved tires are fitted to
all wheels.
Tire use after vehicle storage

After a long period of a vehicle standing, tires
may become locally distorted with a flat area.
This will cause an uneven ride for a few miles
until the tires have warmed up and the flat
rounds off.
Ideally, tires should be replaced as sets of four,

but if this is not possible, replace the tires as
axle sets. When replacing tires in axle sets,
always fit the new tires to the rear axle.
Always have the wheels and tires re-balanced
after replacing.
272
Tires
Directional tires*
Directional tires give greater benefit when they
rotate in a forward direction, i.e., when the
vehicle is moving forward. They give enhanced
levels of deep-water grip while still maintaining
low tire noise generation.
SNOW CHAINS
Snow chains are designed for use on hard
surface roads in extreme conditions only, and
are not recommended for off-road use. If it is
necessary to fit snow chains to your vehicle,
ALWAYS observe the following:
Snow chains can ONLY be fitted to the front

axle of vehicles equipped with 17" or 18"
wheels.
It is recommended that ONLY Land Rover

approved chains are used - these are
designed for your vehicle and will eliminate
any risk of damage to other components.
Approved snow chains are only available
from a Land Rover Retailer.
Always adhere to the snow chain fitting and

retensioning instructions, and the speed
limitations recommended for varying road
conditions. NEVER exceed 50 km/h
(30 mph).
ONLY fit snow chains in pairs.
NEVER fit snow chains to a compact spare

wheel.
Avoid tire damage by removing the chains

as soon as the road is free from snow.
Should a tire be fitted to a vehicle in the wrong

directional sense, these benefits will only be
maintained if the tire is remounted to the rim so
that it rotates in the direction indicated on the
sidewall.
Typical direction indicators are shown in the
illustration below.
For further information about approved snow

chains, consult your Land Rover Retailer.
WARNING
DO NOT fit unapproved snow chains - this
could damage tires, wheels, suspension and
brake components and could result in damage
to the bodywork of the vehicle.
H5678G
273
Tires
TIRE MARKINGS
3
7 8
9
15
10
14
13
11
12
H5794G
1. The P indicates the tire is for passenger

vehicles.
5. This two-digit number is the wheel or rim

diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new
tires to match the new wheel diameter.
2. This three-digit number gives the width in

millimetres of the tire from sidewall edge to
sidewall edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
6. This two- or three-digit number is the tire's

load index. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can support.
3. This two-digit number, known as the

aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height
to width (this is also known as the tire
profile). The lower the number, the shorter
the tires sidewall.
Note: You may not find this information

on all tires because it is not required by law.
4. The R stands for radial. Radial ply

construction of tires has been the industry
standard for the past 20 years.
274
Tires
7. The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time. The ratings range
from 99 mph to 186 mph. These ratings are
listed in the following table.
10. The number of plies indicates the number

of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
In general, the greater the number of plies,
the more weight a tire can support. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
Note: You may not find this information

on all tires because it is not required by law.
Letter
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
11. This number indicates the tire's wear rate.

The higher the treadwear number is, the
longer it should take for the tread to wear
down. For example, a tire graded 400
should last twice as long as a tire graded
200.
Speed Rating - mph

99
106
112
118
124
130
149
168
186
12. his letter indicates a tire's ability to stop on

wet pavement. A higher graded tire should
allow you to stop your vehicle on wet roads
in a shorter distance than a tire with a lower
grade. Traction is graded from highest to
lowest as AA, A, B, and C.
13. This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be
carried by the tire.
8. This begins with the letters DOT and

indicates that the tire meets all Federal
standards. The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code where it was
manufactured, and the last four numbers
represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 3197
means the 31st week of 1997. The other
numbers are marketing codes used at the
manufacturer's discretion. This
information can be used to contact
consumers if a tire defect requires a recall.
14. This letter indicates a tire's resistance to

heat. The temperature grade is for a tire
that is inflated properly and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation or
excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure. From highest to
lowest, a tire's resistance to heat is graded
as A, B, or C.
15. This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.
9. The M+S or M/S indicates that the tire

has some mud and snow capability. Most
radial tires have these markings, as they
have some mud and snow capability.
275
Tires
TIRE INFORMATION LABELS
Two tire information labels are visible on the

pillar behind the drivers door (also known as
the B pillar), giving information specific to the
wheel and tire equipment fitted to the vehicle
when it was built.
Tire pressure label/placard (USA only)

The top label contains information relating to

tire and wheel sizes and recommended
pressures for all wheel and tire combinations.

The lower label contains the following

information:

The maximum number of occupants (1),

divided between the front (2) and rear (3)
of the vehicle.
The vehicle capacity weight (4), which

includes the weight of the driver,
passengers and cargo.
The size of the tires (5) with which the

vehicle was originally equipped, including
the temporary spare (6).
Cold inflation pressures for the front and

rear tires (7), and compact spare tire (8).
TESTMARK1234567890

SEATING CAPACITY
TOTAL 7
FRONT 2
REAR 3 + 2
ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE

FRONT
230kpa, 33PSI
255/55R19
REAR
290kpa, 42PSI
T175/80R90
420kpa, 60PSI
SEE OWNERS
MANUAL FOR
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
RTC500490
H5850N
Note: The label must not be changed, even if

different wheels are fitted at a later stage.

SEATING CAPACITY
TOTAL 7
FRONT 2
REAR 3 + 2
ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE

FRONT
230kpa, 33PSI
REAR
290kpa, 42PSI
T175/80R90
420kpa, 60PSI
255/55R19
H5849N
276
SEE OWNERS
MANUAL FOR
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
RTC500490
Tires
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire pressure label/placard (Canada only)
LANDROVER
DATE : MM/YY
GVWR/PNBV :
3230KG ( 7121LB )
United States Department of

Transportation/Uniform Tire Quality Grades
The following information relates to the tire
grading system developed by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration which
will grade tires by tread wear, traction and
temperature performance.
ICES/NMB - 002
GAWR FRONT/PNBE AVANT : 1450KG ( 3197LB )

TIRES/
RIMS/
PRESSURE (COLD) /
PNEUS
JANTES PRESSION (A FROID) /
235/70R17 7.0JX17 230KPA (33PSI) (33LB/PO2)
235/65R18 8.0JX18 230KPA (33PSI) (33LB/PO2)
255/60R18 8.0JX18 230KPA (33PSI) (33LB/PO2)
255/55R19 8.0JX19 230KPA (33PSI) (33LB/PO2)
T175/80R19 5.5JX19 420KPA (60PSI) (60LB/PO2)
Note: Tires that have deep tread, and winter

tires, are exempt from these marking
requirements.
GAWR REAR/PNBE ARRIER : 1870KG ( 4123LB )

TIRES/
RIMS/
PRESSURE (COLD) /
PNEUS
JANTES PRESSION (A FROID) /
235/70R17 7.0JX17 290KPA (42PSI) (42LB/PO2)
235/65R18 8.0JX18 290KPA (42PSI) (42LB/PO2)
255/60R18 8.0JX18 290KPA (42PSI) (42LB/PO2)
255/55R19 8.0JX19 290KPA (42PSI) (42LB/PO2)
T175/80R19 5.5JX19 420KPA (60PSI) (60LB/PO2)
Quality grades, where applicable, can be found

on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
VIN : TESTVIN1234567890
TYPE : MPV/VTUM
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
In addition to the marking requirements,

passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements.
H5769C
A tire information label is visible on the pillar

behind the drivers door (also known as the B
pillar).
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example; a tire graded 150 would wear one
and a half times as well on a government test
course as a tire graded 100. However, the
relative performance of tires depends on the
actual conditions of their use, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The label contains information relating to tire

and wheel sizes and recommended pressures
for all wheel and tire combinations fitted to the
LR3.
Note: The label must not be changed, even if
different wheels are fitted at a later stage.
277
Tires
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are; AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent a
tires ability to stop on a wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to a tire is based
on straight-ahead braking tests, and does not
include; acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning. or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades, from highest to
lowest, are, A, B, and C. These grades represent
a tires resistance to the generation of heat, and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on an indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperatures can cause the
material of a tire to degenerate, and reduce the
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure.
C grade is the minimum performance level
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Safety Standard (FMVSS)
109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for a tire is
established with the correct loading and
inflation pressure. Excessive speed, under
inflation, or overloading, either separately,
or in combination, can cause heat build up
and possible tire failure.
278
Tires
PRODUCTION OPTION WEIGHTS
WARNING
(USA only)
Do not exceed the vehicle capacity weight

(the total weight of driver, passengers and
cargo) given on the tire information label, see
TIRE INFORMATION LABELS, 276
This table lists the production options weights.

To calculate the curb weight of your vehicle,
add the weight of all production options to the
basic curb weight for your vehicle.
Note: The table only lists optional equipment
that weighs more than 1,4 kg (3 lb.).
Curb weight, no options fitted
V6 5-seat, 17 in. wheels
V6 5-seat, 18 in. 5-spoke wheels
Tailgate badge
LR3
LR3
LR3 SE
LR3 SE
LR3 V8 SE
LR3 V8 SE
LR3 V8 HSE
LR3
LR3
LR3 SE
LR3 SE
LR3 V8 SE
LR3 V8 SE
LR3 V8 HSE
Production options
Full-size 17 in. spare wheel
Full-size 18 in. 5-spoke spare wheel
Full-size 18 in. 10-spoke spare wheel
Full-size 19 in. spare wheel
Locking rear differential
Sunroof front, moonroof rear
Towing kit
Rear seat air conditioning
Navigation system
Head curtain airbags
279
kg
2411
2443
2462
2478
2467
2483
2503
2468
2500
2519
2535
2525
2541
2583
lb.
5315
5386
5428
5463
5439
5475
5518
5441
5512
5553
5588
5567
5602
5694
2
4
4.5
8
2.3
27.3
5.0
9.7
3.3
2.0
4.4
8.8
9.9
17.6
5.1
60.1
11.0
21.34
7.3
4.4
Tires
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
The number and weight of passengers will

affect the cargo and luggage load capacity. In
the example above, the cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lb. However, if fewer
passengers ride in the vehicle, the luggage load
capacity will increase. If this vehicle carries
three 150 lb. passengers, the cargo and
luggage load capacity will increase to 950 lb.:
(3 x 150 = 450 lb., and 1400 - 450 = 950 lb.).
WARNING
Do not exceed the vehicle capacity weight
(the total weight of driver, passengers and
cargo) given, see TIRE INFORMATION
LABELS, 276.
1. Locate the statement The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXXX kg or YYYY lb. on your
vehicles placard, (see TIRE INFORMATION
LABELS).
If the passengers weigh more, the cargo and

luggage load capacity will decrease.
WARNING
The weight of accessories must also be
subtracted from the available cargo and
luggage load capacity. If you are unsure of the
weight of any accessories fitted to your
vehicle, contact your Land Rover Retailer.
2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXXX kg or YYYY lb.
(weight given on placard).
Overloading the vehicle will have an adverse

affect on braking and handling
characteristics, which could compromise
your safety. Overloading a vehicle may also
cause tire damage or failure.
Never overload your vehicle.
4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the YYYY amount
equals 1400 lb., and there will be five 150
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lb.:
(5 x 150 = 750, and
1400 - 750 = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult TOWING, 216, to
determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle. (Subtract the trailer tongue load
from the available cargo and luggage load
capacity.)
280
Tires
TIRE GLOSSARY
Vehicle capacity weight:

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lb.) times the vehicles designated seating
capacity.
Cold tire pressure:

Pressure in a tire that has been driven for less
than one mile or has been standing for three
hours or more.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight:

This is the sum of:
Maximum inflation pressure:

Maximum air pressure, to which a cold tire may
be inflated, this figure (in psi and kPa) is
moulded onto the sidewall of a tire.
Curb weight:
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil, coolant and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight of optional
engine.
Curb weight.
Accessory weight.
Vehicle capacity weight.
Production options weight.
Rim:
A metal support for a tire, or a tire and tube
assembly, upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Bead:
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim.
Gross vehicle weight:

The maximum permissible weight of a motor
vehicle with driver, passengers, payload
equipment and towing attachment load (where
applicable).
Accessory weight:
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and
heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not).
Production options weight:
The combined weight of those installed
production options weighing over 1.4 kg (3 lb.)
in excess of those standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levellers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery and special trim.
281
Tires
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM*
TPMS operation
The system monitors the pressure of the tires
via sensors located in each wheel, and a
receiver located within the vehicle. It provides
two levels of warning when the pressure has
fallen below preset levels. When either of the
warnings appears, the pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the proper level. If
warnings recur frequently, the cause must be
determined and rectified. Note that it is normal
for tires to lose a small amount of pressure over
time, as a result of this warnings may occur
occasionally.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system which monitors
pressure in each pneumatic tire.
The pressure in each tire is dependant on
several factors such as rate of tire rotation, tire
deflection, amount of braking, ambient
temperatures, etc. While driving in a normal
manner, a typical passenger tire inflation
pressure may increase by up to 40 kPa
(0.4 bar) (6 lbf/in2) from a cold start situation.
In a similar manner, tire pressure will decrease
if, for example, the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature
significantly lower than the daytime
temperature.
Other systems that share the radio frequency

with the TPMS may interfere with the system. If
this occurs, TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM FAULT is displayed in the message
center*.
This lower pressure value may be detected by

the TPMS as being significantly lower than the
cold placard pressure and activate the warning
for low tire pressure. If the low warning light is
on, visually check each tire to ensure none is
flat. If one or more tires are flat, replace as
necessary. If all tires appear to be inflated,
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires.
Turn the ignition to the off position and inflate
all tires to the recommended cold pressure, see
WHEELS & TIRES, 337.
This message is also displayed when there is a

fault with the system, or if more than one wheel
NOT equipped with TPMS is fitted to the
vehicle.
Vehicle loading
It is possible to select different pressure levels
that correspond to the placard pressures for a
lightly laden and a heavily laden vehicle. The
indicator on the TPMS button will display the
system status. If the indicator is illuminated,
the system is in lightly laden mode and if the
indicator is not illuminated then the system is in
heavily laden mode.
The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a

substitute for manually checking tire pressures.
The tire pressure should be checked regularly
using a pressure gauge. Failure to properly
maintain your tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, with consequential loss of
vehicle control and personal injury.
If the vehicle is to be used heavily laden or for

towing, the tire pressures must be increased to
cope with the additional load, and the tire
pressure monitoring system must be set into
heavily laden mode. See VEHICLE WEIGHTS,
340 and WHEELS & TIRES, 337.
282
Tires
When the vehicle load is returned to normal and
the tire pressures are reset, the system should
be put back into lightly laden mode by pressing
the button as before. The indicator illumination
will light up and a relevant message will be
displayed on the message center. This change
to and from heavily laden mode can be operated
only when the ignition is in position ll and the
engine is not running.
CHECK PRESSURE
OF ALL TIRES
If a wheel needs to be changed

If the spare wheel or replacement wheel is fitted
with TPMS, the new sensor will be registered by
the system when the vehicle is driven above
25 km/h (18 mph).
If a tire needs to be changed
It is recommended that you always have your
tires serviced by a dealer or qualified
technician. Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor connected to the valve stem.
The tire pressure sensor must be removed from
the wheel prior to tire removal. The sensor can
be removed by removing the nut at the valve
stem. Failure to remove the sensor may
damage it.
When a tire needs replacing, care must be taken
to avoid contact between the bead of the tire
and the wheel sensor during removal and
refitting of the tire, otherwise the sensor may
become damaged and/or inoperable.
H5826N
This can be accomplished by pressing the

TPMS button on the switch pack for
approximately 4 seconds with the ignition in
position ll and the engine NOT running. To
indicate that the system has switched to heavily
laden mode, a message will be displayed on the
message center and the indicator on the switch
will cease to be illuminated.
WARNING
TPMS can NOT register damage to the tire.
Regularly check the condition of your tires,
especially if the vehicle is driven off-road.
283

WASHING YOUR VEHICLE
Removing tar spots

Use white spirit to remove tar spots and
stubborn grease stains from paintwork. Then
wash immediately with soapy water to remove
all traces of spirit.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for snow and ice
removal and dust control can collect on
underbody parts. If these materials are not
removed, accelerated rusting can occur. Use a
hose to regularly flush the underbody with plain
water, taking particular care to thoroughly clean
those areas where mud and other debris can
easily collect.
H5680G
Caution: Some high pressure cleaning

systems are sufficiently powerful to penetrate
door and window seals and damage rubbing
strips and locking mechanisms. Never aim
the water jet directly at the engine air intake,
heater air intakes, body and sunroof seals, or
at any components that might easily be
damaged.
Similarly, after off-road driving or wading in

muddy or salt water conditions, use a hose to
wash underbody components and other
exposed parts of the vehicle.
When using a hose, do not direct the jet into the
engine air intake, which is located on the
right-hand-side front wing (viewed from
drivers position), or the heater air intake ducts,
or through the wheel trim apertures onto the
brake components, or at the door, window or
sunroof seals, where water pressure could
penetrate the seals.
Read individual product warnings before

using any car cleaning or wahine products.
Wash your vehicle frequently using a sponge
and generous quantities of cold or lukewarm
water containing a car shampoo. Rinse and dry
off with a chamois leather.
Do not use hot water!
Do not use detergent soap products or

washing-up liquid!
In hot weather, do not wash the vehicle in

direct sunlight.
If damage or corrosion to the underbody area is

detected, please have the vehicle checked by a
Land Rover Retailer at the earliest opportunity.
284

CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Body protection
After washing, inspect the paintwork for
damage. Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the bodywork should be repaired
promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly and
can develop into major repair expense. Some
exterior panels of your vehicle are made of
aluminium which will not corrode in the same
manner as steel. However, any damage should
still receive prompt attention. Minor chips and
scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your Land Rover
Retailer. Larger areas of damage need to be
corrected to professional standards
immediately.
Caution: Read individual product warnings

before using any car cleaning or washing
products.
Plastic materials
Clean plastic-faced or cloth-covered surfaces
with warm water and a non-detergent soap and
wipe with a clean cloth.
Note: DO NOT polish instrument panel
components - for safety, these should remain
non-reflective.
Leather
Land Rover recommends that leather is cleaned
and protected at least every six months, but
maybe as often as every one to two months for
high mileage vehicles, or vehicles kept in a
hostile environment.
Polishing
Occasionally treat the paint surface with an
approved polish containing the following
properties:
Very mild abrasives to remove surface

contamination without removing or
damaging the paint.
Filling compounds that will fill scratches

and reduce their visibility.
Wax to provide a protective coating

between the paint and the elements.
Leather cleaning kit, BAC500490, or equivalent,

is recommended and endorsed by Land Rover
for this purpose. Use in accordance with the
instructions printed on the label.
Note: Some materials/fabrics are prone to
dye-transfer which can cause unsightly
discoloration of lighter colored leathers.
Affected areas should be cleaned and
re-protected as soon as possible.
Caution: DO NOT apply car polish to the

unpainted areas of the bumper mouldings polish will become ingrained in the textured
finished.
DO NOT use chemical or abrasive materials to

clean leather. Gasoline, white spirit, alcohol,
detergents, washing-up liquid, household
cleaners, furniture polishes/creams or solvents
should never be used on leather. While these
products may give initially impressive results,
their use will lead to rapid deterioration of the
leather and will invalidate the warranty.
Glass and mirrors

Clean the rear window with a soft cloth to avoid
damaging the heating elements. DO NOT
scrape the glass or use an abrasive cleaning
fluid.
Mirror glass is particularly susceptible to
damage. Wash with soapy water. DO NOT use
abrasive cleaning compounds or metal
scrapers to remove ice.
285

Carpet and fabrics
Clean with diluted nylon upholstery cleaner test on a concealed area first.
Airbag module covers
WARNING
To prevent airbag SRS damage, the steering
wheel center pad, side airbags and area of
the instrument panel containing the
passenger airbag should ONLY be cleaned
sparingly with a damp cloth and upholstery
cleaner.
Instrument pack, clock and radio

Clean with a dry cloth only! DO NOT use
cleaning fluids or sprays.
Seat belts
Extend the belts, then use warm water and a
non-detergent soap to clean. DO NOT use
cleaning solvents. Allow the belts to dry
naturally, and do not retract them or use the
vehicle until they are completely dry.
DO NOT allow these areas to be flooded with

liquid, and DO NOT use gasoline, detergent,
cleaning solvents, furniture cream or
polishes.
286
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
WARNING
DO NOT exceed the gross weight or axle loads
stated on the certification label attached to
the vehicle. Exceeding allowable vehicle and
axle loads will increase the risk of fire or
suspension failure, increase vehicle brake
stopping distance, and adversely affect
vehicle handling and stability which may
result in a crash or rollover.
If you need to communicate with a Land Rover

Retailer, you may be asked to quote the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).

Federal VIN Plate

SALLMAMA31A002040

TESTMARK1234567890
H5840N
The VIN, and other information concerning the

vehicle, can be found on the certification label
affixed to the lock-face of the front left-hand
door.
H5841N
In addition to the certification label, the Federal

VIN plate is mounted to the vehicle body so that
it is visible through the lowest part of the left
side of the windshield. The VIN is also stamped
on the vehicles chassis.
Note: The information displayed on the

certification label is market-dependent and
vehicle type specification may differ from the
example.
287
Parts & Accessories

Parts & Accessories
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
Land Rover parts are the only parts built to

original equipment specifications AND
approved by Land Rover designers; this means
that every single part and accessory has been
rigorously tested by the same engineering team
that designed and built the vehicle and can
therefore be guaranteed for twelve months with
unlimited mileage.
WARNING
DO NOT fit unapproved accessories or
conversions, as they could affect the safety of
the vehicle.
Land Rover will not accept any liability for
death, personal injury or damage to property
which may occur as a direct result of fitment
of non-approved accessories or the carrying
out of non-approved conversions to Land
Rover vehicles.
A full list and description of all accessories is

available from your Land Rover Retailer.
Electrical equipment
WARNING
Land Rover North America Inc. strongly

advises against making any modifications to
the suspension or steering system. This could
seriously affect the handling and stability of
the vehicle leading to loss of control or
rollover.
It is extremely hazardous to fit or replace

parts or accessories whose installation
requires the dismantling of, or addition to,
either the electrical, fuel or SRS airbag
systems as damage to the proper operation of
these systems could result.
Your vehicle has been designed, built and

tested to cope with a variety of off-road driving
conditions, some of which can place the
severest possible demands on control systems
and components. As such, fitting replacement
parts and accessories that have been developed
and tested to the same stringent standards as
the original components will safeguard the
continued reliability, safety and performance of
your vehicle.
ALWAYS consult a Land Rover Retailer before

fitting any accessory.
Fitting inferior quality parts or accessories, may
be dangerous and could invalidate the vehicle
warranty.
It is recommended that you always consult a
Land Rover Retailer for advice regarding the
approval, suitability, installation and use of any
parts or accessories before fitting.
To augment the vehicle's already impressive

performance, a comprehensive range of Land
Rover-approved spare parts and accessories is
available, enabling the vehicle to fulfil a wide
variety of roles, and enhancing and protecting
the vehicle in the many tasks to which it can be
applied.
After-sales service
The After Sales Parts service is of paramount
importance, both in the UK and across the
world. In the UK there are over 100 authorised
Land Rover Retailers, all computer linked for
rapid ordering of parts and accessories.
In addition, with franchised representation in
over 100 countries worldwide, Land Rover are
able to support your vehicle wherever you go.
288
Parts & Accessories

Travelling abroad
In certain countries, it is illegal to fit parts which
have not been made to the vehicle
manufacturers' specification.
SRS/Airbag
WARNING
The components that make up the SRS/airbag
are sensitive to electrical or physical
interference, either of which could easily
damage the system and cause inadvertent
operation or a malfunction of the airbag
module.
Owners should ensure that any parts or

accessories fitted to the vehicle while travelling
abroad will also conform to the legal
requirements of their own country when they
return home.
To prevent any SRS/airbag malfunction,

ALWAYS consult a Land Rover Retailer before
fitting any of the following:
289
Electronic equipment such as a mobile

phone, two-way radio or in-car
entertainment system.
Accessories attached to the front of the

vehicle.
Any modification to the front of the

vehicle.
Any modification involving the removal or

repair of any wiring or component in the
vicinity of any of the SRS components
(yellow wiring harness), including: the
steering wheel, steering column,
instrument and facia panels.
Any modification to the facia panels or

steering wheel.
290
Roadside Emergency
Wheel Changing
TOOL KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
PUNCTURED TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
REMOVING THE SPARE WHEEL . . . . . . . .296
CHANGING A WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
LOCKING WHEEL NUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Emergency Starting
STARTING AN ENGINE WITH A
DISCHARGED BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Fuses
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Bulb Replacement
REPLACING BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
HEADLAMP UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
REAR LAMP UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
NUMBER PLATE LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
SIDE MARKER LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
FRONT FOG LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
DOOR/PUDDLE/FOOTWELL
LAMPS* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
COURTESY LAMPS* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
TAILGATE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
MAP LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
VANITY MIRROR LAMP* . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
MIRROR DOWNLIGHTER . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
291
292
Wheel Changing
Roadside Emergency
TOOL KIT
H5683G
H5682G
On five-seater vehicles, the tool tray is located

under a lift-up panel set in the loadspace floor.
On seven-seater vehicles, the wheel change

tool kit is stowed behind an access cover in the
rear loadspace area.
Note: Take careful note of the stowage position

of each of the tools as it is important to return
them to their correct position after use.
293
Wheel Changing
PUNCTURED TIRES
1
If you have a flat tire while driving:
2
4
Do not brake heavily.
Gradually decrease the vehicles speed.
Hold the steering wheel firmly.
Slowly move to a safe and suitable place at

the side of the road.
Wheel Changing Safety
If possible, choose a safe place to stop away

from the main road. Always ask your
passengers to get out of the vehicle and wait in
a safe area away from other traffic.
8
H5685G
The tool kit consists of
Note: Switch on the hazard warning lights to

alert other road users.
1. Screwdriver handle
2. Screwdriver blade
Before changing a wheel, ensure that the front

wheels are in the straight-ahead position (if
possible), apply the handbrake, select P (Park)
and select LOW range in the transfer box. Raise
the air suspension to the off-road position.
3. Jack screw rotating hook

4. Extension piece
5. Wheel nut brace
6. Wheel chocks
Turn off the starter switch, remove the key and

engage the steering lock. Observe the following
precautions:
7. Wheel change jack

8. Locking wheel nut key*
Care of the jack
Examine the jack occasionally, clean and grease
the moving parts, particularly the screw thread,
to prevent corrosion.
Ensure that the jack will be positioned on

firm, level ground; NEVER on soft ground,
or over metal gratings or manhole covers.
DO NOT place additional material between
the jack and the ground; this may
jeopardise the safety of the jacking
operation.
Chock the wheel(s), see Using wheel

chocks, 295.
NEVER raise the vehicle with passengers

inside, or with a caravan or trailer
connected!
To avoid contamination, the jack should always

be stowed in its fully closed position.
WARNING
After wheel changing, always secure tools,
chocks, jack and replaced wheel in their
correct storage positions. Such objects if not
properly stowed can become flying missiles
in a crash or rollover, potentially causing
injury or death.
294
Wheel Changing
Tilt Sensor*
Your vehicle is fitted with a tilt sensor which
activates the alarm if the vehicle is tilted fore
and aft, or side to side, after it has been locked.
If you wish to have the doors locked while
jacking up the vehicle, for any reason, lock the
doors by pressing the lock button on the
remote handset twice within three seconds.
Using wheel chocks
WARNING
Before raising the vehicle, it is ESSENTIAL to
chock the road wheels in two places: the
parkbrake acts on the transmission, not on
the rear wheels, and therefore may not hold
the vehicle when raised.
H5687G
If jacking the vehicle on a slope is unavoidable,

place the chocks on the downhill side of the two
opposite wheels.
The wheel chocks are stowed in the toolkit, as
shown in TOOL KIT, 293.
H5686G
If possible, position the vehicle on level ground,

chocking both sides of the wheel diagonally
opposite the one to be removed.
295
Wheel Changing
REMOVING THE SPARE WHEEL
Spare wheel
Always remove the spare wheel before jacking
up the vehicle.
WARNING
The wheels are extremely heavy. Take care
when manoeuvring the spare wheel.
Note: Before removing the spare wheel from
the vehicle, take a look at the position that the
spare wheel is stowed in, as you will need to
check that the wheel about to be removed from
the vehicle is returned to the correct storage
position.
H5689G
Spare wheel access - seven-seat vehicle
With the tailgate open:

1. Lift open the spare wheel mechanism
access hatch in the rear loadspace.
On 5-seat vehicles, remove the jack from
the tool tray.
2. Tilt up the circular locking cap covering the
spare-wheel storage nut.
H5688G
Spare wheel access - five-seat vehicle
296
Wheel Changing
H5691G
H5690G
3. Fit the wheel nut brace to the wheel-hoist

winch nut and rotate anticlockwise to lower
the spare wheel.
Caution: The mechanism has been designed
for use with the wheel nut brace. DO NOT
use power tools on the wheel-hoist
winch.
When the wheel has reached the ground,
continue to wind the handle until the cable
is slack.
Do not attempt to turn the winch beyond
the physical stop.
Note: In 7-seat vehicles, the wheel-hoist nut is
quite close to the back of the rear seats when
they are in the upright position.
To cater for this, fit the wheel nut brace to the
wheel-hoist nut, turn it as far as possible in the
desired direction and then flip the handle over
the top of the nut to the other side and continue
to turn it.
H5909G
4. Hold the cable and tilt the lifting lug until it

can be lifted through the hole in the wheel,
as shown above.
297
Wheel Changing
CHANGING A WHEEL
Positioning the jack - right-hand side
H5693G
Note: Before positioning the jack under the

vehicle, ensure that the air suspension is set to
Off-road height.
WARNING
ALWAYS:
WARNING
NEVER work beneath the vehicle with the jack
as the only means of support. The jack is
designed for wheel changing only.
Always remove the spare wheel before
jacking up the vehicle.
298
Place the jack on firm level ground.
Position the jack from the side of the

vehicle, in line with the appropriate
jacking point.
Raise the jack so that the pin in the head

of the jack engages with a hole in the
chassis rail at the points shown in the
illustrations.
Wheel Changing
Positioning the jack - left-hand side
H5694G
WARNING
WARNING
ONLY jack the vehicle using the jack location

points described, or damage to the vehicle
could occur.
ONLY jack the vehicle using the jack location

points described, or damage to the vehicle
may occur.
Always position the jack from the side of the

vehicle, approximately in line with the
appropriate jacking point. Ensure the jack is
positioned on firm, level ground.
299
Wheel Changing
Operating the jack
Turn the jack lever clockwise to raise the jack

cradle until it engages with the jacking point.
Ensure that the base of the jack is in full contact
with the road surface.
Changing a wheel
Always remove the spare wheel before jacking
up the vehicle.
1. Raise the vehicle until the tire is clear of the
ground.
2. Remove the wheel nuts and place to one
side to prevent them from being lost.
3. Remove the road wheel.
Note: DO NOT damage the style surface of
the wheel by placing it face down on the
road.
4. On alloy wheels, use an approved anti-seize
compound to treat the wheel mounting
bore. This will minimise any tendency for
adhesion between the wheel and the bore.
Ensure that no compound comes into
contact with the brake components or the
flat mounting surfaces of the wheel.
If, due to an emergency situation, this
treatment is not practicable; refit the spare
wheel for the time being, but remove and
treat the wheel at the earliest opportunity.
5. Fit the spare wheel with the valve stem
outwards and lightly tighten the wheel
nuts, ensuring they are firmly seated. DO
NOT fully tighten whilst the tire is clear of
the ground. See Directional tires*, 273.
H5695G
Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel nut

brace to slacken the wheel nuts half a turn
anticlockwise.
WARNING
When fitting a wheel, ensure that the mating
faces of the hub and wheel are clean and free
from rust or anti-seize compound - any
accumulation of dirt or rust could cause the
wheel nuts to become loose.
Attach the jack cranking lever to the jack. Fit the

wheel nut brace onto the end of the cranking
lever.
300
Wheel Changing
Compact spare wheel*
6. Ensure that the space under and around the

vehicle is free from obstructions then lower
the vehicle and remove the jack and wheel
chocks.
WARNING
The following precautions must be observed
when the compact spare wheel is in use:
7. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in an

alternating pattern until all are tightened.
DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN by using foot
pressure or extension bars on the wheel
nut brace, as this could overstress the
wheel nuts. Check the wheel nut torque at
the earliest opportunity (see WHEELS &
TIRES, 337).
8. Using a suitable blunt tool, apply light
pressure to the rear of the displaced wheel
center cap and remove. Using hand
pressure only, fit the center cap into the
newly fitted wheel. Return tools, chocks,
jack and the displaced wheel to their
correct storage positions.
The compact spare wheel is for

TEMPORARYuse only. It MUST be
replaced by a normal-sized wheel and tire
as soon as possible.
Only ONE compact spare wheel is to be

used on the vehicle at any one time.
DO NOT drive at a speed exceeding

80 km/h (50 mph).
The tire pressure in the compact spare

wheel/tire should be as detailed in the
tire pressures table, see WHEELS &
TIRES, 337.
The compact spare wheel has a shorter

life than a regular tire. Replace the tire
with one of the same type and
specification.
The use of snow chains is not permitted

on a compact spare wheel.
DRIVE CAUTIOUSLY; the compact spare

wheel tire is smaller in size and higher in
pressure than a regular tire. It will cause
a harsher ride and may have less traction
on some road surfaces. If driving off-road
on a compact spare wheel, drive with
extra caution.
9. REMEMBER to change to H (HIGH range)

before driving.
10. Finally, check the tire pressure at the
earliest opportunity (see WHEELS &
TIRES, 337).
Note: During jacking, the air suspension
system may enter an automatic freeze state,
see Suspension Freeze, 208.
301
Wheel Changing
Restowing the changed wheel
WARNING
DO NOT restow the wheel while the vehicle is
still raised on the jack.
1. Place the wheel under the rear of the
vehicle with its style surface uppermost.
2. Place the lifting lug through the wheel
aperture and locate it in position.
3. Winch up the wheel using the wheel-hoist
mechanism.
The mechanism has been designed for use
with the wheel nut brace. DO NOT use
power tools on the wheel-hoist winch.
4. Continue to wind up until the mechanism
clutches out. This is confirmed by a clear
physical feedback from the wheel nut brace
and an audible noise.
5. Check that the spare wheel has returned to
the same position as the spare wheel as
previously noted. If in any doubt, unwind
the winch slightly and repeat the previous
step.
WARNING
The wheel must be securely retained in its
correct position by the winch mechanism or it
could become loose.
7. Replace the circular locking cap over the
wheel-hoist nut. As the underside of this
cap is exposed to the same conditions as
the underside of the vehicle, ensure that it
is firmly in place.
H5909G
Note: If, for any reason, the spare wheel is not

to be fitted back under the vehicle, the wheel
hoist should be rewound as follows:
Position the lifting lug level on the cable and
wind up the wheel hoist until it clutches out.
8. Place the tools back into their storage

location. For a 7-seat vehicle, ensure that
the tool straps are re-attached around the
tool kit.
302
Wheel Changing
LOCKING WHEEL NUTS
Note: A code number is stamped on the

underside of the adaptor. Ensure the number is
recorded on the Security Information card
supplied with the literature pack. Quote this
number if a replacement is required. DO NOT
keep the Security Information card in the
vehicle.
Vehicles may be equipped with a locking wheel

nut on each wheel. They can only be removed
using the special adaptor provided in the tool
kit.
Insert the adaptor firmly onto the locking wheel

nut.
Using the wheel nut brace, unscrew the wheel
nut and adaptor.
Be sure to return the locking wheel nut adaptor
to the correct storage position.
H5696G
303
Emergency Starting
Emergency Starting
STARTING AN ENGINE WITH A

DISCHARGED BATTERY
Apply the handbrakes and ensure that the

transmission of both vehicles is set in neutral
(P or Park for vehicles with automatic
transmission).
Caution: DO NOT push or tow start.

Using Booster Cables
Using booster cables (jump leads) from a
donor battery, or a battery fitted to a donor
vehicle, is the only approved method of starting
a vehicle with a discharged battery.
Turn off the starter switch and ALL electrical

equipment of BOTH vehicles.
WARNING
DO NOT use a 24 Volt booster start system.
These can produce excessive voltages and
can damage the vehicles electrical systems.
WARNING
Always wear eye protection when working
around batteries.
Boosting Procedure
During normal operation batteries emit

explosive hydrogen gas - ensure sparks and
naked lights are kept away from the engine
compartment.
+
DO NOT attempt to start the vehicle if the

electrolyte in the battery is suspected of being
frozen.
Make sure BOTH batteries are of the same

voltage (12 volts), and that the booster cables
have insulated clamps and are approved for
use with 12 volt batteries.
DO NOT disconnect the discharged battery.

DO NOT connect positive (+) terminals to
negative (-) terminals, and ensure booster
cables are kept away from any moving parts
in the engine compartment.
Take care when working near rotating parts of

the engine.
Boosting from Another Vehicle
If a donor vehicle is to be used, both vehicles
should be parked with their battery locations
adjacent to each other. Ensure that the two
vehicles do not touch.
H5697L
304
Emergency Starting
Always adopt the following procedure,
ensuring the cables are connected in the
order shown below:
Now start the vehicle with the discharged

battery. Once both engines are running
normally, allow them to idle for two minutes
before switching off the donor vehicle engine.
1. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of

the BLACK booster cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery or the vehicles
negative (-) connection point.
DO NOT switch on any electrical circuits on the

previously disabled vehicle until AFTER the
booster cables have been removed.
2. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other

end of the BLACK booster cable to a good
earth point (e.g. an engine mounting or
other unpainted metal surface) at least
0.5m (20 in.) from the battery and well
away from fuel and brake lines.
Disconnecting the booster cables must be an

EXACT reversal of the procedure used to
connect them, i.e. disconnect the RED cable
from the positive (+) battery terminal on the
boosted battery FIRST.
3. On the donor vehicle, connect one end of

the RED booster cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the battery or the vehicles
positive (+) connection point.
4. On the disabled vehicle, connect the other
end of the RED booster cable to the positive
(+) battery terminal.
WARNING
For safety reasons:
DO NOT connect the BLACK cable to the

negative terminal of the discharged
battery - if in doubt, seek qualified
assistance.
ENSURE that each connection is securely

made and that there is no risk of the clips
accidentally slipping or being pulled from
the battery terminals - this could cause
sparking, which could lead to fire or
explosion.
Check that the cables are clear of any moving

parts of both engines, then start the engine of
the donor vehicle and allow it to idle for a few
minutes.
305
Fuses
Fuses
FUSES
Engine Compartment Fuse Box

The engine compartment fuse box is located at
the rear of the engine bay. To view the fuse box,
the under-hood cover will have to be removed,
see REMOVING UNDER-HOOD COVERS, 255.
The plastic lid of the box is removed by
pressing the plastic tabs in.
Fuses are simple circuit devices which protect

electrical equipment against the effects of
excess current.
A blown fuse is indicated when the electrical
equipment it protects becomes inoperative.
Fuses are color coded to help identify their
amperage, as follows:
Blade fuse colors
VIOLET
TAN
BROWN
RED
BLUE
YELLOW
WHITE
GREEN
3 amp
5 amp
7.5 amp
10 amp
15 amp
20 amp
25 amp
30 amp
Cartridge fuse colors (engine bay only)

BLUE
PINK
GREEN
RED
YELLOW
20 amp
30 amp
40 amp
50 amp
60 amp
H5701L
Note: Owners are advised against removing or

replacing the relays (identified as R1-R19 on
the relays) and fusible links (identified as
FL1-FL20 on the fusible links). Failure of any of
these items should be investigated by a
qualified technician.
306
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuses
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
25
F2
F3
25
F4
F5
10
15
F6
F7
25
25
F8
F9
15
15
F10
F11
15
10
F12
F13
10
20
F14
F15
30
10
F16
F17
15
F1
A
FL1
50A
FL4
50A
FL2
30A
FL5
FL3
30A
FL6
30A
F1
F2
25A
5A
F3
F4
5A
25A
F5
F6
10A
15A
F7
R6
R8
R10
R7
R9
F8
25A
25A
F9
F10
15A
15A
F11
F12
15A
10A
F13
F14
10A
20A
F15
F16
30A
10A
F17
F18
15A
30A
F19
F20
R11
5A
F21
F22
F23
F24
25A
20A
R14
R13
F25
F26
10A
20A
F27
F28
5A
20A
F29
F30
30A
10A
R15
FL7
30A
FL8
30A
FL9
40A
FL10
60A
R17
FL11
30A
FL12
40A
FL13
40A
FL14
40A
R18
R19
FL15
40A
FL16
40A
FL17
50A
FL18
50A
ALT
H5704G
SM
FL19
FL20
Where Fitted
H5862G
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
R16
10
10
30A
R12
10
Torque Values - (m8 17Nm +/-1) (M5 5Nm +/-1)
307
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
30
F18
F19
F20
F21
30
F22
F23
25
20
F24
F25
10
20
F26
F27
20
F28
F29
30
10
F30
Fuses
Fuse specification
Fuse
number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Rating
(amps)
25
5
5
10
15
25
25
15
15
15
10
10
20
30
10
15
30
15
5
30
25
20
10
20
5
30
10
Circuit protected
Fuel pump
Pump leak detection
Air suspension ECU
Petrol EMS (purge valve, EGR, inlet manifold tune valve),
E-box fan
Petrol EMS (coils)
Hevac - front seat heat
Rear seat heat
Active roll control
Petrol EMS (throttle motor, MAF), cool fan
Petrol EMS (rear oxygen sensors)
Heated wash jets
Petrol EMS (ECU, VVTs and fuel pump relay control)
Petrol EMS (front oxygen sensors)
Heated front windshield
Heated door mirrors
Petrol EMS (injectors)
Heated front windshield
Alternator
Spare
Rear blower
Dynamic Stability Control system
Petrol brake boost pump
Lighting switch
Air suspension ECU
Engine control module (EMS)
Front wipers
Auto transmission ECU
308
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
Checking or renewing a fuse

Always turn the starter switch to position O
and switch off the affected electrical circuit
before removing a fuse.
WARNING
Fit only replacement fuses of the same rating
and type. Always rectify the cause of the
failure before replacing a fuse. Incorrect fuse
ratings may overload a system and cause a
fire or malfunction. Seek qualified assistance
if necessary.
H5924L
The passenger compartment fuse box is fitted

behind the glovebox. To access the fuses, open
the glovebox to the service position.
This is done by opening the glovebox normally
and then pinching the top of the support stays
located either side of the hopper. This allows
the glovebox to be lowered into the footwell.
A label on the rear of the glovebox hopper
shows the circuits protected, the fuse values
and their locations. They are also listed on the
following page.
309
H5707G
F11
10A
F23
5A
F35
5A
F49
30A
F56
10A
F60
5A
F64
5A
F67
5A
F68
5A
F12
15A
F24
5A
F36
5A
F50
10A
F57
10A
F61
10A
F65
SPARE FUSES
F1
10A
F2
10A
F13
25A
F25
5A
F37
5A
F51
10A
F58
10A
F62
5A
F66
5A
F69
5A
F3
10A
F14
10A
F26
5A
F38
15A
F15
15A
F27
10A
F39
5A
L7MTA
F4
10A
F16
10A
F28
5A
F40
5A
F6
10A
F18
5A
F30
25A
F42
30A
YQS500120
F5
10A
F17
20A
F29
30A
F41
5A
WHERE
FITTED
F19 2
15A
F31
20A
F43
10A
F20
15A
F32
15A
F44
5A
F7
25A
F52
5A
F59
10A
F63
10A
F21
25A
F33
5A
F45
F8
30A
R4
R2
R5
R3
R1
F9
F10
5A
F22
10A
F34 1
15A
F46
F47 3 F48
30A
15A
15A
F53
F54
F55
15A
5A
15A
Fuses
Glovebox label
The label on the rear of the glovebox hopper

shows the circuits protected, the fuse values,
and their locations.
310
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuses
The fuse removal tweezers are located in the
passenger compartment fuse box. Place the
tweezers onto the head of the suspect fuse (as
shown), squeeze the middle (arrowed) and pull
to remove. A break in the wire inside the fuse
indicates that the fuse has 'blown' and must be
replaced.
Always replace a fuse with another of the same

value, however, if the replacement fuse blows
immediately the circuit MUST be checked by a
qualified Land Rover Retailer.
10
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
F65
F66
F67
F68
F69
5
5
20
SPARES
5
10
15
H5863G
311
25
30
5
15
15
F53
F54
F55
F48
15
15
10
F64
F63
F62
10
F61
F60
10
F59
10
F58
10
F57
10
F56
F47
30
F52
15
F46
20
10
15
25
30
F45
10
F51
F44
10
F50
F43
30
F49
F42
F41
F40
F39
15
F38
F37
F36
F29
30
F28
10
F27
F26
F25
F24
F23
F35
F10
F22
25
F21
15
F20
30
25
10
10
F19
15
F18
F17
20
F16
F9
10
10
F15
F8
15
F14
F7
10
F13
F6
25
F12
F5
15
10
F4
10
F3
10
F11
F2
10
F1
Fuses
Fuse specification
Fuse
number
1
Rating
(amps)
10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
10
10
10
10
10
25
30
5
10
15
25
10
15
10
20
5
15
15
25
10
5
5
5
10
5
30
25
20
15
5
34
15
Circuit protected
Interior lamps - glovebox lamp, vanity mirror lamp, map lamps,
switchable roof lamps
RH sidelamps
Theater lamps
LH sidelamps
Reverse lamps
Tow reverse lamp
Drivers window
Trailer pick-up (battery feed)
SRS
Washer pump
Horn
HRW
Tow side lamp
Brake lamps, Brake switch
Powerfold mirror
Rear RH window
Rain sensor, ambient light sensor (auto lamps)
Socket accessory - Row 2
Sunroof
Passenger window
Trailer pick-up (ignition feed)
Transfer box - center diff, Terrain Response
Engine control module (EMS)
Battery back-up sounder
Adaptive front lighting / Headlamp levelling
Fuse box engine compartment - ignition
Passenger electric seat
Rear LH window
Rear fog lamps
Mirror adjust, PRNDS - Auto transmission selector, passenger
electric seat
Socket accessory - row 1
312
Fuses
Fuse
number
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
Rating
(amps)
5
5
5
15
5
5
5
30
10
5
30
15
15
30
10
10
5
15
5
15
10
10
10
10
5
10
5
10
5
5
5
5
5
Circuit protected
Air suspension ECU
Tire pressure monitoring/Park Distance Control
Dynamic Stability Control
Front fog lamps
Instrument pack
Key in sense
Electric park brake
Audio amp
RF receiver, tire pressure monitoring
PRNDS Auto transmission selector
Driver electric seat
Socket accessory - Row 3
Rear wiper
Central door locking
Electric fuel flap actuator
HEVAC ECU
Telephone, traffic message center
Media player, head module, DVD player
Electric seat - memory
Cigar lighter
Adaptive front lighting
Rear seat entertainment module
Telephone, infotainment display, multi-media module, TV tuner
Cubby box cooler
Engine control module (EMS) - starter signal
Adaptive front lighting
Low beam, auto lamps
Diagnostic socket
Auto transmission
HDC switch, Brake switch, Steering angle sensor/DSC switch
Auto lamps
Instrument pack
Electrochromatic mirror, Homelink
313
Fuses
Tow hitch fuses
1. Brake lamp
2. Ignition feed
3. Battery feed
4. Rear fog lamps
5. Right-hand tail
lamp
6. Number plate
and left-hand tail
lamp
7.5 amp
15 amp
15 amp
7.5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
The supplementary fuse box that protects the

tow hitch circuits, is located behind the
left-hand panel in the luggage compartment.
2
3
4
5
6
H5792G
314
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement
REPLACING BULBS
Halogen bulbs
Halogen bulbs are used for main beam, dipped
beam and front fog lamps. Take care NOT to
touch this type of bulb with your fingers; always
use a cloth to handle them. If necessary, clean
the bulb with methylated spirits to remove
fingerprints.
Check the operation of all exterior lamps before

you drive the vehicle.
Caution: Before replacing a bulb, always
switch off the starter switch and appropriate
lighting switch to prevent any possibility of a
short circuit. Only replace bulbs with the
same type and specification.
Xenon lamp units*
Replacement bulbs
WARNING
Note: All bulbs must be rated at 12 volts

Bulb
Headlamps, low and high beam
(Halogen)
Headlamps, low and high beam
(Xenon)
Cornering lamps (Halogen)
Front side lamps
Front direction indicators
Rear direction indicators
Front fog lamps (Halogen)
Side marker lamps
Reverse lamps
Rear fog guard lamps
Stop/tail lamps
Number plate lamps
Door/puddle lamps
Interior lamps
Luggage/footwell lamps
Luggage/tailgate lamps
Glovebox lamp
Vanity mirror lamp
Watts
55 (H7)
Used Xenon lamp units contain mercury,

which is hazardous and can be injurious
to health.
A very high voltage is required to ignite

the gas and metal vapour used to power
Xenon lamps. Contact with this voltage
could cause very serious injury.
Replacement or maintenance of Xenon

lamps should be carried out only by
qualified personnel.
55 (D2S)
35 (H8)
W3W
S8
P21
55 (H11)
W3W
P21
P21
P21/5
W5W
W5W
W5W
W5W
W5W
W5W
1.2
Some vehicles are fitted with Xenon

dipped/main beam headlamp units. Xenon
lamps provide significantly improved visibility,
especially during adverse weather and driving
conditions.
The operational life of a Xenon lamp is
significantly longer than that of a conventional
or Halogen bulb.
Seek advice about the proper disposal
of Xenon lamp units from a Land Rover
Retailer or your local authority.
Note: In certain territories it is a legal

requirement to carry spare bulbs, in case of
bulb failure. A replacement bulb kit is available
as an approved accessory from your Land
Rover Retailer.
315
Bulb Replacement
HEADLAMP UNIT
The headlamp unit contains five lamps and it is
necessary to completely remove the unit from
the vehicle in order to change any of the bulbs.
WARNING
Do not attempt to change any bulb with the
lighting switched on. If the lighting has just
been switched off, give the bulbs time to cool
down. Handling them in a hot condition could
cause personal injury.
Removal of headlamp unit
H5712G
2. Carefully lever up the two locking bars.

3. Disconnect the wiring plug from the back
of the unit and remove the unit from the
vehicle. Place face down on a flat surface
covered in a soft material to prevent
damage to the units lenses.
H5711G
4. Replace the grille by aligning the upper and

lower clips with their respective slots, and
pressing into place. Ensure that the clips
have sprung into place securing the grille.
1. Remove the grille by pressing down on the

top four clips, and up on the bottom two,
securing the grille to the vehicle body. Lift
the grille clear of the vehicle and place it
where it will not sustain any damage.
316
Bulb Replacement
Bulb access
H5713G
The five bulbs within the headlamp unit,

accessible under domed caps are:
1. Direction indicator
H5714G
2. Dipped beam/xenon
Note: To access the direction indicator, the

headlamp unit locking slide must be completely
removed from the unit.
3. Main beam
4. Side lamp and cornering lamp*/static
bending lamp
See Replacement bulbs, 315.
317
Bulb Replacement
To change a main or dipped beam bulb
(Halogen only)
H5717G
H5716G
Dipped beam
Main beam
1. Twist and lift off the domed cap.
2. Pull off the electrical connector.
2. Pull off the electrical connector.
3. Release the spring clip holding the bulb in

place and lift out the bulb.

4. Insert the new bulb and repeat the above

procedure in reverse order. When replacing
the cap, align the arrowheads on the cap
and the body of the unit.

the cap, align the arrowheads on the cap
and the body of the unit.
Note: After the replacement of any main or

dipped beam bulb, the alignment of the
headlamps should be checked by a Land Rover
Retailer.

Retailer.
318
Bulb Replacement
To change a xenon bulb
H5743G
H5744G
2. Twist the connector cap anticlockwise to

unlock it. Pull clear of the bulb.


Retailer.

the cap, ensure that the lugs are in contact
with the bulb base.
319
Bulb Replacement
Changing a cornering lamp/static bending
bulb*
Changing a front side lamp bulb
H5719G

2. Pull out the bulb complete with electrical
connector.
H5718G
3. Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector.


procedure in reverse order.

connector.
When replacing the cap, align the

arrowheads on the cap and the body of the
unit.
3. To release the bulb, squeeze the sides of

the electrical connector.
unit.
320
Bulb Replacement
Changing a front indicator lamp bulb
Refitting the headlamp unit
H5720G

connector.
3. Pull the bulb out of the electrical connector.
H5722G

unit.
1. Reconnect the wiring plug.

2. Offer up the unit into position.
3. Push down on the two locking slides.
4. Refit the grille.
321
Bulb Replacement
REAR LAMP UNIT
3. Disconnect the wiring multi-plug and

remove the unit from the vehicle. Place face
down on a flat surface covered in a soft
material to prevent damage to the units
lenses.
1
2
3
4
5
H5723G
Note: If accessory lamp guards are fitted, refer

to the separate accessory user instructions for
removal.
H5724G
Each bulb is now accessible by twisting off its

electrical connection cap. See Replacement
bulbs, 315.
The rear lamp unit contains five lamps and it is

necessary to completely remove the unit from
the vehicle in order to change any of the bulbs.
1. Stop/tail lamp
2. Direction indicator
Removal of rear lamp unit
3. Tail lamp
1. With the tailgate open, remove two screws

from the edge of the unit nearer the rear
door aperture.
4. Reversing lamp
5. Rear fog guard lamp
Note: Tail lamp (3) uses the same twin-filament
bulb as stop/tail lamp (1).
2. Pull the unit away from the vehicle.
322
Bulb Replacement
NUMBER PLATE LAMPS
Refitting the rear lamp unit

1. Reconnect the electrical multi-plug.
2. Locate the units two studs in the sockets at
the left-hand side of the mounting face.
3. Insert and tighten the two screws on the
right-hand side of the unit.
4. Check that all of the bulbs work.
H5726G
With the upper tailgate open and using a

suitable tool, lever the lens from the tailgate
(see inset). Pull the bulb to remove.
323
Bulb Replacement
SIDE MARKER LAMP
FRONT FOG LAMPS
H5727G
Push the lens firmly towards the front of the

vehicle and withdraw the lamp unit from the
wing. Twist to release the bulb holder from the
lens unit, then pull the bulb from its socket.
H5728G
To access the bulb; using a suitable tool, lever

the fog lamp surround panel out of the front
bumper. Remove the three securing screws to
release the lamp unit. Ease the unit out of the
front bumper.
324
Bulb Replacement
DOOR/PUDDLE/FOOTWELL
LAMPS*
H5730G
With the relevant door open, insert a small

flat-bladed screwdriver under the forward edge
of the lens. to lever the lamp unit out of the
door. Pull the bulb to remove.
H5729G
Twist and pull to remove the bulb holder from

the lens assembly then depress the two catches
(solid arrows in upper inset) and pull the bulb
from the holder to remove.
Before fitting the replacement bulb, note the
flat and the tab on the otherwise circular shape
of the bulb mounting flange. The tab acts as a
key to enable correct positioning of the bulb in
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass with your
fingers. If necessary, clean the bulb with
methylated spirits.
After the replacement of a fog lamp bulb, the
alignment of the lamp should be checked by a
325
Bulb Replacement
COURTESY LAMPS*
TAILGATE LAMP
H4081
Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver under the

lens and carefully prise the lens from the lamp
unit. Pull the bulb to remove.
H5733G
Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into the

indent on the side of the lens and carefully prise
the lens from the lamp unit.
Pull the bulb to remove.
326
Bulb Replacement
VANITY MIRROR LAMP*
MAP LAMP
H5735G
With the vanity mirror cover open, use a small

flat-bladed screwdriver to lever the relevant
lens from the mirror/lamp unit. Pull the bulb to
remove.
H5734G
Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into the

indent on the side of the lens and prise the lens
from the lamp unit. Pull the bulb out to remove
it.
327
Bulb Replacement
MIRROR DOWNLIGHTER
H5736G
Use a small flat-bladed screwdriver to lever the

lens from the mirror/lamp unit. Twist the bulb
holder to reveal the bulb.
328
Technical Data
Lubricants & Fluids
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Capacities
CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Engines
ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Electrical System
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Steering
STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Wheels & Tires

WHEELS & TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
TIRE PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Vehicle Weights
VEHICLE WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Dimensions
DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Towing
TOWING WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
329
Technical Data
LAND ROVER
RECOMMENDS
330
Lubricants & Fluids

Technical Data
Lubricants
& Fluids
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

Recommendations for all climates and conditions.
Note:
Recommended oils are complete in themselves and additives should not be used.
Note:
It is essential to change oil much more frequently if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions,
especially if deep wading is carried out.
Engine oil - V8 vehicles
Use only oils Certified for Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute (API). To
protect your engines warranty, use an SAE 5W/30 oil meeting specification
WSS-M2C205-A (GF3).
Engine oil - V6 vehicles
Use only oils Certified for Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute (API). To
protect your engines warranty, use an SAE 5W/30 oil meeting specification
WSS-M2C929-A (GF4).
Main gearbox
All vehicles: Shell ATF M1375.4.
Transfer gearbox
All vehicles: Shell TF 0753.
Front differential:
All vehicles: SAF XO.
Rear differential:
Non-locking: SAF XO.
Locking: SAFXJ
Power steering
Texaco Cold Climate PAS fluid 14315.
Brake reservoir
Use Shell DOT4 ESL or a low viscosity DOT4 brake fluid that meets ISO 4925 class 6 and Land Rover
LRES22BF03 requirements.
Windshield washers
Screen washer fluid.
Engine cooling system
Texaco XLC, with one part antifreeze to one part water for protection down to -33F (-36C).
331
Lubricants & Fluids

Caution:
Be aware that different types of antifreeze are VERY different from each other; even different
types from the same manufacturer.
The use of non-approved antifreeze will have an adverse effect on the engine cooling system and
therefore engine durability.
Inertia reel seat belts
DO NOT LUBRICATE. These components are lubricated for life during manufacture.
332
Capacities
Capacities
CAPACITIES
The following capacities are approximate and provided as a guide only. All oil levels must be checked
using the dipstick or level plugs as applicable.
Fuel tank
Engine oil (dry fill):
- V8 Petrol vehicles
Engine oil refill and filter change:
Engine oil minimum to maximum on dipstick:
Automatic gearbox
Transfer box
Front differential
Rear differential - non-locking
Rear differential - electronic locking
Washer reservoir
Cooling system (fill from dry):
Cooling system (refill):
333
86 litres
22.72 gallons
8.6 litres
6,3 litres
18.18 Pints
13.31 pints
7,7 litres
5,7 litres
13.5 pints
16.27 pints
1.5 litres
1.4 litres
Fill for life.
1.5 litres
0,69 litres
1,16 litres
1,61 litres
5,0 litres
3.17 pints
2.6 pints
Fill for life.
3.17 pints
1.46 pints
2.45 pints
3.4 pints
10.57 pints
15 litres
12 litres
31.7 pints
25.36 pints
9,5 litres
8,5 litres
20 pints
17.9 pints
Engines
Engines
ENGINES
V8
Fuel
Displacement
Firing order
Idle speed
Bore
Stroke
Number of cylinders
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Spark plug gap
Premium Unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 91

or higher
4394 cm3
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
550 - 850 rev/min
88,0 mm
90,3 mm
8
10.75:1
NGK IFR5N10
1,5 mm (0.060 in.)
V6
Fuel
Displacement
Firing order
Idle speed
Bore
Stroke
Number of cylinders
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Spark plug gap
Premium Unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 90

or higher
4009 cm3
1-4-2-5-3-6
700 - 75
600 - 900 rev/min
100,4 mm
84,4 mm
6
9.7:1
Motorcraft AGSF 24 PM
1,5 mm (0.060 in.)
334
Electrical System
Electrical System
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery type:
All vehicles
Group 95R, sealed for life
Battery rating:
All vehicles
75 amp/hr
Voltage and polarity

Charging circuit
12 V, negative (-) earth

Alternator
335
Steering
Steering
STEERING
Steering wheel turns lock to lock
Turning circle curb to curb
Camber angle
Castor angle
King pin inclination
Front wheel toe-out included angle
3.3
11,45 metres (37.56 ft)
-0.5
4.4
13.9
10
336
Wheels & Tires

Wheels & Tires
WHEELS & TIRES

WARNING
ALWAYS use radial-ply tyres front and back. DO NOT use cross-ply tyres, or interchange
tyres from front to back
For optimum performance and handling ALWAYS replace tyres with the same make and type
as those fitted from new at the factory. If these tyres are not available, consult your
Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice on Land Rover approved alternatives. Failure to do so
may adversely affect vehicle handling.
NEVER drive your vehicle if the tyres are badly worn, cut or damaged, or if the pressures are
incorrect.
Incorrectly inflated tyres wear rapidly and can seriously affect the vehicles safety and road
handling characteristics.
Your vehicle is fitted with tubeless road wheels that will NOT accept inner tubes. DO NOT fit
a tubed tyre.
ONLY Land Rover approved wheel and tyre combinations should be fitted to the vehicle.
Wheel size and type

Type
Alloy wheels
Size
7J x 17
8J x 18
8J x 19
5.5J x 19
140 Nm (+/- 10 Nm)
Compact spare wheel - steel

Road wheel nut torque to hub
Tire specification
Wheel size
Tire
Load Index
7J x 17 (alloy wheel) 235/70 R17 H - All terrain tire

8J x 18 (alloy wheel) 255/60 R18 H or V - All terrain tire
8J x 19 (alloy wheel) 255/55 R19 H or V - All terrain tire
111
112
111
Note: For further information on Snow Chains, see SNOW CHAINS, 273.
337
Snow Chain Fitment

Front
Rear
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Wheels & Tires

TIRE PRESSURES
Tire inflation pressures
All operating conditions
Compact spare wheel (All operating conditions)
kPa
bar
lbf/in2
Front
230
2.3
33
Rear
290
2.9
42
420
4.2
60
Note: The pressure for your spare tire should be set to the highest value given for your vehicles
wheel/tire size combination and adjusted after fitment.
Note: When towing a heavily laden trailer, tire pressures should be increased to the maximum
specified in the handbook, and road speeds limited to 100 km/h (60 mph). This excludes the compact
spare wheel* which has a maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) with tire pressures
maintained at those shown in the above table.
338
Wheels & Tires

Accessory wheels - insert details
Wheel size
Tire
Snow Chain Fitment

Front
Rear
Accessory wheel tire pressures - insert details

Loading condition
kPa
Normal operating conditions
Front
Rear
Vehicle loaded to maximum gross vehicle weight
Front
Rear
339
bar
lbf/in2
Vehicle Weights
Vehicle Weights
VEHICLE WEIGHTS
DEFINITIONS
Curb Weight
Minimum unladen vehicle weight plus a full fuel tank.
Gross Vehicle Weight

Maximum permissible weight of vehicle with driver, passengers, payload, equipment and towing
attachment load (where applicable).
Approximate curb weights (full fuel tank)

V6
V8
Maximum gross vehicle weight (GVW)
V6
V8
Maximum front axle load
All vehicles
2411 - 2625 kg
2461 - 2629 kg
5315 - 5787 lb.

5426 - 5796 lb.
3180 - 3230 kg
3230 kg
7011 - 7121 lb.

7121 lb.
1450 kg
3197 lb.
Maximum rear axle load

See vehicle VIN plate
1840 - 1875 kg
4056 - 4134 lb.
Gross train Weight (GVW + Max Trailer Weight)

See vehicle VIN plate
6680 - 6730 kg
14727 - 14837 lb.
Note: Axle weights are non-additive. The individual maximum axle weights and gross vehicle weight
must not be exceeded.
340
Dimensions
Dimensions
DIMENSIONS
B
C
E
F
G
A
H5737G
A Overall width
Overall width (mirrors folded)
B Overall height (standard ride height)
- Fixed roof
- Sunroof open
- With roof side rails
- With roof antenna module
C Approach angle (curb weight and off-road height)
D Breakover angle (curb weight and off-road height)
E Wheelbase
F Overall length
Overall length (including tow hitch - to centre of tow ball)
G Track:
- Front
- Rear
H Departure angle without tow hitch (curb weight and off-road height)
Departure angle with tow hitch (at curb weight):
- Standard ride height
- Off -road ride height
Wading depth
- Standard height
- Off-road height
Minimum ground clearance (off-road height)
Maximum gradient, nose up/down
- Continuous operation
- Drive-through
Note: Off-road height refers to vehicles with air suspension.
341
2191 mm
2009 mm
86.26 in.
79.09 in.
1887 mm
1920 mm
1891 mm
1940 mm
37.2o
124.2o
2885 mm
4848 mm
4913 mm
74.3 in.
75.6 in.
74.4 in.
76.4 in.
1605 mm
1612 mm
30o
113.6 in.
190.9 in.
193.4 in.
63.2 in.
63.5 in.
15.7o
18.5o
600 mm
700 mm
240 mm
35o
45o
23.62 in.
27.56 in.
9.45 in.
Towing
TOWING WEIGHTS
Towing
Maximum permissible towed weights

Unbraked trailers
Trailers with overrun brakes
Roof rack load (including the mass of roof rack)
Maximum permissible tongue weight
342
On-road
750 kg (1654 lb.)
3500 kg (7716 lb.)
75 kg (165 lb.)
250 kg (550 lb.)
Off-road
750 kg (1654 lb.)
1000 kg (2205 lb.)
50 kg (110 lb.)
250 kg (550 lb.)
Index
A
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Adaptive Front lighting System . . . . . . . . 230
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Air vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Air vents (rear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Airbag occupancy detection . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Airbag SRS
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Airbags
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Interior space protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
partial arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
perimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Tilt sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Anti-lock braking (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Audio system
remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Auto safety hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Automatic control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Auxiliary equipment (use of) . . . . . . . . . . 189
Auxiliary power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Axle loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Battery
disconnection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
reconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
removal and replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 268
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Battery disconnection - effects . . . . . . . . . 268
Booster starting
starting your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Brake fluid
fluid check & top-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Brakes
anti-lock brakes (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
cornering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
dynamic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
electronic brake force distribution (EBD) . . .
194
foot brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
servo assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
warning indicator (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Breakdown recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Breaking-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 173
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
door lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
front fog lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
headlamps high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
loadbay lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
mirror downlighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
number plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
puddle lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
tailgate lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
343
Index
C
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 175

Dynamic brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Dynamic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . 25

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Carpets (cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Check control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
for larger children. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
for small children and babies . . . . . . . . . 73
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Cigar lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Cleaning (exterior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Cleaning (interior). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
setting the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Cold climate starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Controls
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Convenience seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Coolant
check & top-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Cooling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Cornering brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Courtesy lamps
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Cubby box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
E
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Electronic Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Emergency towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . 174, 253
Engine
Breaking-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
breaking-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
warming-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 233
Engine compartment
V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
V8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Engine immobilisation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Engine oil
check & top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
disposal (used oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Exterior mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
F
Face level vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fluid specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Fog lamps (front)
bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Folding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Fuel
economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 235
empty tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
filling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
tank capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Fuel cut-off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fuel gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fuse box
main (passenger compartment) . . . . . . 309
D
Data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Direction indicators
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Door mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Door/puddle lamps
344
Index
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
main fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Headlamps
AFS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bulb replacement
............................
washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps high beam
bulb replacement
............................
Heated seats
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Height (of vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
erasing channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rolling codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G
Gas station safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Gauge
fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Gauges
speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Gear selector position display . . . . . . . . . . 92
Gearbox
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
default mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
electronic modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
emergency park release . . . . . . . . . 186
kick down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
selector positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Gearbox (automatic)
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Gearbox (transfer box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Gross weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Ground clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
230
316
121
316
133
133
173
200
202
164
167
167
166
165
164
165
166
254
123
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Information labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Instrument pack
instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
warning indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Interior (cleaning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Interior lamps
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Interior locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Halogen bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Handset
battery disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
customer programmable button . . . . . . 36
Headlamp Courtesy Delay . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Land Rover button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 42
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Remote suspension operation . . . . . . . . 38
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Handset compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
J
Jack (wheel changing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Jacking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Jump starting
starting your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
345
Index
K
Lower tailgate
opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Luggage anchor points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Key/handset numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Lamps
automatic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
front fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
hazard warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
headlamp courtesy delay . . . . . . . . . . . 116
headlamp flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
rear fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lamps (exterior)
direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Lamps (interior)
courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
loadspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
LATCH child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Lights
rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Load carrying
roof rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Load limit procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Loadbay lamp
Loadspace access hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Loadspace cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Loadspace lamp
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Locking wheel nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Locking/Unlocking
Single point entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Superlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Locking/unlocking
emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
interior switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
speed-related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Main fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Main message center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 251
Manual seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Map lamp
Message center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
critical warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Mirror downlighter
Mirrors
electric operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Mirrors (exterior)
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
N
Number plate lamps
O
Odometer (distance recorder) . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Off-road driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Oil (engine)
check & top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Owner maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
P
Parkbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Parts & accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Personal settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Poisonous fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Polishing (the bodywork) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Power socket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
346
Index
Power steering
emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
fluid check & top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Procedure - correct load limit . . . . . . . . . 280
Production option weights . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Punctured tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Seats
access position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
folding armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
front (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
front (power-operated). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
loadspace position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
lumbar support adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 51
manual adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
seat memory facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
second row (5-seat vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 57
second row (7-seat vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 59
table-fold position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
third row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Self-levelling suspension
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Service interval indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Service portfolio book. . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 251
Servo assistance (brakes). . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Side lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Side marker lamp
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Spare wheel (removing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Speed-related locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
automatic models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
catalyst (precautions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
warming-up the engine . . . . . . . . 173, 233
Steering column
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Steering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Steering wheel
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Storage bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
R
Radio aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Radio/cassette player
aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Rear window wash/wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Recommended tire pressures . . . . . . . . . 271
Recovery (of vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Remote controls
audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Remote handset battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Road testing on dynamometers . . . . . . . . 253
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
S
Safety in the garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Screen wash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Seat belt
adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
pretensioners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Seat belt pretensioners
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
caring for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Seat heaters
front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
347
Index
Sunroof
electric operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
roller blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
System check control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
default mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
electronic modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
emergency park release . . . . . . . . . . 186
kick down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
selector positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
sport mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Transmitter - HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Transporter or trailer lashing. . . . . . . . . . . 228
Transporting your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Settings option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Trip recorder reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
T
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Tailgate
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tailgate emergency unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Tailgate lamp
Technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Terrain Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Tether anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Tilt sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Tire
pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
punctures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
wear indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Tire glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 281
Tire information labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Tire pressures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Tires
pressure labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 277
pressure monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Tow bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Towing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Towing for recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Towing weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Trailer socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Transfer gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
U
Underbody maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Under-hood covers
refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .
284
255
255
277
V
Vanity mirror (illumination). . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirror lamp
bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Recognition
Activating the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
help commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
notepad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
steering wheel control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
327
173
287
227
340
135
162
162
163
163
162
W
Wading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Warming-up (the engine) . . . . . . . . . 173, 233
348
Index
Warning indicators
airbag SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
anti-lock braking (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
battery charging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 111
check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
cruise control active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
door open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Dynamic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . 110
HDC fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Hill Descent Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
low coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
low oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
parkbrake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
rear fog guard lamps . . . . . . 109, 110, 111
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 109
tire pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . 112
transmission fault . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 112
Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Warning lights
headlamp high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
low oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
low washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Warranty information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Washers (windshield
fluid top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Washers (windshield)
jets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Washing (the bodywork) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Weights (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Wheel
size & type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
spare (removal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Wheel changing
changing the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
jacking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
locking wheel nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Wheel chocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Wheels
locking wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers
variable delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washers
fluid top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers
blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
intermittent wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
roadspeed sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
variable delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper blade replacement
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
303
124
120
263
121
265
120
119
120
120
265
265
X
Xenon light units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
349

Land Rover LR3 Owners Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Land Rover LR3 Owners Handbook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Land Rover LR3 Owners Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What information is provided in the owner's handbook?

What information is provided in the owner's handbook?

What sections does the handbook cover?

What sections does the handbook cover?

R

Publication Part No. LRL 18 02 53 502

Land Rover 2004

Driving & Operating

Starting & Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controls & Instruments

Gas Station Information

THE REMOTE HANDSET

4. Land Rover button. The handset can be

1. Key release button. Press to release the

If the handset should fail there is an emergency

For a full description of facia controls and their

1. Headlamps and direction indicator controls

If one of these red warning lights illuminates, a

1. Battery charging (RED).

For a full description of warning lights and their

4. Airbag SRS (RED).

For a full description of the message centre and

LAMPS MASTER SWITCH

To view the next service date, turn the starter

The detent positions from fully pushed in are:

2. Front fog lamps*

2. Normal speed wipe.

3. Rear fog lamps

3. Fast speed wipe.

If front fog lamps are not fitted, the rear fog

For a single wipe, pull the lever down and

Headlamp delay feature

Intermittent variable delay

With the master switch in positions 2, 3 or 4,

With the lever in position 1, rotate the switch to

Rear window wash/wipe

For more detailed information on the wash/wipe

HEADLAMP OFF DELAY

Single point entry, allowing only the drivers

Panic alarm, for personal protection. See,

Headlamp courtesy delay, providing

Starter key reminder

Air suspension control, allows remote

Automatic transmission can only be started

To apply the parkbrake, lift the lever and release

To move from P or N into a drive gear

If your vehicle is fitted with the drivers seat

The front passenger seat is equipped with an

The feature is optional and can be adjusted by

For more detailed information on automatic

REMOVING THE BOOM

is possible to receive an intermittent

To activate voice control:

Voice control provides a safe and convenient

Briefly pull the control paddle (your Audio

Note: It is only necessary to use the steering

A number of voice commands are available, and

Defined voice commands

Activating the system

Voice help To list all commands.